Guaranty and Declaration
Copyright
© 2025 RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark Information
RIGOL®is the trademark of RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Notices
•    RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
•    RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications and pricing
     policies at the company's sole decision.
•    Information in this publication replaces all previously released materials.
•    Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
•    RIGOL shall not be liable for either incidental or consequential losses in connection with the
     furnishing, use, or performance of this manual, as well as any information contained.
•    Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied, photocopied, or rearranged without prior
     written approval of RIGOL.
Product Certification
RIGOL guarantees that this product conforms to the national and industrial standards in China as
well as the ISO9001:2015 standard and the ISO14001:2015 standard. Other international standard
conformance certifications are in progress.
Contact Us
If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual, please contact
RIGOL.
E-mail: service@rigol.com
Website: http://www.rigol.com
    Section                   Description                                                                                                                                Page
    List of Figures.............................................................................................................................XIX
    List of Tables................................................................................................................................ XX
     1 Document Overview                               ....................................................................................................... 1
     2 Programming Overview                                    .................................................................................................3
          2.1 SCPI Command Overview                                .................................................................................................................3
          2.2 Remote Control                    .................................................................................................................................... 5
                 2.2.1 Remote Control via USB                               .......................................................................................................6
                 2.2.2 Remote Control via LAN                                ...................................................................................................... 6
          2.3 Sequential Commands and Overlapped Commands                                                            ..............................................................7
     3 Command System                             ......................................................................................................... 11
          3.1 Root Commands                      ................................................................................................................................11
                 3.1.1 :CLEar             ........................................................................................................................................11
                 3.1.2 :RUN             ..........................................................................................................................................11
                 3.1.3 :STOP             ........................................................................................................................................ 12
                 3.1.4 :SINGle              ..................................................................................................................................... 13
                 3.1.5 :TFORce               ....................................................................................................................................13
          3.2 :AUToset Commands                          ........................................................................................................................14
                 3.2.1 :AUToset                ...................................................................................................................................14
                 3.2.2 :AUToset:PEAK                      ....................................................................................................................... 15
                 3.2.3 :AUToset:OPENch                          ................................................................................................................. 15
                 3.2.4 :AUToset:OVERlap                          ................................................................................................................ 16
                 3.2.5 :AUToset:KEEPcoup                           .............................................................................................................. 17
                 3.2.6 :AUToset:LOCK                      .......................................................................................................................17
                 3.2.7 :AUToset:ENAble                        ...................................................................................................................18
          3.3 :ACQuire Commands                          ........................................................................................................................19
                 3.3.1 :ACQuire:AVERages                           ..............................................................................................................19
                 3.3.2 :ACQuire:MDEPth                          ................................................................................................................. 20
                 3.3.3 :ACQuire:TYPE                     ........................................................................................................................21
                 3.3.4 :ACQuire:SRATe?                       ....................................................................................................................22
                 3.3.5 :ACQuire:ULTRa:MODE                                ....................................................................................................... 23
                 3.3.6 :ACQuire:ULTRa:TIMeout                                 ................................................................................................... 24
                 3.3.7 :ACQuire:ULTRa:MAXFrame                                     .............................................................................................. 24
          3.4 :BUS<n> Commands                            ....................................................................................................................... 25
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                                                                                                    I
            3.4.1 :BUS<n>:MODE           .................................................................................................................... 25
            3.4.2 :BUS<n>:DISPlay          .................................................................................................................. 26
            3.4.3 :BUS<n>:FORMat            .................................................................................................................26
            3.4.4 :BUS<n>:EVENt         .....................................................................................................................27
            3.4.5 :BUS<n>:LABel        ......................................................................................................................28
            3.4.6 :BUS<n>:DATA?          .....................................................................................................................28
            3.4.7 :BUS<n>:EEXPort           ..................................................................................................................29
            3.4.8 :BUS<n>:POSition           ................................................................................................................30
            3.4.9 :BUS<n>:THReshold              ............................................................................................................31
           3.4.10 :BUS<n>:PARallel          ................................................................................................................. 32
                 3.4.10.1 :BUS<n>:PARallel:BUS                      ........................................................................................ 33
                 3.4.10.2 :BUS<n>:PARallel:CLK                      .........................................................................................34
                 3.4.10.3 :BUS<n>:PARallel:SLOPe                         ....................................................................................34
                 3.4.10.4 :BUS<n>:PARallel:WIDTh                          ...................................................................................35
                 3.4.10.5 :BUS<n>:PARallel:BITX                      ....................................................................................... 36
                 3.4.10.6 :BUS<n>:PARallel:SOURce                           ................................................................................ 37
                 3.4.10.7 :BUS<n>:PARallel:ENDian                          ................................................................................. 37
                 3.4.10.8 :BUS<n>:PARallel:POLarity                          ............................................................................... 38
           3.4.11 :BUS<n>:RS232          .....................................................................................................................39
                 3.4.11.1 :BUS<n>:RS232:TX                    ...............................................................................................40
                 3.4.11.2 :BUS<n>:RS232:RX                    .............................................................................................. 40
                 3.4.11.3 :BUS<n>:RS232:POLarity                          ...................................................................................41
                 3.4.11.4 :BUS<n>:RS232:PARity                        .......................................................................................42
                 3.4.11.5 :BUS<n>:RS232:ENDian                          .....................................................................................43
                 3.4.11.6 :BUS<n>:RS232:BAUD                         ........................................................................................43
                 3.4.11.7 :BUS<n>:RS232:DBITs                       .........................................................................................44
                 3.4.11.8 :BUS<n>:RS232:SBITs                      ......................................................................................... 45
           3.4.12 :BUS<n>:IIC     ............................................................................................................................45
                 3.4.12.1 :BUS<n>:IIC:SCLK:SOURce                           ................................................................................46
                 3.4.12.2 :BUS<n>:IIC:SDA:SOURce                           ................................................................................. 46
                 3.4.12.3 :BUS<n>:IIC:EXCHange                        ...................................................................................... 47
                 3.4.12.4 :BUS<n>:IIC:ADDRess                       .........................................................................................48
           3.4.13 :BUS<n>:SPI     ...........................................................................................................................48
                 3.4.13.1 :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SOURce                            ............................................................................... 49
                 3.4.13.2 :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe                          .................................................................................. 50
                 3.4.13.3 :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:SOURce                             ..............................................................................50
                 3.4.13.4 :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:SOURce                             ..............................................................................51
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                   Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
II
                     3.4.13.5 :BUS<n>:SPI:POLarity                        ......................................................................................... 52
                     3.4.13.6 :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:POLarity                               ............................................................................. 52
                     3.4.13.7 :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:POLarity                               ............................................................................. 53
                     3.4.13.8 :BUS<n>:SPI:DBITs                     ...............................................................................................54
                     3.4.13.9 :BUS<n>:SPI:ENDian                        ........................................................................................... 54
                    3.4.13.10 :BUS<n>:SPI:MODE                        .............................................................................................55
                    3.4.13.11 :BUS<n>:SPI:TIMeout:TIME                               .............................................................................. 56
                    3.4.13.12 :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:SOURce                            .................................................................................... 57
                    3.4.13.13 :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:POLarity                           ................................................................................... 57
             3.4.14 :BUS<n>:CAN             ........................................................................................................................ 58
                     3.4.14.1 :BUS<n>:CAN:SOURce                            ....................................................................................... 59
                     3.4.14.2 :BUS<n>:CAN:STYPe                         ...........................................................................................60
                     3.4.14.3 :BUS<n>:CAN:BAUD                          ........................................................................................... 60
                     3.4.14.4 :BUS<n>:CAN:SPOint                          ......................................................................................... 61
             3.4.15 :BUS<n>:LIN           .......................................................................................................................... 62
                     3.4.15.1 :BUS<n>:LIN:PARity                       .............................................................................................62
                     3.4.15.2 :BUS<n>:LIN:SOURce                          ......................................................................................... 63
                     3.4.15.3 :BUS<n>:LIN:STANdard                            ..................................................................................... 63
         3.5 :BODeplot Commands                .....................................................................................................................64
               3.5.1 :BODeplot:ENABle               ................................................................................................................64
               3.5.2 :BODeplot:RUNStop                 ............................................................................................................ 65
               3.5.3 :BODeplot:SWEeptype                    ........................................................................................................65
               3.5.4 :BODeplot:REF:IN             ..................................................................................................................66
               3.5.5 :BODeplot:REF:OUT                ............................................................................................................. 67
               3.5.6 :BODeplot:STARt             ...................................................................................................................67
               3.5.7 :BODeplot:STOP             ....................................................................................................................68
               3.5.8 :BODeplot:POINts              .................................................................................................................69
               3.5.9 :BODeplot:VOLTage                ............................................................................................................. 69
         3.6 :CHANnel<n> Commands                      ............................................................................................................. 70
               3.6.1 :CHANnel<n>:BWLimit                     ...................................................................................................... 71
               3.6.2 :CHANnel<n>:COUPling                       ....................................................................................................72
               3.6.3 :CHANnel<n>:DISPlay                   ........................................................................................................ 72
               3.6.4 :CHANnel<n>:INVert                  .......................................................................................................... 73
               3.6.5 :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet                    .........................................................................................................74
               3.6.6 :CHANnel<n>:TCALibrate                       ................................................................................................. 74
               3.6.7 :CHANnel<n>:SCALe                   .......................................................................................................... 75
               3.6.8 :CHANnel<n>:PROBe                    ......................................................................................................... 76
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                                                                                   III
            3.6.9 :CHANnel<n>:LABel:SHOW                      ............................................................................................. 77
           3.6.10 :CHANnel<n>:LABel:CONTent                        .........................................................................................77
           3.6.11 :CHANnel<n>:UNITs              ........................................................................................................... 78
           3.6.12 :CHANnel<n>:VERNier                .......................................................................................................79
           3.6.13 :CHANnel<n>:POSition                ......................................................................................................79
       3.7 :COUNter Commands          ...................................................................................................................... 80
            3.7.1 :COUNter:CURRent?             ............................................................................................................ 80
            3.7.2 :COUNter:ENABle          ................................................................................................................. 81
            3.7.3 :COUNter:SOURce           ................................................................................................................81
            3.7.4 :COUNter:MODE          ...................................................................................................................82
            3.7.5 :COUNter:NDIGits          ................................................................................................................ 83
            3.7.6 :COUNter:TOTalize:ENABle                  ................................................................................................83
            3.7.7 :COUNter:TOTalize:CLEar               ....................................................................................................84
       3.8 :CURSor Commands         .........................................................................................................................84
            3.8.1 :CURSor:MODE         ......................................................................................................................86
            3.8.2 :CURSor:MEASure:INDicator                    ............................................................................................ 87
            3.8.3 :CURSor:MANual          .................................................................................................................. 88
                  3.8.3.1 :CURSor:MANual:TYPE                       ....................................................................................... 88
                  3.8.3.2 :CURSor:MANual:SOURce                           ................................................................................. 88
                  3.8.3.3 :CURSor:MANual:CAX                       .........................................................................................89
                  3.8.3.4 :CURSor:MANual:CAY                      ......................................................................................... 90
                  3.8.3.5 :CURSor:MANual:CBX                       ......................................................................................... 90
                  3.8.3.6 :CURSor:MANual:CBY                      ......................................................................................... 91
                  3.8.3.7 :CURSor:MANual:AXValue?                            ...............................................................................92
                  3.8.3.8 :CURSor:MANual:AYValue?                           ............................................................................... 92
                  3.8.3.9 :CURSor:MANual:BXValue?                           ............................................................................... 93
                 3.8.3.10 :CURSor:MANual:BYValue?                           ............................................................................... 93
                 3.8.3.11 :CURSor:MANual:XDELta?                          ................................................................................. 94
                 3.8.3.12 :CURSor:MANual:IXDelta?                          .................................................................................94
                 3.8.3.13 :CURSor:MANual:YDELta?                          ................................................................................. 95
            3.8.4 :CURSor:TRACk        ......................................................................................................................95
                  3.8.4.1 :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce1                          ..................................................................................95
                  3.8.4.2 :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce2                          ..................................................................................96
                  3.8.4.3 :CURSor:TRACk:CAX                     ............................................................................................97
                  3.8.4.4 :CURSor:TRACk:CBX                    ............................................................................................ 97
                  3.8.4.5 :CURSor:TRACk:CAY                    ............................................................................................ 98
                  3.8.4.6 :CURSor:TRACk:CBY                    .............................................................................................99
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                  Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
IV
                       3.8.4.7 :CURSor:TRACk:AXValue?                             ..................................................................................99
                       3.8.4.8 :CURSor:TRACk:AYValue?                             ................................................................................100
                       3.8.4.9 :CURSor:TRACk:BXValue?                             ................................................................................100
                     3.8.4.10 :CURSor:TRACk:BYValue?                              ................................................................................ 101
                     3.8.4.11 :CURSor:TRACk:XDELta?                             ..................................................................................101
                     3.8.4.12 :CURSor:TRACk:YDELta?                             ..................................................................................102
                     3.8.4.13 :CURSor:TRACk:IXDelta?                            ................................................................................. 102
                     3.8.4.14 :CURSor:TRACk:MODE                             .....................................................................................103
               3.8.5 :CURSor:XY         ...........................................................................................................................103
                       3.8.5.1 :CURSor:XY:AX                  .................................................................................................... 103
                       3.8.5.2 :CURSor:XY:BX                  .....................................................................................................104
                       3.8.5.3 :CURSor:XY:AY                  .....................................................................................................105
                       3.8.5.4 :CURSor:XY:BY                  .....................................................................................................105
                       3.8.5.5 :CURSor:XY:AXValue?                         ....................................................................................... 106
                       3.8.5.6 :CURSor:XY:AYValue?                        ........................................................................................106
                       3.8.5.7 :CURSor:XY:BXValue?                        ........................................................................................107
                       3.8.5.8 :CURSor:XY:BYValue?                        ........................................................................................ 107
                       3.8.5.9 :CURSor:XY:XDELta?                       ..........................................................................................107
                     3.8.5.10 :CURSor:XY:YDELta?                        ..........................................................................................108
         3.9 :DISPlay Commands              .......................................................................................................................108
               3.9.1 :DISPlay:CLEar          ......................................................................................................................109
               3.9.2 :DISPlay:TYPE          .......................................................................................................................109
               3.9.3 :DISPlay:GRADing:TIME                     ................................................................................................... 110
               3.9.4 :DISPlay:WBRightness                   ...................................................................................................... 111
               3.9.5 :DISPlay:GRID           ...................................................................................................................... 111
               3.9.6 :DISPlay:GBRightness                  ........................................................................................................112
               3.9.7 :DISPlay:DATA?            ....................................................................................................................112
               3.9.8 :DISPlay:RULers            ...................................................................................................................113
               3.9.9 :DISPlay:COLor            .................................................................................................................... 114
             3.9.10 :DISPlay:WHOLd                .................................................................................................................114
        3.10 :DVM Commands              ............................................................................................................................115
             3.10.1 :DVM:CURRent?                ..................................................................................................................115
             3.10.2 :DVM:ENABle             .......................................................................................................................115
             3.10.3 :DVM:SOURce              ......................................................................................................................116
             3.10.4 :DVM:MODE             .........................................................................................................................117
        3.11 :HISTogram Commands                   ................................................................................................................117
             3.11.1 :HISTogram:ENABle                   ........................................................................................................... 118
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                                                                                    V
           3.11.2 :HISTogram:TYPE                   ................................................................................................................119
           3.11.3 :HISTogram:SOURce                       ..........................................................................................................119
           3.11.4 :HISTogram:HEIGht                     ............................................................................................................120
           3.11.5 :HISTogram:RANGe:LEFT                            ................................................................................................. 120
           3.11.6 :HISTogram:RANGe:RIGHt                             .............................................................................................. 121
           3.11.7 :HISTogram:RANGe:TOP                            .................................................................................................. 122
           3.11.8 :HISTogram:RANGe:BOTTom                                 ..........................................................................................123
           3.11.9 :HISTogram:STATistics:RESult?                              ....................................................................................... 124
      3.12 IEEE488.2 Common Commands                                ................................................................................................ 124
           3.12.1 *IDN?        ......................................................................................................................................126
           3.12.2 *RST       ........................................................................................................................................ 127
           3.12.3 *CLS       ........................................................................................................................................ 127
           3.12.4 *ESE       .........................................................................................................................................127
           3.12.5 *ESR?        ...................................................................................................................................... 128
           3.12.6 *OPC        .......................................................................................................................................129
           3.12.7 *RCL       ........................................................................................................................................ 129
           3.12.8 *SAV       ........................................................................................................................................130
           3.12.9 *SRE       ........................................................................................................................................ 130
          3.12.10 *STB?        ...................................................................................................................................... 131
          3.12.11 *WAI        ....................................................................................................................................... 131
          3.12.12 *TST?        .......................................................................................................................................132
      3.13 Digital Channel Commands                         ........................................................................................................ 133
           3.13.1 :LA:ENABle             ............................................................................................................................133
           3.13.2 :LA:ACTive            .............................................................................................................................133
           3.13.3 :LA:AUTosort               ........................................................................................................................134
           3.13.4 :LA:DELete            .............................................................................................................................135
           3.13.5 :LA:DIGital:ENABle                   ............................................................................................................. 135
           3.13.6 :LA:DIGital:LABel                 .................................................................................................................136
           3.13.7 :LA:POD<n>:DISPlay                        .........................................................................................................137
           3.13.8 :LA:POD<n>:THReshold                            .................................................................................................. 137
           3.13.9 :LA:SIZE         ..................................................................................................................................138
      3.14 :LAN Commands                ............................................................................................................................. 139
           3.14.1 :LAN:DHCP              ........................................................................................................................... 139
           3.14.2 :LAN:AUToip               .........................................................................................................................140
           3.14.3 :LAN:GATeway                 ..................................................................................................................... 140
           3.14.4 :LAN:DNS             ..............................................................................................................................141
           3.14.5 :LAN:MAC?              ........................................................................................................................... 142
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                             Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
VI
             3.14.6 :LAN:DSERver?                .................................................................................................................... 142
             3.14.7 :LAN:MANual               .......................................................................................................................143
             3.14.8 :LAN:IPADdress                ................................................................................................................... 143
             3.14.9 :LAN:SMASk              .........................................................................................................................144
            3.14.10 :LAN:STATus?              ....................................................................................................................... 145
            3.14.11 :LAN:VISA?            ............................................................................................................................145
            3.14.12 :LAN:MDNS              ..........................................................................................................................146
            3.14.13 :LAN:HOST:NAME                     ..............................................................................................................147
            3.14.14 :LAN:DESCription                  ............................................................................................................... 147
            3.14.15 :LAN:APPLy            ...........................................................................................................................148
        3.15 :MASK Commands                 ..........................................................................................................................148
             3.15.1 :MASK:ENABle                .....................................................................................................................148
             3.15.2 :MASK:SOURce                 ....................................................................................................................149
             3.15.3 :MASK:OPERate                  .................................................................................................................. 150
             3.15.4 :MASK:X          .................................................................................................................................150
             3.15.5 :MASK:Y          .................................................................................................................................151
             3.15.6 :MASK:CREate                ......................................................................................................................152
             3.15.7 :MASK:RESet              ........................................................................................................................ 152
             3.15.8 :MASK:FAILed?                .................................................................................................................... 153
             3.15.9 :MASK:PASSed?                 ...................................................................................................................153
            3.15.10 :MASK:TOTal?              .......................................................................................................................154
            3.15.11 :MASK:OUTPut:ENABle                         .................................................................................................... 154
            3.15.12 :MASK:OUTPut:EVENt                        .......................................................................................................155
            3.15.13 :MASK:OUTPut:TIME                       ......................................................................................................... 155
        3.16 :MATH<n> Commands                      .................................................................................................................156
             3.16.1 :MATH<n>:DISPlay                     ............................................................................................................159
             3.16.2 :MATH<n>:OPERator                        ........................................................................................................160
             3.16.3 :MATH<n>:SOURce1                        ........................................................................................................ 160
             3.16.4 :MATH<n>:SOURce2                        ........................................................................................................ 162
             3.16.5 :MATH<n>:LSOurce1                        ........................................................................................................163
             3.16.6 :MATH<n>:LSOurce2                        ........................................................................................................163
             3.16.7 :MATH<n>:SCALe                     ..............................................................................................................164
             3.16.8 :MATH<n>:OFFSet                     .............................................................................................................165
             3.16.9 :MATH<n>:INVert                    ..............................................................................................................166
            3.16.10 :MATH<n>:RESet                    ............................................................................................................... 166
            3.16.11 :MATH<n>:GRID                    ................................................................................................................ 167
            3.16.12 :MATH<n>:EXPand                      ............................................................................................................167
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                           DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                            Guide
                                                                                                                                                                    VII
          3.16.13 :MATH<n>:WAVetype             ...................................................................................................... 168
          3.16.14 :MATH<n>:FFT:SOURce               ...................................................................................................169
          3.16.15 :MATH<n>:FFT:WINDow                 .................................................................................................169
          3.16.16 :MATH<n>:FFT:UNIT           .........................................................................................................170
          3.16.17 :MATH<n>:FFT:SCALe            ...................................................................................................... 171
          3.16.18 :MATH<n>:FFT:OFFSet             .....................................................................................................172
          3.16.19 :MATH<n>:FFT:HSCale             .....................................................................................................173
          3.16.20 :MATH<n>:FFT:HCENter               ..................................................................................................173
          3.16.21 :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:STARt                        ................................................................................174
          3.16.22 :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:END                       ...................................................................................175
          3.16.23 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ENABle                      .................................................................................... 175
          3.16.24 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:NUM                     ........................................................................................ 176
          3.16.25 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:THReshold                         ..............................................................................177
          3.16.26 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:EXCursion                        ...............................................................................177
          3.16.27 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ORDer                     ......................................................................................178
          3.16.28 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:RES?                   ..........................................................................................178
          3.16.29 :MATH<n>:FILTer:TYPE            .................................................................................................... 179
          3.16.30 :MATH<n>:FILTer:W1           ........................................................................................................180
          3.16.31 :MATH<n>:FILTer:W2           ........................................................................................................181
          3.16.32 :MATH<n>:SENSitivity           ..................................................................................................... 182
          3.16.33 :MATH<n>:DISTance           .........................................................................................................183
          3.16.34 :MATH<n>:THReshold1               ...................................................................................................183
          3.16.35 :MATH<n>:THReshold2               ...................................................................................................184
          3.16.36 :MATH<n>:THReshold3               ...................................................................................................185
          3.16.37 :MATH<n>:THReshold4               ...................................................................................................186
          3.16.38 :MATH<n>:WINDow:TITLe?                   ........................................................................................... 187
          3.16.39 :MATH<n>:LABel:SHOW                ................................................................................................. 187
       3.17 :MEASure Commands       ....................................................................................................................188
           3.17.1 :MEASure:SOURce        ..............................................................................................................194
           3.17.2 :MEASure:ITEM     ................................................................................................................... 195
           3.17.3 :MEASure:CLEar     .................................................................................................................. 196
           3.17.4 :MEASure:AMSource           .........................................................................................................197
           3.17.5 :MEASure:STATistic:COUNt               ............................................................................................. 197
           3.17.6 :MEASure:STATistic:DISPlay              ............................................................................................ 198
           3.17.7 :MEASure:STATistic:RESet            ................................................................................................199
           3.17.8 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM            ................................................................................................. 199
           3.17.9 :MEASure:SETup:MAX            .......................................................................................................201
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                               Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
VIII
            3.17.10 :MEASure:SETup:MID                    ........................................................................................................ 202
            3.17.11 :MEASure:SETup:MIN                     ........................................................................................................203
            3.17.12 :MEASure:SETup:PSA                    .........................................................................................................203
            3.17.13 :MEASure:SETup:PSB                   .........................................................................................................204
            3.17.14 :MEASure:SETup:DSA                    ........................................................................................................ 205
            3.17.15 :MEASure:SETup:DSB                    ........................................................................................................ 206
            3.17.16 :MEASure:THReshold:SOURce                              ....................................................................................... 206
            3.17.17 :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE                          ............................................................................................. 207
            3.17.18 :MEASure:THReshold:DEFault                            ........................................................................................208
            3.17.19 :MEASure:AREA               ...................................................................................................................208
            3.17.20 :MEASure:INDicator                  .......................................................................................................... 209
            3.17.21 :MEASure:COUNter:ENABle                           ............................................................................................209
            3.17.22 :MEASure:COUNter:SOURce                             .......................................................................................... 210
            3.17.23 :MEASure:COUNter:VALue?                           ............................................................................................211
            3.17.24 :MEASure:AMP:TYPE                    ......................................................................................................... 211
            3.17.25 :MEASure:AMP:MANual:TOP                             ......................................................................................... 212
            3.17.26 :MEASure:AMP:MANual:BASE                              ....................................................................................... 212
            3.17.27 :MEASure:CATegory                   ...........................................................................................................213
        3.18 :QUICK Command              ...........................................................................................................................214
             3.18.1 :QUICk:OPERation                 ..............................................................................................................214
        3.19 :RECord Commands               ....................................................................................................................... 215
             3.19.1 :RECord:WRECord:ENABle                          .............................................................................................. 215
             3.19.2 :RECord:ENABle              .................................................................................................................. 215
             3.19.3 :RECord:WRECord:OPERate                           ............................................................................................ 216
             3.19.4 :RECord:STARt             ..................................................................................................................... 217
             3.19.5 :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes                           .............................................................................................217
             3.19.6 :RECord:FRAMes                .................................................................................................................218
             3.19.7 :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes:MAX                                 .................................................................................. 218
             3.19.8 :RECord:WRECord: FMAX?                          .............................................................................................. 219
             3.19.9 :RECord:WRECord:FINTerval                          ...........................................................................................219
            3.19.10 :RECord:WRECord:PROMpt                            ............................................................................................ 220
            3.19.11 :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent                          ............................................................................................220
            3.19.12 :RECord:CURRent                ............................................................................................................... 221
            3.19.13 :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent:TIME?                                 ...............................................................................222
            3.19.14 :RECord:WREPlay:FSTart                      ...................................................................................................222
            3.19.15 :RECord:WREPlay:FEND                       ....................................................................................................223
            3.19.16 :RECord:WREPlay:FMAX?                        .................................................................................................223
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                                                                                   IX
          3.19.17 :RECord:WREPlay:FINTerval                     ............................................................................................ 224
          3.19.18 :RECord:WREPlay:MODE                    ..................................................................................................224
          3.19.19 :RECord:WREPlay:DIRection                      ........................................................................................... 225
          3.19.20 :RECord:WREPlay:OPERate                      ..............................................................................................226
          3.19.21 :RECord:PLAY        ....................................................................................................................... 226
          3.19.22 :RECord:WREPlay:BACK                   ....................................................................................................227
          3.19.23 :RECord:WREPlay:NEXT                  ....................................................................................................227
          3.19.24 :RECord:WREPlay:PLAY                  .....................................................................................................228
      3.20 :REFerence Commands             ................................................................................................................. 228
           3.20.1 :REFerence:SOURce              ........................................................................................................... 228
           3.20.2 :REFerence:VSCale            ............................................................................................................. 229
           3.20.3 :REFerence:VOFFset              ...........................................................................................................230
           3.20.4 :REFerence:RESet           ................................................................................................................230
           3.20.5 :REFerence:CURRent               ......................................................................................................... 231
           3.20.6 :REFerence:SAVE           .................................................................................................................231
           3.20.7 :REFerence:COLor            ...............................................................................................................232
           3.20.8 :REFerence:LABel:ENABle                   ................................................................................................ 233
           3.20.9 :REFerence:LABel:CONTent                     .............................................................................................233
      3.21 :SAVE Commands         ............................................................................................................................234
           3.21.1 :SAVE:IMAGe:INVert              .......................................................................................................... 234
           3.21.2 :SAVE:IMAGe:COLor               .......................................................................................................... 235
           3.21.3 :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat                  .......................................................................................................235
           3.21.4 :SAVE:IMAGe:HEADer                 ....................................................................................................... 236
           3.21.5 :SAVE:IMAGe:DATA?               .......................................................................................................... 236
           3.21.6 :SAVE:IMAGe        ........................................................................................................................237
           3.21.7 :SAVE:SETup      ..........................................................................................................................238
           3.21.8 :SAVE:WAVeform            ................................................................................................................ 239
           3.21.9 :SAVE:MEMory:WAVeform                       .............................................................................................. 240
          3.21.10 :SAVE:STATus?        ......................................................................................................................240
          3.21.11 :SAVE:OVERlap          .................................................................................................................... 241
          3.21.12 :SAVE:PREFix       ........................................................................................................................ 241
          3.21.13 :SAVe:SMB:SERVerpath                  .....................................................................................................242
          3.21.14 :SAVe:SMB:USERname                  ......................................................................................................243
          3.21.15 :SAVe:SMB:PASSword                 ........................................................................................................243
          3.21.16 :SAVe:SMB:AUToconnect                    ................................................................................................. 244
          3.21.17 :SAVe:SMB:CONNect                 .........................................................................................................245
          3.21.18 :SAVe:SMB:DISConnect                  .................................................................................................... 245
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                     Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
X
            3.21.19 :SAVe:SMB:CONState?                    ...................................................................................................... 245
            3.21.20 :LOAD:SETup           ........................................................................................................................ 246
        3.22 :SEARch Commands              .......................................................................................................................247
             3.22.1 :SEARch:COUNt?               .................................................................................................................247
             3.22.2 :SEARch:STATe           ..................................................................................................................... 247
             3.22.3 :SEARch:MODE              ....................................................................................................................248
             3.22.4 :SEARch:EVENt            .................................................................................................................... 248
             3.22.5 :SEARch:VALue?             .................................................................................................................. 249
             3.22.6 :SEARch:EDGE:SLOPe                   ........................................................................................................ 249
             3.22.7 :SEARch:EDGE:SOURce                     .....................................................................................................250
             3.22.8 :SEARch:EDGE:THReshold                        ............................................................................................... 251
             3.22.9 :SEARch:PULSe:POLarity                     .................................................................................................. 251
            3.22.10 :SEARch:PULSe:QUALifier                      ................................................................................................ 252
            3.22.11 :SEARch:PULSe:SOURce                      ................................................................................................... 253
            3.22.12 :SEARch:PULSe:UWIDth                      ................................................................................................... 253
            3.22.13 :SEARch:PULSe:LWIDth                     .................................................................................................... 254
            3.22.14 :SEARch:PULSe:THReshold                        ..............................................................................................254
        3.23 :NAVigate Commands                ...................................................................................................................255
             3.23.1 :NAVigate:ENABle               .............................................................................................................. 255
             3.23.2 :NAVigate:MODE                ................................................................................................................256
             3.23.3 :NAVigate:TIME:SPEed                    ......................................................................................................256
             3.23.4 :NAVigate:TIME:PLAY                  ........................................................................................................257
             3.23.5 :NAVigate:TIME:END                  .........................................................................................................258
             3.23.6 :NAVigate:TIME:STARt                   ...................................................................................................... 258
             3.23.7 :NAVigate:TIME:NEXT                   .......................................................................................................259
             3.23.8 :NAVigate:TIME:BACK                   .......................................................................................................259
             3.23.9 :NAVigate:SEARch:END                     .................................................................................................... 260
            3.23.10 :NAVigate:SEARch:STARt                      ................................................................................................. 260
            3.23.11 :NAVigate:SEARch:NEXT                      .................................................................................................. 260
            3.23.12 :NAVigate:SEARch:BACK                      ..................................................................................................261
            3.23.13 :NAVigate:FRAMe:DISPlay:MODE                                .................................................................................261
            3.23.14 :NAVigate:FRAMe:END:FRAMe                              ..................................................................................... 263
            3.23.15 :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt:FRAMe                               ...................................................................................263
            3.23.16 :NAVigate:FRAMe:END                     .....................................................................................................264
            3.23.17 :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt                      ..................................................................................................264
            3.23.18 :NAVigate:FRAMe:NEXT                      ...................................................................................................265
            3.23.19 :NAVigate:FRAMe:BACK                      ...................................................................................................265
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                                                                                  XI
          3.23.20 :NAVigate:FRAMe:PLAY                ....................................................................................................266
      3.24 :SYSTem Commands         ...................................................................................................................... 266
           3.24.1 :SYSTem:AOUTput           .............................................................................................................. 267
           3.24.2 :SYSTem:BEEPer        ...................................................................................................................267
           3.24.3 :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?               ....................................................................................................268
           3.24.4 :SYSTem:PON       .......................................................................................................................268
           3.24.5 :SYSTem:PSTatus        .................................................................................................................269
           3.24.6 :SYSTem:RAMount?             ........................................................................................................... 270
           3.24.7 :SYSTem:RESet      .....................................................................................................................270
           3.24.8 :SYSTem:SETup       .................................................................................................................... 270
           3.24.9 :SYSTem:LOCKed          ................................................................................................................ 271
          3.24.10 :SYSTem:MODules?            ............................................................................................................272
          3.24.11 :SYSTem:AUToscale           ............................................................................................................272
          3.24.12 :SYSTem:GAMount?             ...........................................................................................................273
          3.24.13 :SYSTem:VERSion?          ..............................................................................................................274
          3.24.14 :SYSTem:DGSTatus?            ........................................................................................................... 274
          3.24.15 :SYSTem:KEYBOARDCheck?                     ............................................................................................275
      3.25 :SOURce Commands          ......................................................................................................................275
           3.25.1 :SOURce:OUTPut:STATe                ....................................................................................................275
           3.25.2 :SOURce:FUNCtion            ............................................................................................................ 276
           3.25.3 :SOURce:FREQuency              ......................................................................................................... 276
           3.25.4 :SOURce:PHASe         .................................................................................................................. 277
           3.25.5 :SOURce:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry                               ......................................................................... 278
           3.25.6 :SOURce:FUNCtion:SQUare:DUTY                           ................................................................................ 279
           3.25.7 :SOURce:VOLTage:AMPLitude                       ....................................................................................... 279
           3.25.8 :SOURce:VOLTage:OFFSet                  ............................................................................................... 280
           3.25.9 :SOURce:MOD:STATe              .........................................................................................................281
          3.25.10 :SOURce:MOD:TYPe              .......................................................................................................... 281
          3.25.11 :SOURce:MOD:AM:DEPTh                    ............................................................................................... 282
          3.25.12 :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FREQuency                                 .................................................................... 283
          3.25.13 :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion                               ....................................................................... 283
          3.25.14 :SOURce:MOD:FM:DEViation                      ......................................................................................... 284
          3.25.15 :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FREQuency                                 ..................................................................... 285
          3.25.16 :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion                               ........................................................................ 286
          3.25.17 :SOURce:MOD:PM:DEViation                      .........................................................................................286
          3.25.18 :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FREQuency                                 .....................................................................287
          3.25.19 :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion                               ........................................................................288
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                  Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
XII
        3.26 :TIMebase Commands               ...................................................................................................................288
             3.26.1 :TIMebase:DELay:ENABle                     .................................................................................................289
             3.26.2 :TIMebase:DELay:OFFSet                    ................................................................................................. 290
             3.26.3 :TIMebase:DELay:SCALe                    ...................................................................................................291
             3.26.4 :TIMebase[:MAIN][:OFFSet]                      ............................................................................................ 291
             3.26.5 :TIMebase[:MAIN]:SCALe                     ................................................................................................ 292
             3.26.6 :TIMebase:MODE               ............................................................................................................... 293
             3.26.7 :TIMebase:HREFerence:MODE                           .......................................................................................294
             3.26.8 :TIMebase:HREFerence:POSition                            .................................................................................. 295
             3.26.9 :TIMebase:VERNier               ............................................................................................................ 295
            3.26.10 :TIMebase:HOTKeys                ...........................................................................................................296
            3.26.11 :TIMebase:ROLL            .................................................................................................................. 296
            3.26.12 :TIMebase:XY:ENABle                 ........................................................................................................297
            3.26.13 :TIMebase:XY:X           ....................................................................................................................298
            3.26.14 :TIMebase:XY:Y           ....................................................................................................................298
            3.26.15 :TIMebase:XY:Z           ....................................................................................................................299
            3.26.16 :TIMebase:XY:GRID               ............................................................................................................299
        3.27 :TRIGger Commands             ......................................................................................................................300
             3.27.1 :TRIGger:MODE             .................................................................................................................. 300
             3.27.2 :TRIGger:COUPling               ............................................................................................................ 301
             3.27.3 :TRIGger:STATus?            ................................................................................................................302
             3.27.4 :TRIGger:SWEep             ................................................................................................................. 302
             3.27.5 :TRIGger:HOLDoff              ..............................................................................................................303
             3.27.6 :TRIGger:NREJect             ............................................................................................................... 304
             3.27.7 :TRIGger:POSition?              ............................................................................................................ 304
             3.27.8 :TRIGger:EDGE           .....................................................................................................................305
                     3.27.8.1 :TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce                          ................................................................................... 305
                     3.27.8.2 :TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe                       .......................................................................................306
                     3.27.8.3 :TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel                     .........................................................................................306
             3.27.9 :TRIGger:PULSe           ...................................................................................................................307
                     3.27.9.1 :TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce                          ..................................................................................307
                     3.27.9.2 :TRIGger:PULSe:POLarity                         .................................................................................308
                     3.27.9.3 :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN                         .....................................................................................309
                     3.27.9.4 :TRIGger:PULSe:UWIDth                          ..................................................................................309
                     3.27.9.5 :TRIGger:PULSe:LWIDth                         ...................................................................................310
                     3.27.9.6 :TRIGger:PULSe:LEVel                      ....................................................................................... 311
            3.27.10 :TRIGger:SLOPe           ...................................................................................................................311
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                                                                              XIII
                3.27.10.1 :TRIGger:SLOPe:SOURce                       ..................................................................................312
                3.27.10.2 :TRIGger:SLOPe:POLarity                      .................................................................................312
                3.27.10.3 :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN                      .....................................................................................313
                3.27.10.4 :TRIGger:SLOPe:TUPPer                      ................................................................................... 314
                3.27.10.5 :TRIGger:SLOPe:TLOWer                       ..................................................................................314
                3.27.10.6 :TRIGger:SLOPe:WINDow                         ................................................................................315
                3.27.10.7 :TRIGger:SLOPe:ALEVel                     .................................................................................... 316
                3.27.10.8 :TRIGger:SLOPe:BLEVel                    .....................................................................................316
          3.27.11 :TRIGger:VIDeo      ................................................................................................................... 317
                3.27.11.1 :TRIGger:VIDeo:SOURce                       .................................................................................. 317
                3.27.11.2 :TRIGger:VIDeo:POLarity                      ................................................................................. 318
                3.27.11.3 :TRIGger:VIDeo:MODE                      ..................................................................................... 318
                3.27.11.4 :TRIGger:VIDeo:LINE                  ......................................................................................... 319
                3.27.11.5 :TRIGger:VIDeo:STANdard                         .............................................................................. 320
                3.27.11.6 :TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel                   ........................................................................................321
          3.27.12 :TRIGger:PATTern       ................................................................................................................322
                3.27.12.1 :TRIGger:PATTern:PATTern                       ...............................................................................322
                3.27.12.2 :TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce                        ...............................................................................323
                3.27.12.3 :TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel                    .................................................................................... 324
          3.27.13 :TRIGger:DURation          ............................................................................................................ 325
                3.27.13.1 :TRIGger:DURation:SOURce                           ........................................................................... 326
                3.27.13.2 :TRIGger:DURation:TYPE                       ................................................................................. 326
                3.27.13.3 :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN                          .............................................................................. 327
                3.27.13.4 :TRIGger:DURation:TUPPer                         .............................................................................328
                3.27.13.5 :TRIGger:DURation:TLOWer                          ........................................................................... 329
                3.27.13.6 :TRIGger:DURation:LEVel                      .................................................................................330
          3.27.14 :TRIGger:TIMeout         ...............................................................................................................330
                3.27.14.1 :TRIGger:TIMeout:SOURce                         ..............................................................................331
                3.27.14.2 :TRIGger:TIMeout:SLOPe                       .................................................................................331
                3.27.14.3 :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME                      ....................................................................................332
                3.27.14.4 :TRIGger:TIMeout:LEVel                     ................................................................................... 333
          3.27.15 :TRIGger:RUNT       ....................................................................................................................333
                3.27.15.1 :TRIGger:RUNT:SOURce                       ...................................................................................334
                3.27.15.2 :TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity                      ..................................................................................334
                3.27.15.3 :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN                       ......................................................................................335
                3.27.15.4 :TRIGger:RUNT:WUPPer                        ...................................................................................336
                3.27.15.5 :TRIGger:RUNT:WLOWer                         ................................................................................. 337
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                 Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
XIV
                    3.27.15.6 :TRIGger:RUNT:ALEVel                       ..................................................................................... 337
                    3.27.15.7 :TRIGger:RUNT:BLEVel                       ......................................................................................338
            3.27.16 :TRIGger:WINDows                ............................................................................................................339
                    3.27.16.1 :TRIGger:WINDows:SOURce                               .......................................................................... 339
                    3.27.16.2 :TRIGger:WINDows:SLOPe                             ..............................................................................339
                    3.27.16.3 :TRIGger:WINDows:POSition                              ......................................................................... 340
                    3.27.16.4 :TRIGger:WINDows:TIME                           ................................................................................ 341
                    3.27.16.5 :TRIGger:WINDows:ALEVel                            ............................................................................. 341
                    3.27.16.6 :TRIGger:WINDows:BLEVel                            ............................................................................. 342
            3.27.17 :TRIGger:DELay           ................................................................................................................... 342
                    3.27.17.1 :TRIGger:DELay:SA                   .............................................................................................343
                    3.27.17.2 :TRIGger:DELay:ASLop                       ..................................................................................... 343
                    3.27.17.3 :TRIGger:DELay:SB                   ............................................................................................. 344
                    3.27.17.4 :TRIGger:DELay:BSLop                       ......................................................................................345
                    3.27.17.5 :TRIGger:DELay:TYPE                      ........................................................................................ 345
                    3.27.17.6 :TRIGger:DELay:TUPPer                        ....................................................................................346
                    3.27.17.7 :TRIGger:DELay:TLOWer                         .................................................................................. 347
                    3.27.17.8 :TRIGger:DELay:ALEVel                       .....................................................................................348
                    3.27.17.9 :TRIGger:DELay:BLEVel                       ..................................................................................... 348
            3.27.18 :TRIGger:SHOLd            ..................................................................................................................349
                    3.27.18.1 :TRIGger:SHOLd:DSRC                        ..................................................................................... 349
                    3.27.18.2 :TRIGger:SHOLd:CSRC                        ......................................................................................350
                    3.27.18.3 :TRIGger:SHOLd:SLOPe                         ....................................................................................351
                    3.27.18.4 :TRIGger:SHOLd:PATTern                          .................................................................................351
                    3.27.18.5 :TRIGger:SHOLd:TYPE                       .......................................................................................352
                    3.27.18.6 :TRIGger:SHOLd:STIMe                         .................................................................................... 353
                    3.27.18.7 :TRIGger:SHOLd:HTIMe                          ................................................................................... 353
                    3.27.18.8 :TRIGger:SHOLd:DLEVel                         ...................................................................................354
                    3.27.18.9 :TRIGger:SHOLd:CLEVel                        ................................................................................... 355
            3.27.19 :TRIGger:NEDGe             ................................................................................................................. 355
                    3.27.19.1 :TRIGger:NEDGe:SOURce                            ................................................................................ 356
                    3.27.19.2 :TRIGger:NEDGe:SLOPe                         ................................................................................... 357
                    3.27.19.3 :TRIGger:NEDGe:IDLE                       ....................................................................................... 357
                    3.27.19.4 :TRIGger:NEDGe:EDGE                         ..................................................................................... 358
                    3.27.19.5 :TRIGger:NEDGe:LEVel                       ......................................................................................358
            3.27.20 :TRIGger:RS232           ...................................................................................................................359
                    3.27.20.1 :TRIGger:RS232:SOURce                          ..................................................................................359
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                                                                               XV
                3.27.20.2 :TRIGger:RS232:LEVel                    ....................................................................................... 360
                3.27.20.3 :TRIGger:RS232:POLarity                       ................................................................................. 361
                3.27.20.4 :TRIGger:RS232:WHEN                        .....................................................................................361
                3.27.20.5 :TRIGger:RS232:DATA                     ....................................................................................... 362
                3.27.20.6 :TRIGger:RS232:BAUD                       ...................................................................................... 363
                3.27.20.7 :TRIGger:RS232:WIDTh                       .................................................................................... 363
                3.27.20.8 :TRIGger:RS232:STOP                     ....................................................................................... 364
                3.27.20.9 :TRIGger:RS232:PARity                     ..................................................................................... 364
          3.27.21 :TRIGger:IIC   .......................................................................................................................... 365
                3.27.21.1 :TRIGger:IIC:SCL              ..................................................................................................365
                3.27.21.2 :TRIGger:IIC:CLEVel                 ............................................................................................366
                3.27.21.3 :TRIGger:IIC:SDA               .................................................................................................367
                3.27.21.4 :TRIGger:IIC:DLEVel                 ........................................................................................... 367
                3.27.21.5 :TRIGger:IIC:WHEN                   ............................................................................................368
                3.27.21.6 :TRIGger:IIC:AWIDth                   ..........................................................................................369
                3.27.21.7 :TRIGger:IIC:ADDRess                     .......................................................................................370
                3.27.21.8 :TRIGger:IIC:DIRection                    ......................................................................................370
                3.27.21.9 :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes                  ...........................................................................................371
               3.27.21.10 :TRIGger:IIC:DATA                 .............................................................................................. 371
               3.27.21.11 :TRIGger:IIC:CURRbit                   ........................................................................................ 372
               3.27.21.12 :TRIGger:IIC:CODE                 ............................................................................................. 373
          3.27.22 :TRIGger:SPI    ......................................................................................................................... 373
                3.27.22.1 :TRIGger:SPI:CLK               .................................................................................................374
                3.27.22.2 :TRIGger:SPI:SCL               .................................................................................................374
                3.27.22.3 :TRIGger:SPI:CLEVel                  ...........................................................................................375
                3.27.22.4 :TRIGger:SPI:SLOPe                  ............................................................................................376
                3.27.22.5 :TRIGger:SPI:MISO                  .............................................................................................376
                3.27.22.6 :TRIGger:SPI:SDA                ................................................................................................377
                3.27.22.7 :TRIGger:SPI:DLEVel                  ...........................................................................................378
                3.27.22.8 :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN                    ...........................................................................................378
                3.27.22.9 :TRIGger:SPI:CS              ...................................................................................................379
               3.27.22.10 :TRIGger:SPI:SLEVel                  ........................................................................................... 380
               3.27.22.11 :TRIGger:SPI:MODE                    ........................................................................................... 381
               3.27.22.12 :TRIGger:SPI:TIMeout                    ....................................................................................... 381
               3.27.22.13 :TRIGger:SPI:WIDTh                   ...........................................................................................382
               3.27.22.14 :TRIGger:SPI:DATA                 ............................................................................................. 382
               3.27.22.15 :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit                    ....................................................................................... 383
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                   Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
XVI
                  3.27.22.16 :TRIGger:SPI:CODE                       .............................................................................................384
            3.27.23 :TRIGger:CAN            ...................................................................................................................... 384
                    3.27.23.1 :TRIGger:CAN:BAUD                         ......................................................................................... 385
                    3.27.23.2 :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce                           ..................................................................................... 385
                    3.27.23.3 :TRIGger:CAN:STYPe                        ......................................................................................... 386
                    3.27.23.4 :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN                          ........................................................................................ 387
                    3.27.23.5 :TRIGger:CAN:SPOint                        ........................................................................................388
                    3.27.23.6 :TRIGger:CAN:EXTended                            ..................................................................................389
                    3.27.23.7 :TRIGger:CAN:DEFine                         ....................................................................................... 390
                    3.27.23.8 :TRIGger:CAN:DWIDth                           ..................................................................................... 390
                    3.27.23.9 :TRIGger:CAN:DATA                        .......................................................................................... 391
                  3.27.23.10 :TRIGger:CAN:CURRbit                           .....................................................................................392
                  3.27.23.11 :TRIGger:CAN:CODE                         ..........................................................................................392
                  3.27.23.12 :TRIGger:CAN:LEVel                       ...........................................................................................393
            3.27.24 :TRIGger:LIN          .........................................................................................................................394
                    3.27.24.1 :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce                        ........................................................................................394
                    3.27.24.2 :TRIGger:LIN:LEVel                    ............................................................................................. 395
                    3.27.24.3 :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard                          ....................................................................................395
                    3.27.24.4 :TRIGger:LIN:BAUD                      ............................................................................................396
                    3.27.24.5 :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint                             ..............................................................................397
                    3.27.24.6 :TRIGger:LIN:WHEN                        .......................................................................................... 397
                    3.27.24.7 :TRIGger:LIN:ERRor                     ............................................................................................398
                    3.27.24.8 :TRIGger:LIN:ID                 ................................................................................................... 399
                    3.27.24.9 :TRIGger:LIN:DATA                     .............................................................................................399
                  3.27.24.10 :TRIGger:LIN:CURRbit                         .......................................................................................400
                  3.27.24.11 :TRIGger:LIN:CODE                       ............................................................................................400
        3.28 :WAVeform Commands                  .................................................................................................................401
             3.28.1 :WAVeform:SOURce                   .......................................................................................................... 404
             3.28.2 :WAVeform:MODE                  ............................................................................................................. 405
             3.28.3 :WAVeform:FORMat                   .......................................................................................................... 406
             3.28.4 :WAVeform:POINts                 ............................................................................................................ 406
             3.28.5 :WAVeform:DATA?                 ..............................................................................................................407
             3.28.6 :WAVeform:XINCrement?                        ................................................................................................ 408
             3.28.7 :WAVeform:XORigin?                   ........................................................................................................ 408
             3.28.8 :WAVeform:XREFerence?                       ................................................................................................. 409
             3.28.9 :WAVeform:YINCrement?                        ................................................................................................ 410
            3.28.10 :WAVeform:YORigin?                   ........................................................................................................ 410
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                                                                               XVII
            3.28.11 :WAVeform:YREFerence?               ................................................................................................. 411
            3.28.12 :WAVeform:STARt        ...............................................................................................................411
            3.28.13 :WAVeform:STOP        ................................................................................................................412
            3.28.14 :WAVeform:PREamble?              .....................................................................................................413
        4 Application Examples        .................................................................................................415
          4.1 To Configure Basic Parameters            .................................................................................................. 415
          4.2 To Set Measurements      ....................................................................................................................416
          4.3 To Read the Waveform       ..................................................................................................................417
        5 Programming Examples            ............................................................................................419
          5.1 Programming Preparations           .........................................................................................................419
          5.2 LabVIEW Programming Example                  .............................................................................................. 419
          5.3 Visual Basic Programming Example                  ......................................................................................... 423
          5.4 Visual C++ Programming Example                   .......................................................................................... 425
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                   Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
XVIII
List of Figures
      Figure 3.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding ................................................... 33
      Figure 3.2 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus ..................................................... 39
      Figure 3.3 I2C Serial Bus ........................................................................................................45
      Figure 3.4 SPI Serial Bus ........................................................................................................ 49
      Figure 3.5 Sample Position ...................................................................................................59
      Figure 3.6 Cursors ....................................................................................................................85
      Figure 3.7 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Frame Format .......................................... 359
      Figure 3.8 Schematic Diagram of I2C Frame Format ................................................ 365
      Figure 3.9 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus .......................................................................... 373
      Figure 3.10 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus ........................................................ 384
      Figure 3.11 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus .......................................................... 394
      Figure 3.12 Parameter Definitions in NORMAL Mode ............................................. 402
      Figure 3.13 Parameter Definitions in RAW Mode ...................................................... 402
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                                             DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                                              Guide
                                                                                                                                          XIX
List of Tables
     Table 3.128 Table of the Bit Definition of Standard Event Status Register ........ 124
     Table 3.129 Table of the Bit Definition of Status Byte Register ............................. 125
     Table 3.161 Window Function ...........................................................................................157
     Table 3.162 Logic Operation Results .............................................................................. 158
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                    Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
XX
                                                                                           Document Overview
1               Document Overview
                 This manual introduces how to program and control DHO800 and DHO900 series via
                 the remote interface by using the SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable
                 Instruments) commands. DHO800 and DHO900 series can communicate with PC via
                 USB and LAN interfaces.
                 TIP
                 For the latest version of this manual, download it from RIGOL official website (http://
                 www.rigol.com).
                 Publication Number
                 PGA39106-1110
                 Software Version
                 00.01.03
                 Software upgrade might change or add product features. Please acquire the latest
                 version of the manual from RIGOL website or contact RIGOL to upgrade the software.
                 Format Conventions in this Manual
                 1. Key
                    The front panel key is denoted by the menu key icon. For example,
                    indicates the "Default" key.
                 2. Menu
                    The menu item is denoted by the format of "Menu Name (Bold) + Character
                    Shading" in the manual. For example, Setup indicates the "Setup" sub-menu under
                    the "Utility" function menu. You can click or tap Setup to access the "Setup" menu.
                 3. Operation Procedures
                    The next step of the operation is denoted by ">" in the manual. For example,
                    > Storage indicates first clicking or tapping           and then clicking or tapping
                    Storage.
                 4. Connector
                    The front/rear panel connector is denoted by "Brackets + Connector Name (Bold)",
                    for example, [AUX OUT].
                 Content Conventions in this Manual
                 DHO800 series digital oscilloscope includes the following models. Four-channel
                 models and two-channel models share the same operation method. Unless otherwise
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                             1
Document Overview
              specified, this manual takes the four-channel model DHO814 as an example to
              illustrate the operation methods of DHO800 series oscilloscope.
               Model                       Max. Analog Bandwidth           No. of Analog Channels
               DHO802                      70 MHz                          2+EXT
               DHO804                      70 MHz                          4
               DHO812                      100 MHz                         2+EXT
               DHO814                      100 MHz                         4
              DHO900 series digital oscilloscope includes the following models. Unless otherwise
              specified, this manual takes DHO924S as an example to illustrate the operation
              methods of DHO900 series.
               Model                       Max. Analog Bandwidth           No. of Analog Channels
               DHO914                      125 MHz                         4
               DHO914S                     125 MHz                         4
               DHO924                      250 MHz                         4
               DHO924S                     250 MHz                         4
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
2
                                                                                Programming Overview
2               Programming Overview
2.1             SCPI Command Overview
                 SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) is a standardized
                 instrument programming language that is built upon the existing standard IEEE 488.1
                 and IEEE 488.2 and conforms to various standards, such as the floating point
                 operation rule in IEEE 754 standard, ISO 646 7-bit coded character set for information
                 interchange (equivalent to ASCII programming). The SCPI commands provide a
                 hierarchical tree structure, and consist of multiple subsystems. Each command
                 subsystem consists of one root keyword and one or more sub-keywords.
                 Syntax
                 The command line usually starts with a colon; the keywords are separated by colons,
                 and following the keywords are the parameter settings available. The command
                 ending with a quotation mark indicates querying a certain function and returns the
                 query results. The keywords of the command and the first parameter are separated by
                 a space.
                 For example,
                 :ACQuire:TYPE <type>
                 :ACQuire:TYPE?
                 ACQuire is the root keyword of the command, TYPE is the second-level keyword. The
                 command line starts with a colon ":", and different levels of keywords are also
                 separated by colons. <type> indicates a settable parameter. The command ending
                 with a quotation mark "?" indicates querying a certain function. The command
                 keywords :ACQuire:TYPE and the parameter <type> are separated by a space.
                 In some commands with parameters, "," is often used to separate multiple
                 parameters. For example,
                 :SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>
                 Symbol Description
                 The following symbols are not sent with the commands.
                 1. Braces { }
                    The contents in the braces can contain one or multiple parameters. These
                    parameters can be omitted or used for several times. Parameters are usually
                    separated by the vertical bar "|". When using the command, you must select one of
                    the parameters.
                 2. Vertical Bar |
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                       3
Programming Overview
                The vertical bar is used to separate multiple parameters. When using the
                command, you must select one of the parameters.
              3. Square Brackets [ ]
                The contents in the square brackets can be omitted.
              4. Angle Brackets < >
                The parameter enclosed in the angle brackets must be replaced by an effective
                value.
              Parameter Type
              1. Bool
                The parameter can be set to ON, OFF, 1, or 0. For example,
                :SYSTem:BEEPer <bool>
                :SYSTem:BEEPer?
                Wherein, <bool> can be set to {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}. The query returns 1 or 0.
              2. Discrete
                The parameter can be any of the values listed. For example,
                :SYSTem:PSTatus <sat>
                :SYSTem:PSTatus?
                Wherein,
                - <sat> can be set to DEFault|OPEN.
                - The query returns an abbreviated form: DEF or OPEN.
              3. Integer
                Unless otherwise specified, the parameter can be any integer (NR1 format) within
                the effective value range.
                 CAUTION
                 Do not set the parameter to a decimal, otherwise, errors will occur.
                For example,
                :DISPlay:GBRightness <brightness>
                :DISPlay:GBRightness?
                Wherein, <brightness> can be set to an integer ranging from 1 to 100. The query
                returns an integer ranging from 1 to 100.
              4. Real
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
4
                                                                                   Programming Overview
                    The parameter can be any real number within the effective value range, and this
                    command accepts parameter input in decimal (NR2 format) and scientific notation
                    (NR3 format). For example,
                    :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME <time>
                    :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME?
                    Wherein, <time> can be set to any real number ranging from 1.6E-8 (16 ns) to 1E
                    +1 (10 s). The query returns a real number in scientific notation.
                 5. ASCII String
                    The parameter can be the combinations of ASCII characters. For example,
                    :LAN:GATeway <string>
                    Wherein, <string> can be set to
                    192.168.1.1
                 Command Abbreviation
                 The keywords of all the commands are case-insensitive. They can all be in upper case
                 or in lower case. If an abbreviation is used, you must input all the capital letters in the
                 command. For example,
                 :DISPlay:GBRightness?
                 can be abbreviated as
                 :DISP:GBR?
2.2             Remote Control
                 This instrument can be connected to the PC via the USB, or LAN interface to set up
                 communication and realize remote control through the PC. The remote control can be
                 realized by using SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
                 commands.
                 PC Software
                 Users usually need to use the PC software to send commands to control the
                 instrument remotely. RIGOL Ultra Sigma is recommended. When the instrument is
                 connected to the PC via the USB, or LAN interface, the Ultra Sigma software can
                 search for instrument resources and enable command interaction.
                 Log in to the RIGOL official website. Click Support and select Soft/Firmware to
                 obtain the Ultra Sigma software package and help documentation.
                 Web Control
                 When the instrument is connected to the PC via the LAN interface, you can use Web
                 Control to send SCPI commands from the PC to the instrument.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                           5
Programming Overview
              The operation procedures are as follows:
              1. Obtain the instrument's IP address and input it in the browser address bar to log in
                to the Web Control page.
              2. After you enter the Web Control interface, click the "SCPI Panel Control" button to
                enter the SCPI Command interface.
              3. Input the specified SCPI command and then click Send & Read to send the
                command. The operation process and the returned value will be displayed in the
                current interface.
2.2.1        Remote Control via USB
              1. Connect the device
                Use the USB cable to connect the rear-panel USB DEVICE interface of the
                instrument to the USB HOST interface of the PC.
              2. Search for the device resource
                Start up Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the resource
                currently connected to the PC via the USB interface. You can also click USB-TMC to
                search for the resource.
              3. View the device resource
                The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory, and
                the model number and USB interface information of the instrument will also be
                displayed.
              4. Control the instrument remotely
                Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the
                remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data
                through the panel. For details about the SCPI commands and programming, refer
                to the Programming Guide of this instrument.
2.2.2        Remote Control via LAN
              1. Connect the device
                Use the network cable to connect the instrument to your local area network (LAN).
              2. Configure network parameters
                Configure the network parameters of the instrument in Utility>IO menu.
              3. Search for Search device resource
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
6
                                                                                   Programming Overview
                     Start up Ultra Sigma and click LAN to open the panel as shown in the figure below.
                     Click Search and the software searches for the instrument resources currently
                     connected to the LAN and the resources found are displayed at the right section of
                     the window as shown in the figure below. Click OK to add it.
                     Besides, you can input the IP address of the instrument manually into the text field
                     under "Manual Input LAN Instrument IP", then click TEST. If the instrument passes
                     the test, click Add to add the instrument to the LAN instrument resource list in the
                     right section; if the instrument fails the test, please check whether the IP address
                     that you input is correct, or use the auto search method to add the instrument
                     resource.
                 4. View the device resource
                     The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory.
                 5. Control the instrument remotely
                     Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the
                     remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data
                     through the panel.
                 6. Load LXI webpage
                     As this instrument conforms to LXI CORE 2011 DEVICE standards, you can load LXI
                     web page through Ultra Sigma (right-click the instrument resource name and
                     select "LXI-Web"). Various important information about the instrument (including
                     the model, manufacturer, serial number, description, MAC address, and IP address)
                     will be displayed on the web page. You can also directly input the IP address of the
                     instrument in the address bar of the PC browser to load the LXI web page.
2.3             Sequential Commands and Overlapped Commands
                 IEEE488.2 defines the differentiation between the Sequential commands and the
                 Overlapped commands.
                 •     Sequential Commands
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                            7
Programming Overview
                  Commands that shall be executed in sequence. Before completing the execution
                  of one sequential command, another command shall not be executed. A
                  command is a Sequential Command when Execution Control waits for the
                  resulting device action to complete before it initiates the next device action.
                  The following figure shows the example of the sequence order for the sequential
                  command.
                                                                                                time
                       Sequential Command 1
                                              Sequential Command 2
                                                                      Sequential Command 3
              •   Overlapped Commands
                  Commands that can be executed with several other commands being executed
                  in parallel. During the execution process, several commands may be overlapped
                  with each other. An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of
                  subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by that overlapped
                  command are still in progress.
                  The following figure shows the example of the sequence order for the
                  overlapped command.
                                                                                                time
                             Overlapped Command 1
                                                      Overlapped Command 2
                                                          Sequential Command 3
              To ensure that the instrument functions can be synchronized through the commands
              executed in the specified order and query the command execution status, IEEE488.2
              defines three general commands (*WAI, *OPC, and *OPC?) to check the operation
              complete (OPC) function of the instrument.
              •   *WAI: The *WAI command shall prevent the instrument from executing further
                  commands or queries until all the received commands have been completely
                  executed. The *WAI command will not operate on the register.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
8
                                                                                     Programming Overview
                       If you want the overlapped commands to be executed in sequence just like the
                       sequential commands, you can send the *WAI command before or after the
                       specified overlapped command. For example,
                                                                                                     time
                             Overlapped Command 1
                                               *WAI
                                                       Overlapped Command 2
                                                                      *WAI
                                                                              Overlapped Command 3
                                                                                             *WAI
                 •     *OPC: Upon receiving the *OPC command, the instrument will wait until all the
                       previously received commands have been completely executed. Meanwhile, it
                       will set Bit 0 in the Standard Event Register to 1, and then execute the following
                       commands.
                 •     *OPC?: Upon receiving the *OPC? Command, the instrument will query whether
                       all the previous received commands have been completely executed. If
                       completed, the query returns 1; if not, it will wait until all the pending operations
                       have been completed and then returns 1. The *OPC? command shall not operate
                       on the register.
                       If you want to query the execution status of a series of commands and control
                       the execution sequence of the command, send the *OPC? Command. For
                       example,
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                            9
Programming Overview
                                                                                               time
                                             Overlapped Command
                                      Sequential
                                      Command 1
                                                   Sequential
                                                   Command 2
                                                                    *OPC?
                                                                                 Sequential
                                                                    查询命令
                                                                    是否结束
                                                                                 Command 3
              The following table lists the overlapped commands that support the Operation
              Complete (OPC) function. While using the overlapped commands, pay attention to
              the execution order of the command to avoid causing any abnormalities to the
              results.
              Command                                    Constraint Condition
              *RST                                       -
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                      Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
10
                                                                                                Command System
3               Command System
                 This chapter introduces the syntax, functions, parameters, and usage of each
                 command. By default, only CH1 is enabled.
                 NOTE
                 For the parameter setting command (time, frequency, amplitude, etc.), the digital oscilloscope
                 can only recognize the numbers, unable to recognize the unit sent together with them. The
                 unit of the parameter is a default one. For the default units of various parameters, refer to the
                 descriptions for the specified command.
3.1             Root Commands
                 Root level commands only have the root keywords, without the next level keywords.
                 They control many of the basic operations of the instrument.
3.1.1           :CLEar
                 Syntax
                 :CLEar
                 Description
                 Clears all the waveforms on the screen.
                 This command functions the same as the front-panel key                     .
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.1.2           :RUN
                 Syntax
                 :RUN
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                                 11
Command System
              Description
              The :RUN command starts running the oscilloscope
              This command functions the same as clicking or tapping the icon               in the quick
              operation bar at the upper-right part of the screen; or the          tap the on the front
              panel.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.1.3        :STOP
              Syntax
              :STOP
              Description
              The :STOP command stops running the oscilloscope.
              This command functions the same as clicking or tapping the icon                 in the quick
              operation bar at the upper-right part of the screen; or the          key on the front
              panel.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
12
                                                                                       Command System
3.1.4           :SINGle
                 Syntax
                 :SINGle
                 Description
                 Performs a single trigger. Sets the trigger mode of the oscilloscope to "Single". This
                 command functions the same as sending the :TRIGger:SWEep SINGle command.
                 This command functions the same as the front-panel key           .
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 •     In the single trigger mode, the oscilloscope performs a single trigger when the
                       trigger conditions are met and then it stops.
                 •     When the waveform recording function is enabled or the recorded waveforms
                       are played back, this command is invalid.
                 •     For the single trigger, you can use the :TFORce command to generate one
                       trigger by force.
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.1.5           :TFORce
                 Syntax
                 :TFORce
                 Description
                 Generates a trigger signal forcefully. This command is only applicable to the normal
                 and single trigger modes. Refer to the :TRIGger:SWEep command).
                 This command functions the same as the            key in the trigger control area of the
                 front panel.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                          13
Command System
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.2          :AUToset Commands
              The :AUToset commands are used to perform waveform auto setting operations.
3.2.1        :AUToset
              Syntax
              :AUToset
              Description
              Enables the waveform auto setting function. The oscilloscope will automatically adjust
              the vertical scale, horizontal time base, and trigger mode according to the input
              signal to realize optimal waveform display.
              This command functions the same as the front-panel key                .
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              •     When the AUTO function is disabled, this command is invalid. For details, refer
                    to :SYSTem:AUToscale.
              •     When the pass/fail test is enabled, the AUTO function runs normally, but the
                    pass/fail test function is forced to be disabled.
              •     When the waveform recording function is enabled, the AUTO function runs
                    normally, but the recording or playing function is forced to be disabled.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
14
                                                                                         Command System
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.2.2           :AUToset:PEAK
                 Syntax
                 :AUToset:PEAK <bool>
                 :AUToset:PEAK?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries whether the peak-peak priority setting is enabled.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                 1|ON
                 Remarks
                 This function is intended for the shifted signal. If there is a large deviation, you can
                 view the signal waveform in priority when you enable the function.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :AUToset:PEAK OFF /*Disables the peak-peak priority setting.*/
                 :AUToset:PEAK? /*The query returns 0.*/
3.2.3           :AUToset:OPENch
                 Syntax
                 :AUToset:OPENch <bool>
                 :AUToset:OPENch?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries whether to only test the enabled channel when performing the AUTO
                 operation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                            15
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <bool>         Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              •     If you select "0|OFF", the system will test the four analog channels (CH1-CH4) in
                    sequence when performing the AUTO operation. If no signal is found on the
                    channel, then the channel is disabled. If a signal is found on the channel, adjust
                    the channel to an optimal scale to show the signal.
              •     If you select "1|ON", the system will only test the enabled channels when
                    performing the AUTO operation.
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              Example
              :AUToset:OPENch ON /*Sets to test only the enabled channel(s) for
              AUTO operation.*/
              :AUToset:OPENch? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.2.4        :AUToset:OVERlap
              Syntax
              :AUToset:OVERlap <bool>
              :AUToset:OVERlap?
              Description
              Sets or queries whether to enable the waveform display mode.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <bool>         Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       1|ON
              Remarks
              •     1|ON: enables the waveform overlay display. Waveforms of different channels
                    will be displayed in the same position of the screen.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
16
                                                                                     Command System
                 •     0|OFF: disables the waveform overlay display. Waveforms of different channels
                       will be displayed on the screen from top to bottom in sequence.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :AUToset:OVERlap OFF /*Disables the waveform overlay display.*/
                 :AUToset:OVERlap? /*The query returns 0.*/
3.2.5           :AUToset:KEEPcoup
                 Syntax
                 :AUToset:KEEPcoup <bool>
                 :AUToset:KEEPcoup?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries whether to enable keeping coupling.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}               0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 •     1|ON: Enables keeping coupling. When enabled, the system performs auto
                       setting operation. The settings for the channel coupling remain unchanged.
                 •     0|OFF: Disables keeping coupling. When disabled, the channel is, by default, DC
                       coupled.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :AUToset:KEEPcoup ON /*Sets to enable keeping coupling.*/
                 :AUToset:KEEPcoup? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.2.6           :AUToset:LOCK
                 Syntax
                 :AUToset:LOCK <bool>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                       17
Command System
              :AUToset:LOCK?
              Description
              Sets or queries the on/off status of the AUTO function.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <bool>         Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              •     1|ON: locks the AUTO key; disables the AUTO function.
              •     0|OFF: unlocks the AUTO key; enables the AUTO function.
              You can also send the :AUToset:ENAble command to enable or disable the AUTO
              function.
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              Example
              :AUToset:LOCK ON /*Locks the AUTO key; disables the AUTO
              function.*/
              :AUToset:LOCK? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.2.7        :AUToset:ENAble
              Syntax
              :AUToset:ENAble <bool>
              :AUToset:ENAble?
              Description
              Sets or queries whether to enable the AUTO function.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <bool>         Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       1|ON
              Remarks
              •     1|ON: enables the AUTO function. It functions the same as enabling the front-
                    panel key       .
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
18
                                                                                              Command System
                 •     0|OFF: disables the AUTO function. It functions the same as disabling the front-
                       panel key          .
                 You can also send the :AUToset:LOCK command to enable or disable the AUTO
                 function.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :AUToset:ENAble OFF /*Disables the AUTO function.*/
                 :AUToset:ENAble? /*The query returns 0.*/
3.3             :ACQuire Commands
                 The :ACQuire commands are used to set the memory depth of the oscilloscope, the
                 acquisition mode, the average times, as well as query the current sample rate.
3.3.1           :ACQuire:AVERages
                 Syntax
                 :ACQuire:AVERages <count>
                 :ACQuire:AVERages?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the number of averages in the average acquisition mode.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                                Default
                                                          2n(n is an integer, and its range
                     <count>          Integer                                                  2
                                                          is from 1 to 16).
                 Remarks
                 •     You can send the :ACQuire:TYPE command to set the acquisition mode.
                 •     In the average acquisition mode, greater number of averages can lower the
                       noise and increase the vertical resolution; but will also slow the response of the
                       displayed waveform to the waveform changes.
                 •     The number of averages must be in the Nth power of 2. When the value is not in
                       the Nth power of 2, a value that is smaller than the one you input and the closest
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                           19
Command System
                    to the N power-of-2 increments will be input automatically. For example, if you
                    input 9 with the numeric keypad, the average count will be input 8 automatically.
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 2 to 65536.
              Example
              :ACQuire:AVERages 128             /*Sets the average times to 128.*/
              :ACQuire:AVERages?                /*The query returns 128.*/
3.3.2        :ACQuire:MDEPth
              Syntax
              :ACQuire:MDEPth <mdep>
              :ACQuire:MDEPth?
              Description
              Sets or queries the memory depth of the oscilloscope (that is, the number of
              waveform points that can be stored through the sampling in a single trigger). The
              default unit is pts.
              Parameter
                  Name               Type          Range                                  Default
                                                   {AUTO|1k|10k|100k|1M|5M|10M|
                                                   25M|50M|1000|10000|100000|
                  <mdep>             Discrete      1000000|5000000|10000000|              10k
                                                   25000000|50000000|1e3|1e4|
                                                   1e5|1e6|5e6|1e7|2.5e7|5e7}
              Remarks
              When you select the "Auto" mode, the oscilloscope selects the memory depth
              automatically according to the current sample rate.
              •     When any one of the channels is enabled, the available memory depths are
                    AUTO, 1k, 10k, 100k, 1M, 5M, 10M, 25M, and 50M (50M is only available for
                    DHO900).
              •     When any two of the channels are enabled, the available memory depths are
                    AUTO, 1k, 10k, 100k, 1M, 5M, 10M, and 25M (25M is only available for DHO900).
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
20
                                                                                         Command System
                 •     When three or four channels (only available for 4-channel models) are enabled,
                       the available memory depths are AUTO, 1k, 10k, 100k, 1M, 5M, and 10M (10M is
                       only available for DHO900).
                 Modifying the memory depth will affect the sample rate. To query the current sample
                 rate, run the :ACQuire:SRATe? command.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the memory depth in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :ACQuire:MDEPth 1M              /*Sets the memory depth to 1M.*/
                 :ACQuire:MDEPth?                   /*The query returns 1.000E+6.*/
3.3.3           :ACQuire:TYPE
                 Syntax
                 :ACQuire:TYPE <type>
                 :ACQuire:TYPE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                                                          {NORMal|PEAK|AVERages|
                     <type>           Discrete                                             NORMal
                                                          ULTRa}
                 Remarks
                 •     NORMal: In this mode, the oscilloscope samples the signal at a specified fixed
                       time interval to rebuild the waveform. For most of the waveforms, using this
                       mode can produce the optimal display effects.
                 •     AVERages: In this mode, the oscilloscope averages the waveforms from multiple
                       samples to reduce the random noise of the input signal and improve the vertical
                       resolution. Greater number of averages can lower the noise and increase the
                       vertical resolution; while at the same time, it will slow the response of the
                       displayed waveform to the waveform changes.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        21
Command System
              •     PEAK: indicates the peak detection. In this mode, the oscilloscope samples the
                    maximum and minimum value of the signal at the fixed sampling interval to
                    acquire the signal envelope or the narrow pulses that might be lost. In this
                    mode, signal aliasing can be prevented, but the noise displayed would be larger.
              •     ULTRa (UltraAcquire): divides the oscilloscope's memory into segments and fills
                    a memory segment for each individual trigger event. In this mode, the refresh
                    rate of the waveforms is highly improved, greatly minimizing the dead time
                    between trigger events.
              Return Format
              The query returns NORM, PEAK, AVER, or ULTR.
              Example
              :ACQuire:TYPE AVERages     /*Sets the acquisition mode to Average.*/
              :ACQuire:TYPE? /*The query returns AVER.*/
3.3.4        :ACQuire:SRATe?
              Syntax
              :ACQuire:SRATe?
              Description
              Queries the current sample rate. The default unit is Sa/s.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              •     Sample rate indicates the frequency of the signal sampling, that is, the number
                    of waveform points sampled per second.
              •     The sample rate and memory depth will change accordingly in accordance with
                    the horizontal time base.
              Return Format
              The query returns the sample rate in scientific notation.
              Example
              :ACQuire:SRATe?        /*The query returns 1.00000E+6.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
22
                                                                                         Command System
3.3.5           :ACQuire:ULTRa:MODE
                 Syntax
                 :ACQuire:ULTRa:MODE <mode>
                 :ACQuire:ULTRa:MODE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the display mode of Ultra Acquire.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {ADJacent|OVERlay|WATerfall|
                     <mode>           Discrete                                            -
                                                          PERSpective|MOSaic}
                 Remarks
                 •     ADJacent: indicates the adjacent display. Waveform segments are shown in
                       adjacent display, with each segment shown next to the previous segment. In this
                       mode, a maximum of 100 frames of waveforms can be displayed on the screen
                       at a time.
                 •     OVERlay: indicates the overlay display. All the captured waveform segments are
                       overwritten to display as one single segment of the waveform. In this mode, a
                       maximum of 100 frames of waveforms can be displayed on the screen at a time.
                 •     WATerfall: indicates the waterfall display. It displays the captured waveform
                       segments in a cascaded display order. In this mode, a maximum of 100 frames of
                       waveforms can be displayed on the screen at a time.
                 •     PERSpective: indicates the perspective display. The waveform segments are
                       displayed in the ladder-like form, with each segment being arranged above
                       another with a certain perspective (angle), moving up like a rising slope. In this
                       mode, a maximum of 100 frames of waveforms can be displayed on the screen
                       at a time.
                 •     MOSaic: indicates the mosaic display. The whole waveform view is divided into
                       several blocks, and each waveform segment is displayed in each block in
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                            23
Command System
                    sequence. In this mode, a maximum of 80 frames of waveforms can be displayed
                    on the screen at a time.
              Return Format
              The query returns ADJ, OVER, WAT, PERS, or MOS.
              Example
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:MODE ADJacent             /*Sets the Ultra Acquire display
              mode to ADJacent.*/
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:MODE?                     /*The query returns ADJ.*/
3.3.6        :ACQuire:ULTRa:TIMeout
              Syntax
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:TIMeout <tmo>
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:TIMeout?
              Description
              Sets or queries the timeout value of Ultra Acquire.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                  Default
               <tmo>             Real             1 us to 1 s                            1.00 ms
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns a real number in scientific notation.
              Example
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:TIMeout 0.1            /*Sets the Ultra Acquire timeout
              value to 0.1 s.*/
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:TIMeout?                      /*The query returns 1E-1.*/
3.3.7        :ACQuire:ULTRa:MAXFrame
              Syntax
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:MAXFrame <frame>
              :ACQuire:ULTRa:MAXFrame?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
24
                                                                                         Command System
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the maximum number of frames that can be set for Ultra Acquire
                 sampling mode.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                                                          1 to the maximum number of
                  <frame>             Integer                                              -
                                                          frames
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the maximum number of frames in integer.
                 Example
                 :ACQuire:ULTRa:MAXFrame 100                   /*Sets the maximum number of frames
                 to 100.*/
                 :ACQuire:ULTRa:MAXFrame?                             /*The query returns 100.*/
3.4             :BUS<n> Commands
                 The :BUS<n> commands are used to execute the decoding-related settings and
                 operations.
3.4.1           :BUS<n>:MODE
                 Syntax
                 :BUS<n>:MODE <mode>
                 :BUS<n>:MODE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the decoding type of the specified decoding bus.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                  <mode>              Discrete            {PARallel|RS232|SPI|IIC|LIN|CAN} PARallel
                 Remarks
                 LIN decoding type is only available for the DHO900 series.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                        25
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns PAR, RS232, SPI, IIC, LINor CAN.
              Example
              :BUS1:MODE SPI        /*Sets the decoding type of Bus 1 to SPI.*/
              :BUS1:MODE?           /*The query returns SPI.*/
3.4.2        :BUS<n>:DISPlay
              Syntax
              :BUS<n>:DISPlay <bool>
              :BUS<n>:DISPlay?
              Description
              Enables or disables the specified decoding bus; or queries the on/off display status of
              the specified decoding bus.
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
               <n>              Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <bool>           Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :BUS1:DISPlay ON            /*Enables the decoding bus.*/
              :BUS1:DISPlay?               /*The query returns 1.*/
3.4.3        :BUS<n>:FORMat
              Syntax
              :BUS<n>:FORMat <format>
              :BUS<n>:FORMat?
              Description
              Sets or queries the format of decoding data on the specified decoding bus.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
26
                                                                                       Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                      -
                     <format>         Discrete            {HEX|ASCii|DEC|BIN}            HEX
                 Remarks
                 •     Hex: indicates Hexadecimal;
                 •     ASCii: indicates ASCII;
                 •     DEC: indicates Decimal;
                 •     BIN: indicates Binary.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns HEX, ASC, DEC, or BIN.
                 Example
                 :BUS1:FORMat HEX             /*Sets the display format of the bus to HEX.*/
                 :BUS1:FORMat?                /*The query returns HEX.*/
3.4.4           :BUS<n>:EVENt
                 Syntax
                 :BUS<n>:EVENt <bool>
                 :BUS<n>:EVENt?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the event table of the specified decoding bus; or queries the
                 on/off status of the specified decoding bus event table.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                      -
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}               0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 Before using the command, enable the specified decoding bus.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       27
Command System
              Example
              :BUS1:EVENt ON         /*Enables the event table of the specified
              decoding bus.*/
              :BUS1:EVENt?           /*The query returns 1.*/
3.4.5        :BUS<n>:LABel
              Syntax
              :BUS<n>:LABel <bool>
              :BUS<n>:LABel?
              Description
              Enables or disables the label of the specified decoding bus; or queries the on/off
              display status of the label of the specified decoding bus.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                  Default
               <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <bool>            Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       1|ON
              Remarks
              Before using the command, enable the specified decoding bus.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :BUS1:LABel ON      /*Enables the label of the specified decoding bus.*/
              :BUS1:LABel?          /*The query returns 1.*/
3.4.6        :BUS<n>:DATA?
              Syntax
              :BUS<n>:DATA?
              Description
              Reads the data from the decoding event table.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                  Default
               <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                              -
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
28
                                                                                        Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the data in the decoding event table with the following formats.
                 #9000000086PARALLEL
                 Time,Data,
                 -2.47us,0,
                 -2.444us,1,
                 -1.448us,0,
                 -446ns,1,
                 551.6ns,0,
                 1.554us,1,
                 Wherein, "#9000000086" is the TMC data block header, which is followed by the data
                 in the event table. The 9-digit data following #9 in the data block header indicates the
                 number of bytes of the effective data. "PARALLEL" indicates the decoding type. The
                 available decoding type can also be RS232, I2C, SPI, LIN, and etc. The data are
                 separated by a comma, and will automatically switch to the next line according to the
                 data information in the decoding list. The data value is related to the numeral system
                 that you have set.
                 CAUTION
                 You can save all the data (except TMC data block header and decoding type, e.g.
                 #9000000086PARALLEL) as the "*.csv" file and view the data in the form of a list.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.4.7           :BUS<n>:EEXPort
                 Syntax
                 :BUS<n>:EEXPort <path>
                 Description
                 Exports the decoding information from the specified decoding bus event table in CSV
                 form.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <path>              ASCII String        Refer to Remarks                -
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       29
Command System
              Remarks
              •     <path> includes the file storage location and the filename with a suffix. If the
                    specified storage location already contains a file with the same filename, the
                    original file will be overwritten.
              •     When the operating status of the instrument is STOP (set it by sending the :STOP
                    command), you can export the time and corresponding decoding data from the
                    current event table.
              •     This command is valid when the display of the event table is enabled. You can
                    enable the display of the event table by sending the :BUS<n>:EVENt command.
              •     The stored "*.csv" file can be opened and edited in Excel.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              :BUS1:EEXPort C:/123.csv    /*Exports the decoding information from
              the bus event table and saves it to the local Disk C, with the
              filename 123.csv.*/
3.4.8        :BUS<n>:POSition
              Syntax
              :BUS<n>:POSition <pos>
              :BUS<n>:POSition?
              Description
              Sets or queries the vertical position of the bus on the screen.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type               Range                                  Default
                  <n>             Discrete           {1|2|3|4}                              -
                  <pos>           Integer            -250 to 250                            0
              Remarks
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
30
                                                                                             Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer ranging from -250 to 250.
                 Example
                 :BUS1:POSition 200              /*Sets the vertical position of the bus to
                 200.*/
                 :BUS1:POSition?                 /*The query returns 200.*/
3.4.9           :BUS<n>:THReshold
                 Syntax
                 :BUS<n>:THReshold <value>,<type>
                 :BUS<n>:THReshold? <type>
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the threshold of the specified decoding source on the specified
                 decoding bus.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                               Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                           -
                                                          (-5 x VerticalScale - OFFSet) to
                     <value>          Real                                                    0
                                                          (5 x VerticalScale - OFFSet)
                                                          {PAL|TX|RX|SCL|SDA|CS|CLK|
                     <type>           Discrete            MISO|MOSI|LIN|CAN|PALCLK|           -
                                                          CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
                 Remarks
                 For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                 the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                 •     PAL: indicates the bus source of Parallel decoding.
                 •     PALCLK: indicates the clock source of Parallel decoding. Only when the source is
                       enabled, can you set the threshold.
                 •     TX: indicates the TX channel source of RS232 decoding.
                 •     RX: indicates the RX channel source of RS232 decoding. Only when the RX
                       source is enabled, can you set the threshold.
                 •     SCL: indicates the clock source of I2C decoding.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                          31
Command System
              •    SDA: indicates the data source of I2C decoding.
              •    CS: indicates the source of the CS line of SPI decoding.
              •    CLK: indicates the clock source of SPI decoding.
              •    MISO: indicates the MISO data source of SPI decoding.
              •    MOSI: indicates the MOSI data source of SPI decoding.
              •    LIN: indicates the bus source of LIN decoding.
              •    CAN: indicates the source of CAN decoding.
              •    CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4: CH1-CH4, available for all the decoding types.
              Only the DHO900 series supports LIN decodings.
              For the DHO800 series, only the 4-channel model supports CS in SPI decoding.
              Return Format
              The query returns the threshold of the specified decoding source in scientific
              notation.
              Example
              :BUS1:THReshold 2.4,PAL      /*Sets the threshold of the Parallel
              decoding source to 2.4 V.*/
              :BUS1:THReshold? PAL        /*The query returns 2.400000E0.*/
3.4.10       :BUS<n>:PARallel
              :BUS<n>:PARallel commands are used to set relevant parameters for parallel
              decoding.
              Parallel bus consists of clock line and data line. As shown in the figure below, CLK is
              the clock line, whereas Bit0 and Bit1 are the 0 bit and 1st bit on the data line
              respectively. The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling
              edge, or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic "1" or
              logic "0") according to the preset threshold level.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
32
                                                                                         Command System
                                       CLK
                                       Bit0
                                       Bit1
                              Parallel[BIN]       11           10     10   10       00
                                    Figure 3.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding
 3.4.10.1        :BUS<n>:PARallel:BUS
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:PARallel:BUS <source>
                  :BUS<n>:PARallel:BUS?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the source of Parallel decoding on the specific bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                                                          {D7D0|D15D8|D15D0|D0D7|
                                                          D8D15|D0D15|CHANnel1|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel2|CHANnel3|CHANnel4|
                                                          USER}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D7D0, D15D8, D15D0, D0D7, D8D15, D0D15, CHAN1, CHAN2,
                  CHAN3, CHAN4, or USER.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:PARallel:BUS CHANnel1   /*Sets the source of Parallel
                  decoding to CHANnel1.*/
                  :BUS1:PARallel:BUS?       /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       33
Command System
3.4.10.2      :BUS<n>:PARallel:CLK
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:CLK <source>
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:CLK?
               Description
               Sets or queries the clock source of Parallel decoding on the specified bus.
               Parameter
              Name              Type             Range                                   Default
              <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>          Discrete                                                 OFF
                                                 CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                 CHANnel4|OFF}
               Remarks
               N/A
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or OFF.
               Example
               :BUS1:PARallel:CLK CHANnel2    /*Sets the clock source of Parallel
               decoding to CHANnel2.*/
               :BUS1:PARallel:CLK?       /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.4.10.3      :BUS<n>:PARallel:SLOPe
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:SLOPe <slope>
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:SLOPe?
               Description
               Sets or queries the edge type of the clock channel when being sampled by Parallel
               decoding on the data channel.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
34
                                                                                        Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <slope>             Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative|BOTH}        POSitive
                  Remarks
                  If no clock channel is selected, the instrument will sample when the channel data
                  hopping occurs during the decoding.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns POS, NEG, or BOTH.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:PARallel:SLOPe BOTH    /*Sets the Parallel decoding to
                  sample on any edge of the clock channel.*/
                  :BUS1:PARallel:SLOPe?         /*The query returns BOTH.*/
 3.4.10.4        :BUS<n>:PARallel:WIDTh
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:PARallel:WIDTh <wid>
                  :BUS<n>:PARallel:WIDTh?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data width (number of bits per frame) of Parallel decoding on the
                  specified bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <wid>               Integer             1 to 4                          1
                  Remarks
                  •     Only when the data source is set to User (BUS<n>:PARallel:BUS USER), can this
                        command be available to use.
                  •     After you send this command to set the data width of the bus, send
                        the :BUS<n>:PARallel:BITX and :BUS<n>:PARallel:SOURce commands to select
                        the bit respectively and set the channel source for the bit.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                        35
Command System
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 4.
               Example
               :BUS1:PARallel:WIDTh 4            /*Sets the data width of Parallel
               decoding to 4.*/
               :BUS1:PARallel:WIDTh?               /*The query returns 4.*/
3.4.10.5      :BUS<n>:PARallel:BITX
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:BITX <bit>
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:BITX?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data bit that the parallel bus requires to set for the channel
               source.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
              <n>                Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                               -
              <bit>              Integer           0 to (data width - 1)                   0
               Remarks
               •    Only when the bus source is set to User (BUS<n>:PARallel:BUS USER), can this
                    command be valid.
               •    The data width is set by the :BUS<n>:PARallel:WIDTh command.
               •    After selecting the desired bit, send the :BUS<n>:PARallel:SOURce command to
                    set the channel source for the bit.
               Return Format
               The query returns the current data bits in integer. Its unit is Hz.
               Example
               :BUS1:PARallel:BITX 2            /*Sets the current bit to 2.*/
               :BUS1:PARallel:BITX?             /*The query returns 2.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
36
                                                                                          Command System
 3.4.10.6        :BUS<n>:PARallel:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:PARallel:SOURce <src>
                  :BUS<n>:PARallel:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the channel source of the currently selected data bit.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                         -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|       Related to the
                  <src>               Discrete
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3| selected bit
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  •     Only when the bus source is set to User (BUS<n>:PARallel:BUS USER), can this
                        command be valid.
                  •     Before sending this command, send the :BUS<n>:PARallel:BITX command to
                        select the desired data bit.
                  •     D0-D15 are only available for the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:PARallel:SOURce CHANnel2                      /*Sets the channel source of the
                  current bit to CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:PARallel:SOURce?                               /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.4.10.7        :BUS<n>:PARallel:ENDian
                  Syntax
                  :BUS <n>:PARallel:ENDian <endian>
                  :BUS <n>:PARallel:ENDian?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                             37
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the endian of Parallel decoding on the specified decoding bus.
               Parameter
              Name               Type                Range                                   Default
              <n>                Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                               -
              <endian>           Discrete            {MSB|LSB}                               MSB
               Remarks
               •    MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest bit
                    of the data is transmitted first.
               •    LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest bit of
                    the data is transmitted first.
               Return Format
               The query returns MSB or LSB.
               Example
               :BUS1:PARallel:ENDian LSB /*Sets the endian of Parallel decoding
               to LSB.*/
               :BUS1:PARallel:ENDian?       /*The query returns LSB.*/
3.4.10.8      :BUS<n>:PARallel:POLarity
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:POLarity <pol>
               :BUS<n>:PARallel:POLarity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data polarity of Parallel decoding.
               Parameter
              Name               Type                Range                                   Default
              <n>                Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                               -
              <pol>              Discrete            {NEGative|POSitive}                     POSitive
               Remarks
               •    NEGative: indicates negative polarity.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
38
                                                                                        Command System
                     •    POSitive: indicates positive polarity.
                     Return Format
                     The query returns NEG or POS.
                     Example
                     :BUS1:PARallel:POLarity NEGative                /*Sets the data polarity of
                     Parallel decoding to Negative.*/
                     :BUS1:PARallel:POLarity?                        /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.4.11          :BUS<n>:RS232
                 The :BUS<n>:RS232 commands are used to set relevant parameters for RS232
                 decoding.
                 RS232 serial bus consists of the transmitting data line (TX) and the receiving data line
                 (RX).
                                     Figure 3.2 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus
                 In RS232, baud rate is used to represent the transmission rate (namely bits per
                 second) of the data. In RS232, you need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit
                 (optional), and stop bit for each frame of data.
                 •       Start Bit: indicates when to output data.
                 •       Data Bits: indicates the number of data bits actually contained in each frame of
                         data.
                 •       Check Bit: used to check whether the data are properly transmitted.
                 •       Stop Bit: indicates when to stop outputting data.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        39
Command System
3.4.11.1      :BUS<n>:RS232:TX
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:RS232:TX <source>
               :BUS<n>:RS232:TX?
               Description
               Sets or queries the Tx source of RS232 decoding on the specific bus.
               Parameter
              Name             Type              Range                                  Default
              <n>              Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>         Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                 CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                 CHANnel4|OFF}
               Remarks
               The Tx and Rx sources cannot be set to OFF at the same time. The Rx source can be
               set by using the :BUS<n>:RS232:RX command.
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or OFF.
               Example
               :BUS1:RS232:TX CHANnel2    /*Sets the Tx source of RS232 decoding
               to CHANnel2.*/
               :BUS1:RS232:TX?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.4.11.2      :BUS<n>:RS232:RX
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:RS232:RX <source>
               :BUS<n>:RS232:RX?
               Description
               Sets or queries the Rx source of RS232 decoding on the specific bus.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
40
                                                                                          Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                         -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                              OFF
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4|OFF}
                  Remarks
                  The Tx and Rx sources cannot be set to OFF at the same time. The Tx source can be
                  set by using the :BUS<n>:RS232:TX command.
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or OFF.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:RS232:RX CHANnel2    /*Sets the Rx source of RS232 decoding
                  to CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:RS232:RX?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.4.11.3        :BUS<n>:RS232:POLarity
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:RS232:POLarity <pol>
                  :BUS<n>:RS232:POLarity?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the polarity of RS232 decoding on the specified bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                         -
                  <pol>               Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}               NEGative
                  Remarks
                  •     POSitive: indicates positive polarity. High level is logic "1" and low level is logic
                        "0".
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                           41
Command System
               •    NEGative: indicates negative polarity. High level is logic "0" and low level is
                    logic "1".
               Return Format
               The query returns POS or NEG.
               Example
               :BUS1:RS232:POLarity POSitive                  /*Sets the polarity of RS232
               decoding to POSitive.*/
               :BUS1:RS232:POLarity?                      /*The query returns POS.*/
3.4.11.4      :BUS<n>:RS232:PARity
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:RS232:PARity <parity>
               :BUS<n>:RS232:PARity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the odd-even check mode of data transmission in RS232 decoding.
               Parameter
              Name               Type             Range                                   Default
              <n>                Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
              <parity>           Discrete         {NONE|ODD|EVEN}                         NONE
               Remarks
               •    None: indicates that there is no parity bit in data transmission.
               •    ODD: indicates the odd parity bit. The total count of occurrences of 1 in the
                    data bit and check bit is an odd number. For example, if 0x55 (01010101) is
                    transmitted, 1 shall be added to the check bit.
               •    Even: indicates the even parity bit. The total count of occurrences of 1 in the
                    data bit and check bit is an even number. For example, if 0x55 (01010101) is
                    transmitted, 0 shall be added to the check bit.
               Return Format
               The query returns NONE, ODD, or EVEN.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
42
                                                                                        Command System
                  Example
                  :BUS1:RS232:PARity ODD        /*Sets the odd-even check mode of
                  data transmission in RS232 decoding to ODD.*/
                  :BUS1:RS232:PARity?            /*The query returns ODD.*/
 3.4.11.5        :BUS<n>:RS232:ENDian
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:RS232:ENDian <endian>
                  :BUS<n>:RS232:ENDian?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the endian of data transmission in RS232 decoding.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <endian>            Discrete            {MSB|LSB}                       LSB
                  Remarks
                  •     LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, that is, the lowest bit
                        of the data is transmitted first.
                  •     MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, that is, the highest
                        bit of the data is transmitted first.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns LSB or MSB.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:RS232:ENDian MSB                       /*Sets the transmission order of
                  RS232 decoding to MSB.*/
                  :BUS1:RS232:ENDian?                           /*The query returns MSB.*/
 3.4.11.6        :BUS<n>:RS232:BAUD
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:RS232:BAUD <baud>
                  :BUS<n>:RS232:BAUD?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         43
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the baud rate of data transmission in RS232 decoding. The default
               unit is bps.
               Parameter
              Name               Type                Range                                   Default
              <n>                Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                               -
              <baud>             Integer             1bps to 20Mbps                          9600 bps
               Remarks
               If the baud rate is set to a value with "M", then "A" should be added at the end of
               the value. For example, if you send 5M, you need to send 5MA.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 20M.
               Example
               :BUS1:RS232:BAUD 4800        /*Sets the baud rate of data
               transmission in RS232 decoding to 4800 bps.*/
               :BUS1:RS232:BAUD?            /*The query returns 4800.*/
3.4.11.7      :BUS<n>:RS232:DBITs
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:RS232:DBITs <bits>
               :BUS<n>:RS232:DBITs?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data width of RS232 decoding.
               Parameter
              Name               Type                Range                                   Default
              <n>                Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                               -
              <bits>             Discrete            {5|6|7|8|9}                             8
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
44
                                                                                           Command System
                     Example
                     :BUS1:RS232:DBITs 7          /*Sets the data width of RS232 decoding to
                     7.*/
                     :BUS1:RS232:DBITs?                /*The query returns 7.*/
 3.4.11.8        :BUS<n>:RS232:SBITs
                     Syntax
                     :BUS<n>:RS232:SBITs <stop bits>
                     :BUS<n>:RS232:SBITs?
                     Description
                     Sets or queries the stop bits of each frame of data in RS232 decoding.
                     Parameter
                  Name                Type                 Range                            Default
                  <n>                 Discrete             {1|2|3|4}                        -
                  <stop bits>         Discrete             {1|1.5|2}                        1
                     Remarks
                     N/A
                     Return Format
                     The query returns 1, 1.5, or 2.
                     Example
                     :BUS1:RS232:SBITs 2          /*Sets the stop bits of RS232 decoding to
                     2.*/
                     :BUS1:RS232:SBITs?          /*The query returns 2.*/
3.4.12          :BUS<n>:IIC
                 The :BUS<n>:IIC commands are used to set relevant parameters for I2C decoding.
                 I2C serial bus consists of the clock line (SCL) and the data line (SDA).
                 •       SCL: samples SDA on the of rising or falling edge of the clock.
                 •       SDA: indicates the data channel.
                           SCL
                         SDA
                                                       Figure 3.3 I2C Serial Bus
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                          45
Command System
3.4.12.1      :BUS<n>:IIC:SCLK:SOURce
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:IIC:SCLK:SOURce <source>
               :BUS<n>:IIC:SCLK:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the clock source of I2C decoding.
               Parameter
              Name              Type             Range                                   Default
              <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>          Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                 CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                 CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :BUS1:IIC:SCLK:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the clock source of I2C
               decoding to CHANnel2.*/
               :BUS1:IIC:SCLK:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.4.12.2      :BUS<n>:IIC:SDA:SOURce
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:IIC:SDA:SOURce <source>
               :BUS<n>:IIC:SDA:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data source of the I2C decoding on the specified bus.
               Parameter
              Name              Type             Range                                   Default
              <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
46
                                                                                         Command System
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:IIC:SDA:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the data source of I2C
                  decoding to CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:IIC:SDA:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.4.12.3        :BUS<n>:IIC:EXCHange
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:IIC:EXCHange <bool>
                  :BUS<n>:IIC:EXCHange?
                  Description
                  Sets to exchange the clock channel source and the data channel source of I2C
                  decoding on the specified bus; queries whether the clock channel source and the
                  data channel source of I2C decoding on the specified bus have been exchanged.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                0|OFF
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 0 or 1.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       47
Command System
               Example
               :BUS1:IIC:EXCHange ON /*Sets to exchange the clock channel source
               and the data channel source.*/
               :BUS1:IIC:EXCHange? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.4.12.4      :BUS<n>:IIC:ADDRess
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:IIC:ADDRess <addr>
               :BUS<n>:IIC:ADDRess?
               Description
               Sets or queries the address mode of I2C decoding.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <n>               Discrete           {1|2|3|4}                              -
              <addr>            Discrete           {NORMal|RW}                            NORMal
               Remarks
               •    NORMal: indicates that the address width does not include the R/W bit.
               •    RW: indicates that the address width includes the R/W bit.
               Return Format
               The query returns NORM or RW.
               Example
               :BUS1:IIC:ADDRess RW           /*Sets the address of I2C decoding to
               include the R/W bit.*/
               :BUS1:IIC:ADDRess?               /*The query returns RW.*/
3.4.13       :BUS<n>:SPI
              The :BUS<n>:SPI commands are used to set relevant parameters for SPI decoding.
              SPI bus is based on the master-slave configuration and usually consists of chip select
              line (CS), clock line (CLK), and data line (SDA). Wherein, the data lines include the
              master input/slave output (MISO) data line and master output/slave input (MOSI)
              data line. The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling
              edge, or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic "1" or
              logic "0") according to the preset threshold level).
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
48
                                                                                           Command System
                                         CLK
                                         MOSI
                         Master                        Slave
                                         MISO                            CLK
                                         CS
                                                                         SDA
                                                                      (MISO/MOSI)
                                                    Figure 3.4 SPI Serial Bus
 3.4.13.1        :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SOURce <source>
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the clock source of SPI decoding on the specified bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                          -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                               CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:SPI:SCLK:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the clock source of SPI
                  decoding to CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:SPI:SCLK:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                           49
Command System
3.4.13.2      :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe <slope>
               :BUS<n>:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe?
               Description
               Sets or queries the clock edge type of the SPI decoding.
               Parameter
              Name             Type              Range                                  Default
              <n>              Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
              <slope>          Discrete          {POSitive|NEGative}                    POSitive
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns POS or NEG.
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe NEGative             /*Sets the clock edge type of SPI
               decoding to Negative.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe?                         /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.4.13.3      :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:SOURce
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:SOURce <source>
               :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the MISO data source of SPI decoding on the specified bus.
               Parameter
              Name             Type              Range                                  Default
              <n>              Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>         Discrete                                                 CHANnel2
                                                 CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                 CHANnel4|OFF}
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
50
                                                                                         Command System
                  Remarks
                  The source specified in this command and the :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:SOURce command
                  cannot be set to OFF at the same time.
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or OFF.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:SPI:MISO:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the MISO data source of
                  SPI decoding to CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:SPI:MISO:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.4.13.4        :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:SOURce <source>
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the MOSI data source of SPI decoding on the specified bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            OFF
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4|OFF}
                  Remarks
                  The source specified in this command and the :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:SOURce command
                  cannot be set to OFF at the same time.
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or OFF.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       51
Command System
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:MOSI:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the MOSI data source of
               SPI decoding to CHANnel2.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:MOSI:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.4.13.5      :BUS<n>:SPI:POLarity
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:SPI:POLarity <polarity>
               :BUS<n>:SPI:POLarity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the polarity of the SPI decoding on the specified decoding bus.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <n>               Discrete           {1|2|3|4}                              -
              <polarity>        Discrete           {HIGH|LOW}                             HIGH
               Remarks
               •    HIGH: indicates positive polarity. The high level is 1, and low level is 0.
               •    LOW: indicates negative polarity. The high level is 0, and low level is 1.
               Return Format
               The query returns HIGH or LOW.
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:POLarity HIGH               /*Sets the polarity of the SPI
               decoding to Positive.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:POLarity?                   /*The query returns HIGH.*/
3.4.13.6      :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:POLarity
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:POLarity <polarity>
               :BUS<n>:SPI:MISO:POLarity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the polarity of MISO data line of SPI decoding.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
52
                                                                                           Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                          -
                  <polarity>          Discrete            {HIGH|LOW}                         HIGH
                  Remarks
                  •     HIGH: positive polarity. It indicates that high level is 1, and low level is 0.
                  •     LOW: negative polarity. It indicates that low level is 1, and high level is 0.
                  This command exists for backwards compatibility. Use the
                  command :BUS<n>:SPI:POLarity.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns HIGH or LOW.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:SPI:MISO:POLarity HIGH                        /*Sets the polarity of MISO data
                  line to Positive.*/
                  :BUS1:SPI:MISO:POLarity?                            /*The query returns HIGH.*/
 3.4.13.7        :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:POLarity
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:POLarity <polarity>
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:MOSI:POLarity?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the polarity of MOSI data line of SPI decoding.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                          -
                  <polarity>          Discrete            {HIGH|LOW}                         HIGH
                  Remarks
                  •     HIGH: positive polarity. It indicates that high level is 1, and low level is 0.
                  •     LOW: negative polarity. It indicates that low level is 1, and high level is 0.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                          53
Command System
               Return Format
               The query returns HIGH or LOW.
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:MOSI:POLarity HIGH                  /*Sets the polarity of MOSI data
               line to HIGH.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:MOSI:POLarity?                      /*The query returns HIGH.*/
3.4.13.8      :BUS<n>:SPI:DBITs
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:SPI:DBITs <width>
               :BUS<n>:SPI:DBITs?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data width of SPI decoding.
               Parameter
              Name              Type             Range                                  Default
              <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                              -
              <width>           Integer          4 to 32                                8
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 4 to 32.
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:DBITs 10            /*Sets the data width of SPI decoding to
               10.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:DBITs?            /*The query returns 10.*/
3.4.13.9      :BUS<n>:SPI:ENDian
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:SPI:ENDian <endian>
               :BUS<n>:SPI:ENDian?
               Description
               Sets or queries the endian of data transmission in SPI decoding.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
54
                                                                                         Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <endian>            Discrete            {MSB|LSB}                       MSB
                  Remarks
                  •     MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, that is, the highest
                        bit of the data is transmitted first.
                  •     LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, that is, the lowest bit
                        of the data is transmitted first.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns MSB or LSB.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:SPI:ENDian LSB                   /*Sets the endian of data transmission
                  in SPI decoding to LSB.*/
                  :BUS1:SPI:ENDian?                      /*The query returns LSB.*/
 3.4.13.10       :BUS<n>:SPI:MODE
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:MODE <mode>
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:MODE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the decode mode of SPI decoding.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <mode>              Discrete            {CS|TIMeout}                    TIMeout
                  Remarks
                  •     CS: indicates chip select. It contains a chip select line (CS). You can perform
                        frame synchronization according to CS.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                          55
Command System
               •    TIMeout: indicates timed out. You can perform frame synchronization
                    according to the timeout.
               For DHO800 series, only 4-channel models support CS setting for SPI decoding.
               Return Format
               The query returns CS or TIM.
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:MODE CS /*Sets the decode mode of SPI decoding to CS.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:MODE? /*The query returns CS.*/
3.4.13.11     :BUS<n>:SPI:TIMeout:TIME
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:SPI:TIMeout:TIME <time>
               :BUS<n>:SPI:TIMeout:TIME?
               Description
               Sets or queries the timeout value of SPI decoding on the specified bus. The unit is s.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                  Default
              <n>               Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
              <time>            Real              8 ns to 10 s                           1μs
               Remarks
               •    This setting command is only valid in timeout mode. You can
                    send :BUS<n>:SPI:MODE to set or query the decode mode of SPI decoding.
               •    The timeout must be greater than the maximum clock pulse width and less than
                    the idle time between frames.
               Return Format
               The query returns the timeout value in scientific notation.
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:TIMeout:TIME 0.000005                /*Sets the timeout value to 5
               μs.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:TIMeout:TIME?                        /*The query returns
               5.000000E-6.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
56
                                                                                         Command System
 3.4.13.12       :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:SOURce <source>
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the source of the CS line of SPI decoding on the specified bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel3
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  This setting command is only valid in CS mode. You can send :BUS<n>:SPI:MODE to
                  set or query the decode mode of the SPI decoding.
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  For DHO800 series, only 4-channel models support this command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:SPI:SS:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the source of CS line of
                  SPI decoding to CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:SPI:SS:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.4.13.13       :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:POLarity
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:POLarity <polarity>
                  :BUS<n>:SPI:SS:POLarity?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the polarity of CS line of SPI decoding on the specified bus.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       57
Command System
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                  Default
              <n>                Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
              <polarity>         Discrete          {HIGH|LOW}                             LOW
               Remarks
               •    HIGH: indicates that the oscilloscope samples data of the source channel of
                    data line on the specified edge of the clock signal when the CS signal is high
                    level.
               •    LOW: indicates that the oscilloscope samples data of the source channel of data
                    line on the specified edge of the clock signal when the CS signal is low level.
               This setting command is only valid in CS mode. You can send :BUS<n>:SPI:MODE to
               set or query the decode mode of the SPI decoding.
               For DHO800 series, only 4-channel models support this command.
               Return Format
               The query returns HIGH or LOW.
               Example
               :BUS1:SPI:SS:POLarity HIGH /*Sets the polarity of CS line of SPI
               decoding to HIGH.*/
               :BUS1:SPI:SS:POLarity? /*The query returns HIGH.*/
3.4.14       :BUS<n>:CAN
              The :BUS<n>:CAN commands are used to set relevant parameters for CAN/CAN-FD
              decoding.
              The oscilloscope samples the CANsignal in the specified sample position, and judges
              each data point to be logic "1" or logic "0" according to the set threshold level. The
              CAN/CAN-FD decoding is required to specify the CAN signal type and the sample
              position.
              Sample Position
              Sample position is a point within a bit's time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at
              this point. The sample point position is expressed as the ratio of "time from the bit
              start to the sample point" to "bit time", in %.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
58
                                                                                         Command System
                                                                One Bit
                                                                      60%
                                                                        70%
                                                                           80%
                                                   Figure 3.5 Sample Position
 3.4.14.1        :BUS<n>:CAN:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:CAN:SOURce <source>
                  :BUS<n>:CAN:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the source of CAN decoding on the specific bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returnsD0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:CAN:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the source of CAN decoding on
                  Bus1 to CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:CAN:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                        59
Command System
3.4.14.2      :BUS<n>:CAN:STYPe
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:CAN:STYPe <stype>
               :BUS<n>:CAN:STYPe?
               Description
               Sets or queries the signal type of CAN decoding.
               Parameter
              Name              Type             Range                                   Default
              <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
              <stype>           Discrete         {TX|RX|CANH|CANL|DIFFerential} CANL
               Remarks
               •    TX: indicates the Transmit signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
               •    RX: indicates the Receive signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
               •    CANH: indicates the actual CAN_H differential bus signal.
               •    CANL: indicates the actual CAN_L differential bus signal.
               •    DIFFerential: indicates the CAN differential bus signal connected to an analog
                    channel by using a differential probe. Connect the differential probe's positive
                    lead to the CAN_H bus signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus
                    signal.
               Return Format
               The query returns TX, RX, CANH, CANL, or DIFF.
               Example
               :BUS1:CAN:STYPe TX               /*Sets the signal type of CAN decoding
               to TX.*/
               :BUS1:CAN:STYPe?                 /*The query returns TX.*/
3.4.14.3      :BUS<n>:CAN:BAUD
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:CAN:BAUD <baud>
               :BUS<n>:CAN:BAUD?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
60
                                                                                        Command System
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the signal rate of CAN decoding on the specified decoding bus. The
                  unit is bps.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <baud>              Integer             10 kbps to 5 Mbps               1 Mbps
                  Remarks
                  If the baud rate is set to a value with "M", then "A" should be added at the end of
                  the value. For example, if you send 5M, you need to send 5MA.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 10k to 5M.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:CAN:BAUD 120000                /*Sets the signal rate of CAN decoding to
                  120000 bps*/
                  :BUS1:CAN:BAUD?                              /*The query returns 120000.*/
 3.4.14.4        :BUS<n>:CAN:SPOint
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:CAN:SPOint <spoint>
                  :BUS<n>:CAN:SPOint?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the sample point position of CAN decoding on the specified bus
                  (expressed in %).
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <spoint>            Integer             10 to 90                        50
                  Remarks
                  For detailed information about sample point position, refer to Sample Position.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 10 to 90.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                        61
Command System
               Example
               :BUS1:CAN:SPOint 70                /*Sets the sample point position of CAN
               decoding to 70%.*/
               :BUS1:CAN:SPOint?                  /*The query returns 70.*/
3.4.15       :BUS<n>:LIN
              The :BUS<n>:LIN commands are used to set relevant parameters for LIN decoding.
              The oscilloscope samples the LIN signal at the specified sample position (if the source
              is an analog channel, the oscilloscope will also judge each data point (logic "1" or
              logic "0") according to the preset threshold level). You need to specify the LIN signal
              protocol version.
              NOTE
              Only the DHO900 series oscilloscope supports :BUS<n>:LIN commands.
3.4.15.1      :BUS<n>:LIN:PARity
               Syntax
               :BUS<n>:LIN:PARity <bool>
               :BUS<n>:LIN:PARity?
               Description
               Sets or queries whether the LIN decoding on the specified decoding bus includes
               the parity bit.
               Parameter
              Name                Type               Range                                Default
              <n>                 Discrete           {1|2|3|4}                            -
              <bool>              Bool               {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                     0|OFF
               Remarks
               •    1|ON: includes the parity bit.
               •    0|OFF: does not include the parity bit.
               Return Format
               The query returns 0 or 1.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
62
                                                                                         Command System
                  Example
                  :BUS1:LIN:PARity ON                          /*Sets the parity bit to be
                  included in LIN decoding.*/
                  :BUS1:LIN:PARity?                               /*The query returns 1.*/
 3.4.15.2        :BUS<n>:LIN:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:LIN:SOURce <source>
                  :BUS<n>:LIN:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the source of LIN decoding on the specific bus.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :BUS1:LIN:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the source of LIN decoding to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :BUS1:LIN:SOURce?      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.4.15.3        :BUS<n>:LIN:STANdard
                  Syntax
                  :BUS<n>:LIN:STANdard <value>
                  :BUS<n>:LIN:STANdard?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the version of LIN bus.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       63
Command System
               Parameter
              Name               Type             Range                                  Default
              <n>                Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                              -
              <value>            Discrete         {V1X|V2X|MIXed}                        MIXed
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns V1X, V2X, or MIX.
               Example
               :BUS1:LIN:STANdard V2X                         /*Sets the LIN bus version to
               V2X.*/
               :BUS1:LIN:STANdard?                            /*The query returns V2X.*/
3.5          :BODeplot Commands
              The :BODeplot commands are used to set the relevant parameters of the bode plot
              function.
              A Bode plot is a graph that maps the frequency response of the system. Through the
              analysis on the gain margin and phase margin of the system, you can determine the
              stability of the system.
              With the built-in signal generator module, the series generates the sweep signal of a
              specified frequency range and outputs to the switching power supply circuit under
              test. Then, the oscilloscope draws a Bode plot displaying the variation of phase and
              gain with different frequencies.
              NOTE
              These commands are only available for DHO914S and DHO924S models.
3.5.1        :BODeplot:ENABle
              Syntax
              :BODeplot:ENABle <bool>
              :BODeplot:ENABle?
              Description
              Sets or queries the on/off status of the bode plot.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
64
                                                                                    Command System
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                       Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}            0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Examples
                 :BODeplot:ENABle ON /*Enables the bode plot.*/
                 :BODeplot:ENABle? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.5.2           :BODeplot:RUNStop
                 Syntax
                 :BODeplot:RUNStop <bool>
                 :BODeplot:RUNStop?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the run/stops status of the bode plot.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                       Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}            0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :BODeplot:RUNStop ON /*Starts the bode plot drawing.*/
                 :BODeplot:RUNStop? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.5.3           :BODeplot:SWEeptype
                 Syntax
                 :BODeplot:SWEeptype <type>
                 :BODeplot:SWEeptype?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                    65
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries the sweep type of the bode plot.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                  <type>          Discrete         {LOG|LINE}                              LOG
              Remarks
              •     LOG: logarithmic sweep, indicating that the frequency of the swept sine wave
                    varies logarithmically with the time.
              •     LINE: linear sweep, indicating that the frequency of the swept sine wave varies
                    linearly with the time.
              Return Format
              The query returns LOG or LINE.
              Example
              :BODeplot:SWEeptype LINE             /*Sets the sweep type of the bode plot
              to Linear.*/
              :BODeplot:SWEeptype?              /*The query returns LINE.*/
3.5.4        :BODeplot:REF:IN
              Syntax
              :BODeplot:REF:IN <source>
              :BODeplot:REF:IN?
              Description
              Sets or queries the input source of the bode plot.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                                                   {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>        Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns CHANnel1, CHANnel2, CHANnel3, or CHANnel4.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
66
                                                                                       Command System
                 Example
                 :BODeplot:REF:IN CHANnel1 /*Sets the input source of the bode plot
                 to CH1.*/
                 :BODeplot:REF:IN? /*The query returns CHANnel1.*/
3.5.5           :BODeplot:REF:OUT
                 Syntax
                 :BODeplot:REF:OUT <source>
                 :BODeplot:REF:OUT?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the output source of the bode plot.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>            Discrete                                           CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns CHANnel1, CHANnel2, CHANnel3, or CHANnel4.
                 Example
                 :BODeplot:REF:OUT CHANnel1 /*Sets the output source of the bode
                 plot to CH1.*/
                 :BODeplot:REF:OUT? /*The query returns CHANnel1.*/
3.5.6           :BODeplot:STARt
                 Syntax
                 :BODeplot:STARt <freq>
                 :BODeplot:STARt?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the start frequency of the sweep signal in the bode plot. The default
                 unit is Hz.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <freq>              Real                10 Hz to 24.99 MHz             100 Hz
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         67
Command System
              Remarks
              The start frequency that you set shall be smaller than the stop frequency.
              To set or query the stop frequency of the sweep signal, run the :BODeplot:STOP
              command.
              Return Format
              The query returns the start frequency value in scientific notation. The unit is Hz.
              Example
              :BODeplot:STARt 100             /*Sets the start frequency of the sweep
              signal to 100 Hz.*/
              :BODeplot:STARt?                /*The query returns 1.000000E+2.*/
3.5.7        :BODeplot:STOP
              Syntax
              :BODeplot:STOP <freq>
              :BODeplot:STOP?
              Description
              Sets or queries the stop frequency of the sweep signal in the bode plot. The default
              unit is Hz.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <freq>            Real              100 Hz to 25 MHz                       1 MHz
              Remarks
              The stop frequency that you set shall be greater than the start frequency.
              To set or query the start frequency of the sweep signal, run the :BODeplot:STARt
              command.
              Return Format
              The query returns the stop frequency in scientific notation. The unit is Hz.
              Example
              :BODeplot:STOP 500             /*Sets the stop frequency of the sweep
              signal to 500 Hz.*/
              :BODeplot:STOP?                /*The query returns 5.000000E+2.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
68
                                                                                        Command System
3.5.8           :BODeplot:POINts
                 Syntax
                 :BODeplot:POINts <num>
                 :BODeplot:POINts?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the number of sweep points per decade.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <num>               Integer             10 to 300                      10
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the number of sweep points per decade in integer.
                 Example
                 :BODeplot:POINts 20                 /*Sets the number of the sweep points per
                 decade to 20.*/
                 :BODeplot:POINts?                     /*The query returns 20.*/
3.5.9           :BODeplot:VOLTage
                 Syntax
                 :BODeplot:VOLTage <range>,<amp>
                 :BODeplot:VOLTage? <range>
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the variable amplitude of the sweep signal in the specified frequency
                 range in the bode plot. The default unit of voltage is V, and the default frequency unit
                 is Hz.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <amp>               Real                Refer to Remarks               200 mV
                                                          {ALL|10|100|1K|10K|100K|1M|
                  <range>             Discrete            10M|25M|1000|10000|100000|     -
                                                          1000000|10000000|25000000|
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       69
Command System
                  Name           Type                Range                                   Default
                                                     1e1|1e2|1e3|1e4|1e5|1e6|1e7|
                                                     2.5e7}
              Remarks
              The range of <amp> is 20 mV to 5 V
              •     When <range> is set to ALL: sets a unified voltage amplitude for the sweep
                    signal in all the frequency ranges, with the voltage amplitude invariable.
              •     When <range> is set to other values other than ALL: sets a voltage amplitude for
                    the specified range, with the voltage amplitude variable.
              Return Format
              The query returns the voltage amplitude of the sweep signal for the specified output
              frequency range in real number. The unit is V.
              Example
              :BODeplot:VOLTage 100,0.3 /*Sets the voltage amplitude of the
              signal whose frequency range is greater than 100 Hz to 300 mV.*/
              :BODeplot:VOLTage? 100     /*The query returns 0.300000.*/
3.6          :CHANnel<n> Commands
              The :CHANnel<n> commands are used to set or query the bandwidth limit, coupling,
              vertical scale, vertical offset, and other vertical system parameters of the analog
              channel.
              •     Setting the bandwidth limit can reduce the noises in the displayed waveforms.
                    For example, the signal under test is a pulse with high frequency oscillation.
                    When the bandwidth limit is turned off, the high frequency components of the
                    signal under test can pass the channel. When the bandwidth limit is turned on,
                    the high frequency components found in the signal under test that are greater
                    than the limit are attenuated.
              •     You can remove unwanted signals by setting the coupling mode. For example,
                    the signal under test is a square waveform with DC offset. AC coupling mode can
                    block the DC components.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
70
                                                                                         Command System
                 •      When you use an oscilloscope to make actual measurements, a small offset that
                        arises from the temperature drift of the component or external environment
                        disturbance may occur on the zero-cross voltage of the channel, which will affect
                        the measurement results of the vertical parameters. This series oscilloscope
                        allows you to set an offset calibration voltage for calibrating the zero point of
                        the corresponding channel so as to improve the accuracy of the measurement
                        results.
                 •      When the fine adjustment is enabled, you can further adjust the vertical scale
                        within a relatively smaller range to improve vertical resolution, making it easier
                        to view waveform details.
3.6.1           :CHANnel<n>:BWLimit
                 Syntax
                 :CHANnel<n>:BWLimit <val>
                 :CHANnel<n>:BWLimit?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of the specified channel.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                     <val>            Discrete            Refer to Remarks                 OFF
                 Remarks
                 This series oscilloscope supports the 20 MHz bandwidth limit.
                 When set to OFF, the bandwidth limit is disabled.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 20M or OFF.
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:BWLimit 20M               /*Enables the 20MHz bandwidth limit.*/
                 :CHANnel1:BWLimit?                  /*The query returns 20M.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                             71
Command System
3.6.2        :CHANnel<n>:COUPling
              Syntax
              :CHANnel<n>:COUPling <coupling>
              :CHANnel<n>:COUPling?
              Description
              Sets or queries the coupling mode of the specified channel.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type            Range                                   Default
                  <n>             Discrete        {1|2|3|4}                               -
                  <coupling>      Discrete        {AC|DC|GND}                             DC
              Remarks
              •      AC: the DC components of the signal under test are blocked.
              •      DC: both DC and AC components of the signal under test can pass through the
                     channel.
              •      GND: both DC and AC components of the signal under test are blocked.
              Return Format
              The query returns AC, DC, or GND.
              Example
              :CHANnel1:COUPling AC           /*Sets the coupling mode to AC.*/
              :CHANnel1:COUPling?             /*The query returns AC.*/
3.6.3        :CHANnel<n>:DISPlay
              Syntax
              :CHANnel<n>:DISPlay <bool>
              :CHANnel<n>:DISPlay?
              Description
              Enables or disables the specified channel; or queries the on/off status of the specified
              channel.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
72
                                                                                      Command System
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                        Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                    -
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}             1|ON
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:DISPlay ON               /*Enables CHANnel1.*/
                 :CHANnel1:DISPlay?                 /*The query returns 1.*/
3.6.4           :CHANnel<n>:INVert
                 Syntax
                 :CHANnel<n>:INVert <bool>
                 :CHANnel<n>:INVert?
                 Description
                 Turns on or off the waveform invert for the specified channel; or queries the on/off
                 status of the waveform invert for the specified channel.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                        Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                    -
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}             0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 When the waveform invert is turned off, the waveform is displayed normally; when
                 the waveform invert is turned on, the voltage values of the displayed waveform are
                 inverted.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:INVert ON              /*Enables the waveform invert for CH1.*/
                 :CHANnel1:INVert?                /*The query returns 1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                        73
Command System
3.6.5        :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet
              Syntax
              :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet <offset>
              :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet?
              Description
              Sets or queries the vertical offset of the specified channel. The default unit is V.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                   Default
                  <n>            Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                               -
                  <offset>       Real              Refer to Remarks                        0V
              Remarks
              The range of the vertical offset of the specified channel is related to the its current
              vertical scale.
              •      ±0.5 V (<500 μV/div)
              •      ±1 V (≥500 μV/div, ≤65 mV/div)
              •      ±8 V (≥65.01 mV/div, ≤260 mV/div)
              •      ±20 V (≥260.01 mV/div, ≤2.65 V/div)
              •      ±100 V (≥2.6501 V/div, ≤10 V/div)
              You can send the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command to set or query the vertical scale of
              the specified channel.
              Return Format
              The query returns the vertical offset in scientific notation.
              Example
              :CHANnel1:OFFSet 0.01           /*Sets the vertical offset of CH1 to 10
              mV.*/
              :CHANnel1:OFFSet?               /*The query returns 1.000000E-02.*/
3.6.6        :CHANnel<n>:TCALibrate
              Syntax
              :CHANnel<n>:TCALibrate <val>
              :CHANnel<n>:TCALibrate?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
74
                                                                                          Command System
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the delay calibration time (used to calibrate the zero offset of the
                 corresponding channel) of the specified channel. The unit is s.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                             Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                         -
                     <val>            Real                -100 ns to 100 ns                 0s
                 Remarks
                 When the horizontal time base is greater than 10 μs, the parameter <val> cannot be
                 set.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the delay calibration time in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:TCALibrate 0.00000002 /*Sets the delay calibration time
                 to 20 ns.*/
                 :CHANnel1:TCALibrate? /*The query returns 2.000000E-8.*/
3.6.7           :CHANnel<n>:SCALe
                 Syntax
                 :CHANnel<n>:SCALe <scale>
                 :CHANnel<n>:SCALe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified channel. Its default unit is V/div.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                             Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                         -
                     <scale>          Real                Refer to Remarks                  50 mV
                 Remarks
                 The range of the vertical scale of the channel is related to probe ratio, .
                 •      For the DHO800 series, when the probe ratio is 1X, the range of <scale> is from
                        500 μV/div to 10 V/div.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                           75
Command System
              •      For the DHO900 series, when the probe ratio is 1X, the range of <scale> is from
                     200 μV/div to 10 V/div.
              You can send the :CHANnel<n>:PROBe to set or query the probe ratio of the
              specified analog channel.
              Return Format
              The query returns the vertical scale in scientific notation. The unit is V/div.
              Example
              :CHANnel1:SCALe 0.1/*Sets the vertical scale of CH1 to 0.1 V/div.*/
              :CHANnel1:SCALe?   /*The query returns 1.000000E-01.*/
3.6.8        :CHANnel<n>:PROBe
              Syntax
              :CHANnel<n>:PROBe <atten>
              :CHANnel<n>:PROBe?
              Description
              Sets or queries the probe ratio of the specified analog channel.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                  Default
                  <n>             Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
                                                    {0.001|0.002|0.005|0.01|0.02|
                                                    0.05|0.1|0.2|0.5|1|2|5|10|20|50|
                  <atten>         Discrete                                                 1
                                                    100|200|500|1000|2000|5000|
                                                    10000|20000|50000}
              Remarks
              •      Display amplitude of the signal under test = Actual amplitude of the signal
                     under test x Probe ratio(Probe ratio does not affect the actual amplitude of the
                     signal)
              •      The set probe ratio affects the value and settable range of the current vertical
                     scale. To query the vertical scale, run the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
76
                                                                                           Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns0.001, 0.002, 0.005, 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50,
                 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, 10000, 20000, or 50000.
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:PROBe 10 /*Sets the probe attenuation ratio of CH1 to
                 10X.*/
                 :CHANnel1:PROBe?    /*The query returns 10.*/
3.6.9           :CHANnel<n>:LABel:SHOW
                 Syntax
                 :CHANnel<n>:LABel:SHOW <bool>
                 :CHANnel<n>:LABel:SHOW?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries whether to display the label of the specified channel.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                          -
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                   -
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:LABel:SHOW ON                        /*Displays the label of the
                 specified channel.*/
                 :CHANnel1:LABel:SHOW?                          /*The query returns 1.*/
3.6.10          :CHANnel<n>:LABel:CONTent
                 Syntax
                 :CHANnel<n>:LABel:CONTent <str>
                 :CHANnel<n>:LABel:CONTent?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the label of the specified channel.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                               77
Command System
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                   Default
               <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                  The label can contain English
               <str>             ASCII String     letters and numbers, as well as         -
                                                  some symbols.
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the label of the specified channel in strings.
              Example
              :CHANnel1:LABel:CONTent ch1        /*Sets the label of Channel 1 to
              ch1.*/
              :CHANnel1:LABel:CONTent? /*The query returns ch1.*/
3.6.11       :CHANnel<n>:UNITs
              Syntax
              :CHANnel<n>:UNITs <units>
              :CHANnel<n>:UNITs?
              Description
              Sets or queries the amplitude display unit of the specified analog channel.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                   Default
               <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                  {WATT|AMPere|VOLTage|
               <units>           Discrete                                                 VOLTage
                                                  UNKNown}
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns VOLT, WATT, AMP, or UNKN.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
78
                                                                                        Command System
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:UNITs VOLTage                /*Sets the amplitude display unit of CH1
                 to VOLTage.*/
                 :CHANnel1:UNITs?                       /*The query returns VOLT.*/
3.6.12          :CHANnel<n>:VERNier
                 Syntax
                 :CHANnel<n>:VERNier <bool>
                 :CHANnel<n>:VERNier?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the fine adjustment of the vertical scale of the specified channel;
                 or queries the on/off status of the fine adjustment of the vertical scale of the specified
                 channel.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :CHANnel1:VERNier ON     /*Enables the fine adjustment of the
                 vertical scale of CH1.*/
                 :CHANnel1:VERNier?        /*The query returns 1.*/
3.6.13          :CHANnel<n>:POSition
                 Syntax
                 :CHANnel<n>:POSition <offset>
                 :CHANnel<n>:POSition?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the bias voltage of the specified channel. The default unit is V.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        79
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                   Default
                  <n>            Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                               -
                  <offset>       Real              Refer to Remarks                        0
              Remarks
              The range of the bias voltage of the specified channel is related to its vertical scale .
              •      ±0.5 V (<500 μV/div)
              •      ±1 V (≥500 μV/div, ≤65 mV/div)
              •      ±8 V (≥65.01 mV/div, ≤260 mV/div)
              •      ±20 V (≥260.01 mV/div, ≤2.65 V/div)
              •      ±100 V (≥2.6501 V/div, ≤10 V/div)
              You can send the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command to set or query the vertical scale of
              the specified channel.
              Return Format
              The query returns the bias voltage of the specified channel in scientific notation. The
              unit is V.
              Example
              :CHANnel1:POSition 10           /*Sets the bias voltage of CH1 to 10 V.*/
              :CHANnel1:POSition?           /*The query returns 1.000000E+01.*/
3.7          :COUNter Commands
              :COUNter commands are used to set or query the measurement and statistic
              parameters for the frequency counter.
              The frequency counter analysis function provides frequency, period, or edge event
              counter measurements on any analog channel.
3.7.1        :COUNter:CURRent?
              Syntax
              :COUNter:CURRent?
              Description
              Queries the measurement value of the frequency counter.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
80
                                                                                     Command System
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the current measurement value of the frequency counter in
                 scientific notation.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.7.2           :COUNter:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :COUNter:ENABle <bool>
                 :COUNter:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the frequency counter; or queries the on/off status of the
                 frequency counter.
                 Parameter
                  Name                  Type              Range                        Default
                  <bool>                Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}             0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :COUNter:ENABle ON              /*Enables the frequency counter.*/
                 :COUNter:ENABle?                /*The query returns 1.*/
3.7.3           :COUNter:SOURce
                 Syntax
                 :COUNter:SOURce <source>
                 :COUNter:SOURce?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                     81
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries the source of the frequency counter.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>       Discrete                                                CHANnel1
                                                  CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                                                  CHANnel3|CHANnel4|EXT}
              Remarks
              Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
              EXT is only available for DHO812 and DHO802 models.
              Return Format
              The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
              D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or EXT.
              Example
              :COUNter:SOURce CHANnel2            /*Sets the source of the frequency
              counter to CHANnel2.*/
              :COUNter:SOURce?                    /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.7.4        :COUNter:MODE
              Syntax
              :COUNter:MODE <mode>
              :COUNter:MODE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the mode of the frequency counter.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <mode>         Discrete         {FREQuency|PERiod|TOTalize}            FREQuency
              Remarks
              •     FREQuency: indicates the Frequency measurement.
              •     PERiod: indicates the Period measurement.
              •     TOTalize: indicates the Totalize measurement.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
82
                                                                                          Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns FREQ, PER, or TOT.
                 Example
                 :COUNter:MODE PERiod                   /*Sets the mode of the frequency counter
                 to PERiod.*/
                 :COUNter:MODE?                         /*The query returns PER.*/
3.7.5           :COUNter:NDIGits
                 Syntax
                 :COUNter:NDIGits <val>
                 :COUNter:NDIGits?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the resolution of the frequency counter.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <val>               Integer             3 to 6                           4
                 Remarks
                 When the measurement mode of the frequency counter is Period or Frequency, you
                 need to set resolution. When the mode is Totalize, resolution is available to set. You
                 can run the :COUNter:MODE command to set or query the measurement mode of the
                 frequency counter.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer ranging from 3 to 6.
                 Example
                 :COUNter:NDIGits 4                        /*Sets the resolution of the frequency
                 counter to 4.*/
                 :COUNter:NDIGits?                             /*The query returns 4.*/
3.7.6           :COUNter:TOTalize:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :COUNter:TOTalize:ENABle <bool>
                 :COUNter:TOTalize:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the statistical function of the frequency counter; or queries the
                 on/off status of the statistical function of the frequency counter.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                          83
Command System
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                   Default
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                        0|OFF
              Remarks
              The statistical function is only available for "Period" and "Frequency", but it is
              unavailable for "Totalize". You can use :COUNter:MODE to query or set the
              measurement mode.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Examples
              :COUNter:TOTalize:ENABle ON /*Enables the statistical function of
              the frequency counter.*/
              :COUNter:TOTalize:ENABle? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.7.7        :COUNter:TOTalize:CLEar
              Syntax
              :COUNter:TOTalize:CLEar
              Description
              Clears the total count.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              Available when "Totalize", "Frequency", or "Period" is selected under "Measure".
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.8          :CURSor Commands
              The Cursor commands are used to measure the X axis values (e.g. Time) and Y axis
              values (e.g. Voltage) of the waveform on the screen.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
84
                                                                                          Command System
                 Before making cursor measurements, connect the signal to the oscilloscope to
                 acquire stable display. The cursor measurement function provides the following two
                 cursors.
                                                  X Cursor (Cursor A)          X Cursor (Cursor B)
                             Y Cursor
                            (Cursor A)
                             Y Cursor
                            (Cursor B)
                                                        Figure 3.6 Cursors
                 •     X Cursor
                       X cursor is a vertical solid/dotted line that is used to make horizontal
                       adjustments. It can be used to measure time (s) and frequency (Hz).
                       -    Cursor A is a vertical solid line and Cursor B is a vertical dotted line.
                       -    In the XY cursor mode, cursor X is used to measure the waveform
                            amplitude of CH1.
                 •     Y Cursor
                       Y cursor is a horizontal solid/dotted line that is used to make vertical
                       adjustments. It can be used to measure amplitude (the unit is the same as that of
                       the source channel amplitude).
                       -    Cursor A is a horizontal solid line and Cursor B is a horizontal dotted line.
                       -    In XY cursor mode, cursor Y is used to measure the waveform amplitude of
                            CH2.
                 Cursor Measurement Results
                 •     AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
                 •     AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
                 •     BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                            85
Command System
              •     BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
              •     ∆X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
              •     ∆Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
              •     1/∆X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
                    Cursor B.
              Cursor Mode
              •     Manual Mode
                    In the manual cursor mode, you can adjust the cursor manually to measure the
                    value of the waveforms of the specified source at the current cursor. If the
                    settings for the parameter such as the cursor type and measurement source are
                    different, the measurement results will be different for cursor measurement.
              •     Track Mode
                    In the Track mode, you can adjust the two pairs of cursors (Cursor A and Cursor
                    B) to measure the X and Y values on two different sources respectively. When the
                    cursors are moved horizontally/vertically, the markers will position on the
                    waveform automatically. When the waveform is expanded or compressed
                    horizontally/vertically, the markers will track the points being marked at the last
                    adjustment of the cursors.
              •     XY Mode
                    By default, XY mode is unavailable. It is available only when the horizontal time
                    base mode is "XY".
3.8.1        :CURSor:MODE
              Syntax
              :CURSor:MODE <mode>
              :CURSor:MODE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the mode of the cursor measurement.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                  <mode>          Discrete         {OFF|MANual|TRACk|XY}                   OFF
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
86
                                                                                     Command System
                 Remarks
                 •     OFF: disables the cursor measurement function.
                 •     MANual: the manual mode of cursor measurement.
                 •     TRACk: the track mode of cursor measurement.
                 •     XY: the XY mode of cursor measurement. It is only valid when you select "XY"
                       mode. You can use :TIMebase:MODE to query or set the mode.
                 For functions of different cursor measurement modes, refer to Cursor Mode.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns OFF, MAN, TRAC, or XY.
                 Example
                 :CURSor:MODE MANual /*Selects the manual mode of cursor
                 measurement.*/
                 :CURSor:MODE? /*The query returns MAN.*/
3.8.2           :CURSor:MEASure:INDicator
                 Syntax
                 :CURSor:MEASure:INDicator <bool>
                 :CURSor:MEASure:INDicator?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the on/off status of the indicator for the measurement function.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                        Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}             0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :CURSor:MEASure:INDicator? ON   /*Sets the indicator for the
                 measurement function to ON.*/
                 :CURSor:MEASure:INDicator? /*The query returns 1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                      87
Command System
3.8.3        :CURSor:MANual
3.8.3.1       :CURSor:MANual:TYPE
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:TYPE <type>
               :CURSor:MANual:TYPE?
               Description
               Sets or queries the cursor type in the manual mode of cursor measurement.
               Parameter
              Name               Type            Range                                   Default
              <type>             Discrete        {TIME|AMPLitude}                        TIME
               Remarks
               •   TIME: indicates X cursor, which is often used to measure the time parameters.
               •   AMPLitude: indicates Y cursor, which is often used to measure the voltage
                   parameters.
               Return Format
               The query returns TIME or AMPL.
               Example
               :CURSor:MANual:TYPE AMPLitude                  /*Sets the cursor type to
               AMPLitude.*/
               :CURSor:MANual:TYPE?                           /*The query returns AMPL.*/
3.8.3.2       :CURSor:MANual:SOURce
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:SOURce <source>
               :CURSor:MANual:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the channel source of the manual mode of cursor measurement.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
88
                                                                                       Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>            Discrete            CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|       CHANnel1
                                                          MATH2|MATH3|MATH4|NONE}
                  Remarks
                  When the channel source is NONE, the manual mode of cursor is disabled.
                  Return Format
                  The query returnsCHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3,
                  MATH4or NONE.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:MANual:SOURce CHANnel2                  /*Sets the channel source to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :CURSor:MANual:SOURce?                           /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.8.3.3         :CURSor:MANual:CAX
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:MANual:CAX <ax>
                  :CURSor:MANual:CAX?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the horizontal position of Cursor A in the manual mode of cursor
                  measurement.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <ax>                Real                Refer to Remarks               -
                  Remarks
                  The range of the horizontal position of Cursor A is determined by the current
                  horizontal scale and position.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the horizontal position of Cursor A scientific notation. The unit is
                  s.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       89
Command System
               Example
               :CURSor:MANual:CAX 0.00000001               /*Sets the horizontal position of
               Cursor A to 10 ns.**/
               :CURSor:MANual:CAX?                      /*The query returns 1.000000E-8.*/
3.8.3.4       :CURSor:MANual:CAY
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:CAY <ay>
               :CURSor:MANual:CAY?
               Description
               Sets or queries the vertical position of Cursor A in the manual mode of cursor
               measurement.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <ay>              Real               Refer toRemarks                        -
               Remarks
               The range of the vertical position of Cursor A is determined by the current vertical
               scale and position.
               Return Format
               The query returns the vertical position of Cursor A in scientific notation. The unit is V.
               Example
               :CURSor:MANual:CAY 0.1            /*Sets the vertical position of Cursor A
               to 0.1 V.*/
               :CURSor:MANual:CAY?               /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
3.8.3.5       :CURSor:MANual:CBX
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:CBX <bx>
               :CURSor:MANual:CBX?
               Description
               Sets or queries the horizontal position of Cursor B in the manual mode of cursor
               measurement.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
90
                                                                                        Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <bx>                Real                Refer to Remarks                -
                  Remarks
                  The range of the horizontal position of Cursor B is determined by the current
                  horizontal scale and position.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the horizontal position of Cursor B in scientific notation. The unit
                  is s.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:MANual:CBX 0.00000001    /*Sets the horizontal position of
                  Cursor B to 10 ns.*/
                  :CURSor:MANual:CBX?       /*The query returns 1.000000E-8.*/
 3.8.3.6         :CURSor:MANual:CBY
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:MANual:CBY <by>
                  :CURSor:MANual:CBY?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the vertical position of Cursor B in the manual mode of cursor
                  measurement.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <by>                Real                Refer to Remarks                -
                  Remarks
                  The range of the vertical position of Cursor B is determined by the current vertical
                  scale and position.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the vertical position of Cursor B in scientific notation.The unit is V.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:MANual:CBY 0.1                /*Sets the vertical position of Cursor B
                  to 0.1 V.*/
                  :CURSor:MANual:CBY?                   /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         91
Command System
3.8.3.7       :CURSor:MANual:AXValue?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:AXValue?
               Description
               Queries the X value at Cursor A in the manual mode of cursor measurement. The
               unit is determined by the horizontal unit selected for the currently corresponding
               channel.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the X value at Cursor A in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.3.8       :CURSor:MANual:AYValue?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:AYValue?
               Description
               Queries the Y value at Cursor A in the manual mode of cursor measurement. The
               unit is determined by the currently selected vertical unit.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               •     The returned value is the same as the measurement value in the Cursor
                     interface. Therefore, the unit is related to the vertical unit. When the vertical
                     unit of cursor is set to Source, the unit of the returned value is the same as
                     vertical unit of the channel.
               •     No value is returned when the cursor measurement value is invalid.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
92
                                                                                          Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the Y value at Cursor A in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.3.9         :CURSor:MANual:BXValue?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:MANual:BXValue?
                  Description
                  Queries the X value at Cursor B in the manual mode of cursor measurement. The unit
                  is determined by the currently selected horizontal unit.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the X value at Cursor B in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.3.10        :CURSor:MANual:BYValue?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:MANual:BYValue?
                  Description
                  Queries the Y value at Cursor B in the manual mode of cursor measurement. The unit
                  is determined by the currently selected vertical unit.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  •     The returned value is the same as the measurement value in the Cursor
                        interface. Therefore, the unit is related to the vertical unit. When the vertical
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                            93
Command System
                     unit of cursor is set to Source, the unit of the returned value is the same as
                     vertical unit of the channel.
               •     No value is returned when the cursor measurement value is invalid.
               Return Format
               The query returns the Y value at Cursor B in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.3.11      :CURSor:MANual:XDELta?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:XDELta?
               Description
               Queries the difference (ΔX) between the X value at Cursor A and the X value at
               Cursor B in the manual mode of cursor measurement. The unit is determined by the
               currently selected horizontal unit.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the current difference in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.3.12      :CURSor:MANual:IXDelta?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:MANual:IXDelta?
               Description
               Queries the reciprocal (1/ΔX) of the absolute difference between the X value at
               Cursor A and the X value at Cursor B in the manual mode of cursor measurement.
               The unit is determined by the currently selected horizontal unit.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
94
                                                                                      Command System
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 1/ΔX in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.3.13        :CURSor:MANual:YDELta?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:MANual:YDELta?
                  Description
                  Queries the difference (ΔY) between the Y value at Cursor A and the Y value at
                  Cursor B in the manual mode of cursor measurement. The unit is determined by the
                  currently selected vertical unit.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the current difference in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
3.8.4           :CURSor:TRACk
 3.8.4.1         :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce1
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce1 <source>
                  :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce1?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                      95
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the channel source of Cursor A in the track mode of cursor
               measurement.
               Parameter
              Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                                                 {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
              <source>         Discrete          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|               CHANnel1
                                                 MATH2|MATH3|MATH4|NONE}
               Remarks
               When no channel is enabled, sending this command will enable the corresponding
               channel.
               Return Format
               The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3,
               MATH4, or NONE.
               Example
               :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce1 CHANnel2             /*Sets the channel source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce1?                      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.8.4.2       :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce2
               Syntax
               :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce2 <source>
               :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce2?
               Description
               Sets or queries the channel source of Cursor B in the track mode of cursor
               measurement.
               Parameter
              Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                                                 {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
              <source>         Discrete          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|               CHANnel1
                                                 MATH2|MATH3|MATH4|NONE}
               Remarks
               When no channel is enabled, sending this command will enable the corresponding
               channel.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
96
                                                                                       Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3,
                  MATH4, or NONE.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce2 CHANnel2                  /*Sets the channel source to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :CURSor:TRACk:SOURce2?                           /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.8.4.3         :CURSor:TRACk:CAX
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CAX <ax>
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CAX?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the horizontal position of Cursor A in the track mode of cursor
                  measurement.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <ax>                Real                Refer to Remarks               -
                  Remarks
                  The range of the horizontal position of Cursor A is determined by the current
                  horizontal scale and position.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the horizontal position of Cursor A scientific notation. The unit is
                  s.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CAX 1.000000E-8    /*Sets the horizontal position of
                  Cursor A to 10 ns.*/
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CAX?       /*The query returns 1.000000E-8.*/
 3.8.4.4         :CURSor:TRACk:CBX
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CBX <bx>
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CBX?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                       97
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the horizontal position of Cursor B in the track mode of cursor
               measurement.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <bx>              Real               Refer to Remarks                       -
               Remarks
               The range of the horizontal position of Cursor B is determined by the current
               horizontal scale and position.
               Return Format
               The query returns the horizontal position of Cursor B in scientific notation. The unit
               is s.
               Example
               :CURSor:TRACk:CBX 1.000000E-8    /*Sets the horizontal position of
               Cursor B to 10 ns.*/
               :CURSor:TRACk:CBX?       /*The query returns 1.000000E-8.*/
3.8.4.5       :CURSor:TRACk:CAY
               Syntax
               :CURSor:TRACk:CAY <ay>
               :CURSor:TRACk:CAY?
               Description
               Sets or queries the vertical position of Cursor A in the track mode of cursor
               measurement.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <ay>              Real               Refer to Remarks                       -
               Remarks
               The range of the vertical position of Cursor A is determined by the current vertical
               scale and position.
               Return Format
               The query returns the vertical position of Cursor A in scientific notation. The unit is V.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
98
                                                                                        Command System
                  Example
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CAY 0.1                /*Sets the vertical position of Cursor A
                  to 0.1 V.*/
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CAY?                   /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
 3.8.4.6         :CURSor:TRACk:CBY
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CBY <by>
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CBY?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the vertical position of Cursor B in the track mode of cursor
                  measurement.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <by>                Real                Refer to Remarks                -
                  Remarks
                  The range of the vertical position of Cursor B is determined by the current vertical
                  scale and position.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the vertical position of Cursor B in scientific notation.The unit is V.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CBY 0.1                /*Sets the vertical position of Cursor B
                  to 0.1 V.*/
                  :CURSor:TRACk:CBY?                   /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
 3.8.4.7         :CURSor:TRACk:AXValue?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:AXValue?
                  Description
                  Queries the X value at Cursor A in the track mode of cursor measurement. The unit is
                  determined by the amplitude unit selected for the currently corresponding channel.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         99
Command System
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the X value at Cursor A in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.4.8       :CURSor:TRACk:AYValue?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:TRACk:AYValue?
               Description
               Queries the Y value at Cursor A in the track mode of cursor measurement. The unit is
               the same as that selected for the current channel.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the Y value at Cursor A in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.4.9       :CURSor:TRACk:BXValue?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:TRACk:BXValue?
               Description
               Queries the X value at Cursor B in the track mode of cursor measurement. The unit is
               determined by the amplitude unit selected for the currently corresponding channel.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
100
                                                                                      Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the X value at Cursor B in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.4.10        :CURSor:TRACk:BYValue?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:BYValue?
                  Description
                  Queries the Y value at Cursor B in the track mode of cursor measurement. The unit is
                  the same as that selected for the current channel.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the Y value at Cursor B in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.4.11        :CURSor:TRACk:XDELta?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:XDELta?
                  Description
                  Queries the difference (ΔX) between the X value at Cursor A and the X value at
                  Cursor B in the track mode of cursor measurement.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the current difference in scientific notation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     101
Command System
               Example
               N/A
3.8.4.12      :CURSor:TRACk:YDELta?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:TRACk:YDELta?
               Description
               Queries the difference (ΔY) between the Y value at Cursor A and the Y value at
               Cursor B in the track mode of cursor measurement. The unit is the same as that
               selected for the current channel.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the current difference in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.4.13      :CURSor:TRACk:IXDelta?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:TRACk:IXDelta?
               Description
               Queries the reciprocal (1/ΔX) of the absolute difference between the X value at
               Cursor A and the X value at Cursor B in the track mode of cursor measurement. The
               default unit is Hz.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns 1/ΔX in scientific notation.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
102
                                                                                      Command System
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.4.14        :CURSor:TRACk:MODE
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:TRACk:MODE <mode>
                  :CURSor:TRACk:MODE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the axis in the track mode of cursor measurement.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                        Default
                  <mode>              Discrete            {Y|X}                        -
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns Y or X.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:TRACk:MODE X    /*Sets the axis in the track mode of
                  cursor measurement to X-axis.*/
                  :CURSor:TRACk:MODE?       /*The query returns X.*/
3.8.5           :CURSor:XY
                 The :CURSor:XY commands are only available when the horizontal time base mode is
                 set to XY.
 3.8.5.1         :CURSor:XY:AX
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:XY:AX <x>
                  :CURSor:XY:AX?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the horizontal position of Cursor A in the XY cursor measurement
                  mode.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                 Guide
                                                                                                     103
Command System
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
              <x>                Real              Refer to Description                    -
               Description
               Related to the current vertical scale and vertical offset.
               Return Format
               The query returns the horizontal position of Cursor A in scientific notation. The unit
               is V.
               Example
               :CURSor:XY:AX 0.1           /*Sets the horizontal position of Cursor A to
               100 mV.*/
               :CURSor:XY:AX?              /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
3.8.5.2       :CURSor:XY:BX
               Syntax
               :CURSor:XY:BX <x>
               :CURSor:XY:BX?
               Description
               Sets or queries the horizontal position of Cursor B in the XY cursor measurement
               mode.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
              <x>                Real              Refer to Remarks                        -
               Remarks
               Related to the current vertical scale and vertical offset.
               Return Format
               The query returns the horizontal position of Cursor B in scientific notation.
               Example
               :CURSor:XY:BX 0.1           /*Sets the horizontal position of Cursor B to
               100 mV.*/
               :CURSor:XY:BX?              /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
104
                                                                                        Command System
 3.8.5.3         :CURSor:XY:AY
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:XY:AY <y>
                  :CURSor:XY:AY?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the vertical position of Cursor A in the XY cursor measurement mode.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <y>                 Real                Refer to Description            -
                  Description
                  Related to the current vertical scale and vertical offset.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the vertical position of Cursor A in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :CURSor:XY:AY 0.1              /*Sets the vertical position of Cursor A to
                  100 mV.*/
                  :CURSor:XY:AY?                 /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
 3.8.5.4         :CURSor:XY:BY
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:XY:BY <y>
                  :CURSor:XY:BY?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the vertical position of Cursor B in the XY cursor measurement mode.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <y>                 Real                Refer to Remarks                -
                  Remarks
                  Related to the current vertical scale and vertical offset.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the vertical position of Cursor B in scientific notation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       105
Command System
               Example
               :CURSor:XY:BY 0.1          /*Sets the vertical position of Cursor B to
               100 mV.*/
               :CURSor:XY:BY?             /*The query returns 1.000000E-1.*/
3.8.5.5       :CURSor:XY:AXValue?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:XY:AXValue?
               Description
               Queries the X value at Cursor A in the XY cursor measurement mode.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the X value at Cursor A in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.5.6       :CURSor:XY:AYValue?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:XY:AYValue?
               Description
               Queries the X value at Cursor A in the XY cursor measurement mode.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the Y value at Cursor A in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
106
                                                                                      Command System
 3.8.5.7         :CURSor:XY:BXValue?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:XY:BXValue?
                  Description
                  Queries the X value at Cursor B in the XY cursor measurement mode.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the X value at Cursor B in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.5.8         :CURSor:XY:BYValue?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:XY:BYValue?
                  Description
                  Queries the Y value at Cursor B in the XY cursor measurement mode.
                  Parameter
                  N/A
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the Y value at Cursor B in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  N/A
 3.8.5.9         :CURSor:XY:XDELta?
                  Syntax
                  :CURSor:XY:XDELta?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     107
Command System
               Description
               Queries the difference (∆X) between the X value at Cursor A and the X value at
               Cursor B in the XY cursor measurement.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the current difference in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.8.5.10      :CURSor:XY:YDELta?
               Syntax
               :CURSor:XY:YDELta?
               Description
               Queries the difference (∆Y) between the Y value at Cursor A and the Y value at
               Cursor B in the XY cursor measurement. The unit is the same as that selected for the
               current channel.
               Parameter
               N/A
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the current difference in scientific notation.
               Example
               N/A
3.9          :DISPlay Commands
              The :DISPlay commands can be used to set the displayed type of the waveform,
              persistence time, intensity, grid type, grid brightness, etc.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
108
                                                                                      Command System
3.9.1           :DISPlay:CLEar
                 Syntax
                 :DISPlay:CLEar
                 Description
                 Clears all the waveforms on the screen.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 •     If the oscilloscope is in the "RUN" state, new waveforms will continue being
                       displayed after being cleared.
                 •     You can also send the :CLEar command to clear all the waveforms on the screen.
                 •     This command functions the same as the front-panel key           .
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.9.2           :DISPlay:TYPE
                 Syntax
                 :DISPlay:TYPE <type>
                 :DISPlay:TYPE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the display type of the waveforms on the screen.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <type>           Discrete            {VECTors}                     VECTors
                 Remarks
                 VECTors: The sample points are connected by lines and displayed. Normally, this
                 mode can provide the most vivid waveform to view the steep edge of the waveform
                 (such as square waveforms).
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                      109
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns VECT.
              Example
              :DISPlay:TYPE VECTors            /*Sets the display type to VECTors.*/
              :DISPlay:TYPE?                 /*The query returns VECT.*/
3.9.3        :DISPlay:GRADing:TIME
              Syntax
              :DISPlay:GRADing:TIME <time>
              :DISPlay:GRADing:TIME?
              Description
              Sets or queries the persistence time. The default unit is s.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type                Range                                Default
                                                      {MIN|0.1|0.2|0.5|1|2|5|10|
                  <time>          Discrete                                                 MIN
                                                      INFinite}
              Remarks
              •     MIN: sets the persistence time to its minimum value to view how the waveform
                    changes at a high refresh rate.
              •     specified value (e.g. 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10): sets the persistence time to any of
                    the above specific value to observe glitches that change relatively slowly or
                    glitches with low occurrence probability.
              •     INFinite: In this mode, the oscilloscope displays the waveform newly acquired
                    without clearing the waveforms acquired formerly. It can be used to measure
                    noise and jitter and to capture incidental events.
              Return Format
              The query returns MIN, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, or INF.
              Example
              :DISPlay:GRADing:TIME 0.1            /*Sets the persistence time to 100 ms.*/
              :DISPlay:GRADing:TIME?              /*The query returns 0.1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
110
                                                                                     Command System
3.9.4           :DISPlay:WBRightness
                 Syntax
                 :DISPlay:WBRightness <brightness>
                 :DISPlay:WBRightness?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the brightness of the waveform on the screen, expressed in
                 percentage.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                        Default
                     <brightness>     Integer             1 to 100                     50
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 100.
                 Example
                 :DISPlay:WBRightness 50                /*Sets the waveform brightness to 50%.*/
                 :DISPlay:WBRightness?                  /*The query returns 50.*/
3.9.5           :DISPlay:GRID
                 Syntax
                 :DISPlay:GRID <grid>
                 :DISPlay:GRID?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the display type of the screen grid.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                        Default
                     <grid>           Discrete            {FULL|HALF|NONE}             FULL
                 Remarks
                 •      FULL: turns the background grid and coordinates on.
                 •      HALF: turns the background grid off and turns the coordinate on.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                    111
Command System
              •      NONE: turns the background grid and coordinate off.
              Return Format
              The query returns FULL, HALF, or NONE.
              Example
              :DISPlay:GRID NONE           /*Turns the background grid and coordinates
              off.*/
              :DISPlay:GRID?                /*The query returns NONE.*/
3.9.6        :DISPlay:GBRightness
              Syntax
              :DISPlay:GBRightness <brightness>
              :DISPlay:GBRightness?
              Description
              Sets or queries the brightness of the screen grid, expressed in percentage.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <brightness>   Integer          0 to 100                               50
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 100.
              Example
              :DISPlay:GBRightness 60           /*Sets the screen grid brightness to
              60%.*/
              :DISPlay:GBRightness?             /*The query returns 60.*/
3.9.7        :DISPlay:DATA?
              Syntax
              :DISPlay:DATA?[<type>]
              Description
              Queries the bitmap data stream of the currently displayed image.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
112
                                                                                        Command System
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <type>              Discrete            {BMP|PNG|JPG}                   BMP
                 Remarks
                 The read data format is TMC header + binary data stream of the screenshot +
                 terminator. The TMC header is in #NXXXXXX format; wherein, # is the TMC header
                 identifier; N following # represents the number of digits (in the decimal integer) that
                 follow; the length of the binary data stream of the screenshot is expressed in ASCII
                 strings, and the terminator represents the ending of communication. For example, the
                 data read for one time is #9000387356. 9 indicates the number of digits (in the
                 decimal integer) that follow, and "000387356" indicates the length of the binary data
                 stream, that is, the number of bytes to be transmitted.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the binary data stream of the screenshot in a specified format.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.9.8           :DISPlay:RULers
                 Syntax
                 :DISPlay:RULers <bool>
                 :DISPlay:RULers?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the display of the scale ruler; or queries the on/off status of the
                 scale ruler.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                1|ON
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                           113
Command System
              Example
              :DISPlay:RULers ON           /*Enables the display of the scale ruler.*/
              :DISPlay:RULers?              /*The query returns 1.*/
3.9.9        :DISPlay:COLor
              Syntax
              :DISPlay:COLor <bool>
              :DISPlay:COLor?
              Description
              Enables or disables the color grade display; or queries the on/off status of the color
              grade display.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              When it is enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to indicate the times
              of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Examples
              :DISPlay:COLor ON /*Enables the color grade display.*/
              :DISPlay:COLor? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.9.10       :DISPlay:WHOLd
              Syntax
              :DISPlay:WHOLd <bool>
              :DISPlay:WHOLd?
              Description
              Sets to enable or disable the waveform freezing function; queries whether to enable
              or disable the waveform freezing function.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
114
                                                                                   Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :DISPlay:WHOLd ON             /*Enables the Waveform Freeze.*/
                 :DISPlay:WHOLd?                /*The query returns 1.*/
3.10            :DVM Commands
                 :DVM commands are used to set or query the DVM parameters.
                 The built-in DVM of this oscilloscope provides 4-digit voltage measurements on any
                 analog channel. DVM measurements are asynchronous from the oscilloscope's
                 acquisition system and are always acquiring.
3.10.1          :DVM:CURRent?
                 Syntax
                 :DVM:CURRent?
                 Description
                 Queries the current voltage value under test.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.10.2          :DVM:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :DVM:ENABle <bool>
                 :DVM:ENABle?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.               DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                Guide
                                                                                                 115
Command System
              Description
              Enables or disables the digital voltmeter; or queries the on/off status of the digital
              voltmeter.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :DVM:ENABle ON         /*Enables the digital voltmeter.*/
              :DVM:ENABle?           /*The query returns 1.*/
3.10.3       :DVM:SOURce
              Syntax
              :DVM:SOURce <source>
              :DVM:SOURce?
              Description
              Sets or queries the source of the digital voltmeter.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
               <source>          Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
              Example
              :DVM:SOURce CHANnel1           /*Sets the source of DVM to CHANnel1.*/
              :DVM:SOURce?                   /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
116
                                                                                        Command System
3.10.4          :DVM:MODE
                 Syntax
                 :DVM:MODE <mode>
                 :DVM:MODE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the mode of digital voltmeter.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <mode>           Discrete            {ACRMs|DC|DCRMs}               ACRMs
                 Remarks
                 •     ACRMs: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data, with the DC
                       component removed.
                 •     DC: displays the root- average-square value of the acquired data.
                 •     DCRMs: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns ACRM, DC, or DCRM.
                 Example
                 :DVM:MODE DC             /*Sets the mode of the digital voltmeter to DC.*/
                 :DVM:MODE?                   /*The query returns DC.*/
3.11            :HISTogram Commands
                 This series oscilloscope supports the histogram analysis function, which provides you
                 a statistical view of the waveforms or measurement results, enabling you to judge the
                 trend of waveforms, and quickly locate the potential problems of the signal.
                 NOTE
                 Only the DHO900 series supports the histogram analysis.
                 Histogram Analysis Results
                 The statistical results of the histogram analysis include the following items.
                 •     Sum: indicates the sum of all bins (buckets) in the histogram.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     117
Command System
              •     Peaks: indicates the maximum number of hits in any single bin.
              •     Max: indicates the maximum value.
              •     Min: indicates the minimum value.
              •     Pk_Pk: indicates the Delta (Max-Min) between the max. value and the min. value.
              •     Mean: indicates the average value of the histogram.
              •     Median: indicates the median value of the histogram.
              •     Mode: indicates the mode value of the histogram.
              •     Bin width: indicates the width of each bin (bucket) in the histogram.
              •     Sigma: indicates the standard deviation of the histogram.
              •     XScale: indicates the horizontal scale of the histogram. It is 100 times the value
                    of Bin width.
3.11.1       :HISTogram:ENABle
              Syntax
              :HISTogram:ENABle <bool>
              :HISTogram:ENABle?
              Description
              Enables or disables the histogram function; or queries the on/off status of the
              histogram.
              Parameter
                  Name              Type           Range                                   Default
                  <bool>            Bool           {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                        0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Examples
              :HISTogram:ENABle ON /*Enables the histogram function.*/
              :HISTogram:ENABle? /*The query returns 1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
118
                                                                                         Command System
3.11.2          :HISTogram:TYPE
                 Syntax
                 :HISTogram:TYPE <type>
                 :HISTogram:TYPE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the type of the histogram.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <type>           Discrete            {HORizontal|VERTical}            VERTical
                 Remarks
                 •     HORizontal: horizontal histogram.
                 •     VERTical: vertical histogram.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns HOR or VERT.
                 Example
                 :HISTogram:TYPE VERTical    /*Sets the histogram type to Vertical.*/
                 :HISTogram:TYPE?      /*The query returns VERT.*/
3.11.3          :HISTogram:SOURce
                 Syntax
                 :HISTogram:SOURce <source>
                 :HISTogram:SOURce?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the source of the histogram.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                     <source>         Discrete                                             CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                        119
Command System
              Remarks
              Return Format
              The query returnsCHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4.
              Example
              :HISTogram:SOURce CHANnel2               /*Sets the source of the histogram
              to CH2.*/
              :HISTogram:SOURce?                       /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.11.4       :HISTogram:HEIGht
              Syntax
              :HISTogram:HEIGht <height>
              :HISTogram:HEIGht?
              Description
              Sets or queries the height of the histogram.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <height>          Integer           1div to 4div                           2div
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 4.
              Example
              :HISTogram:HEIGht 2           /*Sets the histogram height to 2.*/
              :HISTogram:HEIGht?             /*The query returns 2.*/
3.11.5       :HISTogram:RANGe:LEFT
              Syntax
              :HISTogram:RANGe:LEFT <number>
              :HISTogram:RANGe:LEFT?
              Description
              Sets or queries the left limit of the histogram.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
120
                                                                                          Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                             Default
                                                          (-5 x Horizontal Time Base +
                                                          Horizontal Offset) to (5 x
                     <number>         Real                                                  -
                                                          Horizontal Time Base +
                                                          Horizontal Offset)
                 Remarks
                 •     The left limit should be smaller than the right limit. You can
                       use :HISTogram:RANGe:RIGHt to set or query the right limit of the histogram.
                 •     You can use :TIMebase[:MAIN]:SCALe to set or query the horizontal time base.
                 •     You can use :TIMebase[:MAIN][:OFFSet] to set or query the horizontal offset.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the left limit in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:LEFT -2                 /*Sets the left limit of the histogram
                 to -2 s.*/
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:LEFT?                   /*The query returns -2.000000E0.*/
3.11.6          :HISTogram:RANGe:RIGHt
                 Syntax
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:RIGHt <number>
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:RIGHt?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the right limit of the histogram.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                             Default
                                                          (-5 x Horizontal Time Base +
                                                          Horizontal Offset) to (5 x
                     <number>         Real                                                  -
                                                          Horizontal Time Base +
                                                          Horizontal Offset)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                         121
Command System
              Remarks
              •     The right limit should be greater than the left limit. You can
                    use :HISTogram:RANGe:LEFT to set or query the left limit of the histogram.
              •     You can use :TIMebase[:MAIN]:SCALe to set or query the horizontal time base.
              •     You can use :TIMebase[:MAIN][:OFFSet] to set or query the horizontal offset.
              Return Format
              The query returns the right limit in scientific notation.
              Example
              :HISTogram:RANGe:RIGHt 2             /*Sets the right limit of the histogram
              to 2 s.*/
              :HISTogram:RANGe:RIGHt?               /*The query returns 2.000000E0.*/
3.11.7       :HISTogram:RANGe:TOP
              Syntax
              :HISTogram:RANGe:TOP <number>
              :HISTogram:RANGe:TOP?
              Description
              Sets or queries the top limit of the histogram.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                                                   (-4 x VerticalScale - OFFSet) to
                  <number>        Real                                                     -
                                                   (4 x VerticalScale - OFFSet)
              Remarks
              •     The top limit should be greater than the bottom limit. You can
                    use :HISTogram:RANGe:BOTTom to set or query the bottom limit of the
                    histogram.
              •     You can use :CHANnel<n>:SCALe to set or query the vertical scale for the
                    specified channel.
              •     You can use :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet to set or query the vertical offset for the
                    specified channel.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
122
                                                                                             Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the top limit in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:TOP -2                /*Sets the top limit of the histogram to
                 -2 V.*/
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:TOP?                  /*The query returns -2.000000E0.*/
3.11.8          :HISTogram:RANGe:BOTTom
                 Syntax
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:BOTTom <number>
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:BOTTom?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the bottom limit of the histogram.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                               Default
                                                          (-4 x VerticalScale - OFFSet) to
                     <number>         Real                                                    -
                                                          (4 x VerticalScale - OFFSet)
                 Remarks
                 •     The bottom limit should be smaller than the top limit. You can
                       use :HISTogram:RANGe:TOP to set or query the top limit of the histogram.
                 •     You can use :CHANnel<n>:SCALe to set or query the vertical scale for the
                       specified channel.
                 •     You can use :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet to set or query the vertical offset for the
                       specified channel.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the bottom limit in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:BOTTom -2                    /*Sets the bottom limit of the
                 histogram to -2 V.*/
                 :HISTogram:RANGe:BOTTom?                      /*The query returns -2.000000E0.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                         123
Command System
3.11.9       :HISTogram:STATistics:RESult?
              Syntax
              :HISTogram:STATistics:RESult?
              Description
              Queries the statistics of the histogram results.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the statistics of the histogram results in strings.
              [Sum:5.6khits,Peaks:14hits,Max:3.9us,Min:-4us,Pk_Pk:7.98us,Mean:-20n
              s,Median:-20ns,Mode:-4us,Bin width:20ns,Siqma:2.303us]
              For details about the returned results, refer to descriptions in Histogram Analysis
              Results.
              Example
              N/A
3.12         IEEE488.2 Common Commands
              The IEEE488.2 common commands are used to query the basic information of the
              instrument or executing basic operations. These commands usually start with "*", and
              the command keywords contain 3 characters and are related with status registers.
              The standard event status register (SESR) and status byte register (SBR) record the
              event of a certain type happened during the use of the instrument. IEEE488.2 defines
              to record one specific type of event for each bit in the status register.
             Table 3.128 Table of the Bit Definition of Standard Event Status Register
                                          Decimal
              Bit No.       Bit Name                      Description
                                          Value
                            Operation                     "Operation complete" indicates that all
              0             Complete      1               pending operations were completed
                            (OPC)                         following the execution of the command.
              1             Not Used      2               -
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
124
                                                                                          Command System
                                                Decimal
                 Bit No.       Bit Name                        Description
                                                Value
                                                               The instrument tries to read the output
                                                               buffer but it was empty. Or, a new
                               Query Error
                 2                              4              command line was received before a
                               (QYE)
                                                               previous query has been read. Or, both the
                                                               input buffer and output buffer are full.
                                                               Indicates that an error has occurred that is
                                                               neither a Command Error, a Query Error,
                                                               nor an Execution Error. A Device-Specific
                               Device-
                                                               Error is any executed device operation that
                 3             Specific Error 8
                                                               did not properly complete due to some
                               (DDE)
                                                               condition, such as self-check error,
                                                               calibration error, or other device-specific
                                                               errors.
                               Execution
                 4                              16             An execution error occurred.
                               Error (E)
                               Command                         A command error (command syntax error)
                 5                              32
                               Error (CME)                     has occurred.
                 6             Not Used         64             -
                                                               Indicates that an off-to-on transition has
                               Power On                        occurred in the device's power supply since
                 7                              128
                               (PON)                           last reading or the event register was
                                                               cleared.
                Table 3.129 Table of the Bit Definition of Status Byte Register
                                                Decimal
                 Bit No.       Bit Name                        Description
                                                Value
                 0             Not Used         1              -
                 1             Not Used         2              -
                 2             Error Queue      4              1 or multiple errors in the error queue
                               Questionable                    Sets 1 or multiple bits (must be the
                 3             Data             8              enabled bit) in the questionable data
                               Summary                         register.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                             125
Command System
                                           Decimal
              Bit No.       Bit Name                     Description
                                           Value
                            Message
                                                         Indicates the available data in the output
              4             Available      16
                                                         buffer.
                            (MAV)
                            Standard
                                                         Sets 1 or multiple bits (must be the
              5             Event          32
                                                         enabled bit) in the standard event register.
                            Summary
                            Master                       Sets 1 or multiple bits (must be the
              6             Summary        64            enabled bit) in the Status Byte Register and
                            Status (MSS)                 generate the service request.
                            Operation                    Sets 1 or multiple bits (must be the
              7             Status         128           enabled bit) in the Operation Status
                            Register                     Register.
3.12.1       *IDN?
              Syntax
              *IDN?
              Description
              Queries the ID string of the instrument.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES,<model>,<serial number>,<software
              version>.
              •     <model>: indicates the model number of the instrument.
              •     <serial number>: indicates the serial number of the instrument.
              •     <software version>: indicates the software version of the instrument.
              Example
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
126
                                                                                       Command System
3.12.2          *RST
                 Syntax
                 *RST
                 Description
                 Restores the instrument to its factory default settings.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.12.3          *CLS
                 Syntax
                 *CLS
                 Description
                 Clears all the event registers, and also clears the error queue.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.12.4          *ESE
                 Syntax
                 *ESE <maskargument>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      127
Command System
              *ESE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the enable register of the standard event register set.
              Parameter
               Name                           Type          Range                             Default
               <maskargument>                 Integer       0 to 255                          0
              Remarks
              For the definitions of the bits in the standard event register, refer to Table 3.128 Table
              of the Bit Definition of Standard Event Status Register . The value of <maskargument>
              is the sum of the decimal values of all bits set in the standard event register. For
              example, to enable Bit 2 (4 in decimal), Bit 3 (8 in decimal), and Bit 7 (128 in decimal),
              set the <maskargument> to 140 (4+8+128).
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer. The integer equals to the decimal-weighted sum of all
              the bits set in the register.
              Example
              *ESE 16 /*Enables Bit 4 (16 in decimal) in the register.*/
              *ESE? /*The query returns the enable value of the register 16.*/
3.12.5       *ESR?
              Syntax
              *ESR?
              Description
              Queries and clears the event register of the standard event status register.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              Bit 1 and Bit 6 in the standard event status register (Table 3.128 Table of the Bit
              Definition of Standard Event Status Register ) are not used and are always treated as
              0; therefore, the range of the returned value is a decimal number corresponding to a
              binary number X0XXXX0X (X is 1 or 0).
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer. The integer equals to the binary-weighted sum of all the
              bits set in the register.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
128
                                                                                        Command System
                 Example
                 N/A
3.12.6          *OPC
                 Syntax
                 *OPC
                 *OPC?
                 Description
                 The *OPC command sets bit 0 (Operation Complete, OPC) in the standard event
                 register to 1 after the current operation is finished.
                 The *OPC? command queries whether the current operation is finished.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 For the definitions of the bits in the standard event register, refer to Table 3.128 Table
                 of the Bit Definition of Standard Event Status Register .
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 after the current operation is finished; otherwise, the query
                 returns 0.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.12.7          *RCL
                 Syntax
                 *RCL
                 Description
                 Recalls instrument settings from the specified non-volatile memory. The previous
                 saved settings through the *SAV command will be overwritten.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        129
Command System
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.12.8       *SAV
              Syntax
              *SAV <value>
              Description
              Saves the current instrument state to the selected register.
              Parameter
               Name              Type                Range                                   Default
               <value>           Integer             0 to 49                                 0
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              *SAV 1            /*Saves the current instrument state to Register 1.*/
3.12.9       *SRE
              Syntax
              *SRE <maskargument>
              *SRE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the enable register of the status byte register set.
              Parameter
               Name                        Type                       Range                        Default
               <maskargument>              Integer                    0 to 255                     0
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
130
                                                                                          Command System
                 Remarks
                 For the definitions of the bits in the status byte register, refer to Table 3.129 Table of
                 the Bit Definition of Status Byte Register . The value of <maskargument> is the sum
                 of the decimal values of all bits set in the status byte register. For example, to enable
                 Bit 2 (4 in decimal), Bit 3 (8 in decimal), and Bit 7 (128 in decimal), set the
                 <maskargument> to 140 (4+8+128).
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer. The integer equals to the decimal-weighted sum of all
                 the bits set in the register.
                 Example
                 *SRE 16 /*Enables Bit 4 (16 in decimal) in the register.*/
                 *SRE? /*The query returns the enable value of the register 16.*/
3.12.10         *STB?
                 Syntax
                 *STB?
                 Description
                 Queries the event register for the status byte register. After executing the command,
                 the value in the status byte register is cleared.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 Bit 0 and Bit 1 in the status byte register (Table 3.129 Table of the Bit Definition of
                 Status Byte Register ) are not used and are always treated as 0; therefore, the range of
                 the returned value is a decimal number corresponding to a binary number XXXXXX00
                 (X is 1 or 0).
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer. The integer equals to the decimal-weighted sum of all
                 the bits set in the register.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.12.11         *WAI
                 Syntax
                 *WAI
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                           131
Command System
              Description
              Waits for all the pending operations to complete before executing any additional
              commands.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              This operation command does not have any functions, only to be compatible with
              other devices.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.12.12      *TST?
              Syntax
              *TST?
              Description
              Performs a self-test and returns the self-test result.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              This command executes a self-test. If the test fails, one or more error messages will be
              displayed, providing more information. You can use :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? to read
              the error queue.
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              •     0: it passes.
              •     1: one or more tests fail.
              Example
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
132
                                                                                          Command System
3.13            Digital Channel Commands
                 The :LA commands are used to perform relevant operations on the digital channels.
                 The oscilloscope compares the voltages acquired in each sample with the preset logic
                 threshold. If the voltage of the sample point is greater than the threshold, it will be
                 stored as logic 1; otherwise, it will be stored as logic 0. The oscilloscope displays logic
                 levels ("1" and "0") in the form of a graph for you to easily detect and analyze the
                 errors in circuit design (hardware design and software design).
                 NOTE
                 The :LA commands are only supported by the DHO900 series oscilloscope.
3.13.1          :LA:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :LA:ENABle <bool>
                 :LA:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Sets to enable or disable the LA function; queries whether the LA function is enabled.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                 0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :LA:ENABle ON            /*Enables the LA function.*/
                 :LA:ENABle?              /*The query returns 1.*/
3.13.2          :LA:ACTive
                 Syntax
                 :LA:ACTive <digital>
                 :LA:ACTive?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                           133
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries the current activate channel.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                  Default
                                                    {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                  <digital>       Discrete          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|            D0
                                                    NONE}
              Remarks
              •      The parameter <digital> can be any of the digital channels (D0-D15). The
                     channel label and waveform of the selected channel are displayed in red.
              •      When you send the parameter NONE, it means that no channel is selected.
              •      Only the currently enabled digital channel can be selected. Please refer to
                     the :LA:DIGital:ENABle command to enable the desired channel.
              Return Format
              The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
              D15, or NONE.
              Example
              :LA:ACTive D3          /*Sets the current activated channel to D3.*/
              :LA:ACTive?            /*The query returns D3.*/
3.13.3       :LA:AUTosort
              Syntax
              :LA:AUTosort <val>
              :LA:AUTosort?
              Description
              Sets the auto sorting mode for the waveforms of the enabled channels.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                  Default
                  <val>           Discrete          {D0D15|D15D0}                          D15D0
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
134
                                                                                    Command System
                 Remarks
                 •     D0D15: the waveforms on the display are D0-D15 in sequence from top to
                       bottom.
                 •     D15D0: the waveforms on the display are D15-D0 in sequence from top to
                       bottom.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns D0D15 or D15D0.
                 Example
                 :LA:AUTosort D0D15 /*Sets the auto sorting mode to D0D15.*/
                 :LA:AUTosort? /*The query returns D0D15.*/
3.13.4          :LA:DELete
                 Syntax
                 :LA:DELete <group>
                 Description
                 Cancels the group settings for the channel groups (GROup1-GROup4).
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                       Default
                                                          {GROup1|GROup2|GROup3|
                     <group>          Discrete                                        -
                                                          GROup4}
                 Remarks
                 This command only performs the canceling operation for digital channels or user-
                 defined channel group that have been group set.
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.13.5          :LA:DIGital:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :LA:DIGital:ENABle <digital>,<bool>
                 :LA:DIGital:ENABle? <digital>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                    135
Command System
              Description
              Turns on or off the specified digital channel; or queries the on/off status of the
              specified digital channel.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
               <digital>         Discrete                                                 -
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              The currently enabled channel can be selected as the active channel by sending
              the :LA:ACTive command.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :LA:DIGital:ENABle D3, ON                   /*Enables D3.*/
              :LA:DIGital:ENABle? D3                     /*The query returns 1.*/
3.13.6       :LA:DIGital:LABel
              Syntax
              :LA:DIGital:LABel <digital>,<label>
              :LA:DIGital:LABel? <digital>
              Description
              Sets or queries the label of the specified digital channel.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7| D8|
               <digital>         Discrete                                                 -
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
                                                   It can contain English letters and
               <label>           ASCII String      numbers, and also some                 -
                                                   symbols.
              Remarks
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
136
                                                                                        Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the label of the specified digital channel in ASCII strings.
                 Example
                 :LA:DIGital:LABel D0,ACK                /*Sets the label of D0 to ACK.*/
                 :LA:DIGital:LABel? D0                  /*The query returns ACK.*/
3.13.7          :LA:POD<n>:DISPlay
                 Syntax
                 :LA:POD<n>:DISPlay <bool>
                 :LA:POD<n>:DISPlay?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the specified default channel group, or queries the on/off status
                 of the specified default channel group.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <n>                 Integer             1 to 2                         -
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}               0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 2 default channel groups: POD1 (D0 to D7) or POD2 (D8 to D15).
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :LA:POD1:DISPlay ON                      /*Enables POD1.*/
                 :LA:POD1:DISPlay?                        /*The query returns 1.*/
3.13.8          :LA:POD<n>:THReshold
                 Syntax
                 :LA:POD<n>:THReshold <thre>
                 :LA:POD<n>:THReshold?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the threshold of the specified default channel group. The default unit
                 is V.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     137
Command System
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
               <n>              Integer           1 to 2                                 -
               <thre>           Real              -20.0V to +20.0V                       1.40V
              Remarks
              2 default channel groups: POD1 (D0 to D7) or POD2 (D8 to D15).
              Return Format
              The query returns the current threshold of the specified channel group in scientific
              notation.
              Example
              :LA:POD1:THReshold 3.3    /*Sets the threshold of the channel group
              POD1 (D0 to D3) to 3.3 V.*/
              :LA:POD1:THReshold?      /*The query returns 3.3E+00.*/
3.13.9       :LA:SIZE
              Syntax
              :LA:SIZE <size>
              :LA:SIZE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the size of the waveforms of the enabled channel on the screen.
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
               <size>           Discrete          {SMALl|LARGe|MEDium}                   MEDium
              Remarks
              L (large) can only be used when the number of the currently enabled channels is no
              more than 8.
              Return Format
              The query returns SMAL, LARG, or MED.
              Example
              :LA:SIZE SMALl        /*Sets the waveform display size to SMALl.*/
              :LA:SIZE?             /*The query returns SMAL.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
138
                                                                                         Command System
3.14            :LAN Commands
                 The :LAN commands are used to set or query the LAN-related parameters.
                 NOTE
                 After configuring all the other :LAN commands, you need to send :LAN:APPLy to make all the
                 LAN configurations take effect.
3.14.1          :LAN:DHCP
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:DHCP <bool>
                 :LAN:DHCP?
                 Description
                 Turns on or off the DHCP configuration mode; or queries the on/off status of the
                 current DHCP configuration mode.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                 1|ON
                 Remarks
                 •     When the three IP configuration types (DHCP, Auto IP, and Static IP) are all
                       turned on, the priority of the parameter configuration from high to low is
                       "DHCP", "Auto IP", and "Static IP". The three IP configuration types cannot be all
                       turned off at the same time.
                 •     When DHPC is valid, the DHCP server in the current network will assign the
                       network parameters (such as the IP address) for the oscilloscope.
                 •     After the :LAN:APPLy command is executed, the configuration type can take
                       effect immediately.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :LAN:DHCP OFF                /*Disables DHCP configuration mode.*/
                 :LAN:DHCP?                   /*The query returns 0.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                         139
Command System
3.14.2       :LAN:AUToip
              Syntax
              :LAN:AUToip <bool>
              :LAN:AUToip?
              Description
              Turns on or off the Auto IP configuration mode; or queries the on/off status of the
              current Auto IP configuration mode.
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
               <bool>           Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       1|ON
              Remarks
              When the auto IP mode is valid, disable DHCP manually. You can self-define the
              gateway and DNS address for the oscilloscope.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :LAN:AUToip OFF                  /*Disables the Auto IP configuration
              mode.*/
              :LAN:AUToip?                     /*The query returns 0.*/
3.14.3       :LAN:GATeway
              Syntax
              :LAN:GATeway <string>
              :LAN:GATeway?
              Description
              Sets or queries the default gateway.
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
               <string>         ASCII String      Refer to Remarks                       -
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
140
                                                                                       Command System
                 Remarks
                 •      The format of <string> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first section of
                        "nnn" is from 0 to 223 (except 127), and the ranges of the other three sections of
                        "nnn" are from 0 to 255.
                 •      When you use this command, the IP configuration mode should be Auto IP or
                        Static IP mode.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the current gateway in strings.
                 Example
                 :LAN:GATeway 192.168.1.1                         /*Sets the default gateway to
                 192.168.1.1.*/
                 :LAN:GATeway?                                 /*The query returns 192.168.1.1.*/
3.14.4          :LAN:DNS
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:DNS <string>
                 :LAN:DNS?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the DNS address.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <string>         ASCII String        Refer to Remarks               -
                 Remarks
                 •      The format of <string> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first section of
                        "nnn" is from 0 to 223 (except 127), and the ranges of the other three sections of
                        "nnn" are from 0 to 255.
                 •      When you use this command, the IP configuration mode should be Auto IP or
                        Static IP mode.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the current DNS address in strings.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       141
Command System
              Example
              :LAN:DNS 192.168.1.1                 /*Sets the DNS address to
              192.168.1.1.*/
              :LAN:DNS?                           /*The query returns 192.168.1.1.*/
3.14.5       :LAN:MAC?
              Syntax
              :LAN:MAC?
              Description
              Queries the MAC address of the instrument.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the MAC address in strings. For example, 00:19:AF:00:11:22.
              Example
              N/A
3.14.6       :LAN:DSERver?
              Syntax
              :LAN:DSERver?
              Description
              Queries the address of the DHCP server.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the address of the DHCP server in strings.
              Example
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
142
                                                                                      Command System
3.14.7          :LAN:MANual
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:MANual <bool>
                 :LAN:MANual?
                 Description
                 Turns on or off the static IP configuration mode; or queries the on/off status of the
                 static IP configuration mode.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}               0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 When the static IP mode is valid, disable DHCP and Auto IP manually. You can self-
                 define the network parameters of the oscilloscope, such as IP address, subnet mask,
                 gateway, and DNS address. For the setting of the IP address, refer to
                 the :LAN:IPADdress command. For the setting of the subnet mask, refer to
                 the :LAN:SMASk command. For the setting of the gateway, refer to the :LAN:GATeway
                 command. For the setting of DNS, refer to the :LAN:DNS command.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :LAN:MANual ON               /*Enables the static IP configuration mode.*/
                 :LAN:MANual?                    /*The query returns 1.*/
3.14.8          :LAN:IPADdress
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:IPADdress <string>
                 :LAN:IPADdress?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the IP address of the instrument.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <string>            ASCII String        Refer to Remarks               -
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                         143
Command System
              Remarks
              •      The format of <string> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first section of
                     "nnn" is from 0 to 223 (except 127), and the ranges of the other three sections of
                     "nnn" are from 0 to 255.
              •      When you use the command, the IP configuration mode should be static IP.
                     Besides, the DHCP and auto IP should be disabled.
              Return Format
              The query returns the current IP address in strings.
              Example
              :LAN:IPADdress 192.168.1.10     /*Sets the IP address to
              192.168.1.10.*/
              :LAN:IPADdress?           /*The query returns 192.168.1.10.*/
3.14.9       :LAN:SMASk
              Syntax
              :LAN:SMASk <string>
              :LAN:SMASk?
              Description
              Sets or queries the subnet mask.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                  Default
                  <string>        ASCII String      Refer to Remarks                       -
              Remarks
              •      The format of <string> is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the section "nnn" is
                     from 0 to 255.
              •      When you use the command, the IP configuration mode should be static IP.
                     Besides, the DHCP and auto IP should be disabled.
              Return Format
              The query returns the current subnet mask in strings.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
144
                                                                                  Command System
                 Example
                 :LAN:SMASk 255.255.255.0     /*Sets the subnet mask to
                 255.255.255.0.*/
                 :LAN:SMASk?      /*The query returns 255.255.255.0.*/
3.14.10         :LAN:STATus?
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:STATus?
                 Description
                 Queries the current network configuration status.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 •     UNLINK: not connected.
                 •     CONNECTED: the network is successfully connected.
                 •     INIT: the instrument is acquiring an IP address.
                 •     IPCONFLICT: there is an IP address conflict.
                 •     BUSY: please wait…
                 •     CONFIGURED: the network configuration has been successfully configured.
                 •     DHCPFAILED: the DHCP configuration has failed.
                 •     INVALIDIP: invalid IP.
                 •     IPLOSE: IP lost.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns UNLINK, CONNECTED, INIT, IPCONFLICT, BUSY, CONFIGURED,
                 DHCPFAILED, INVALIDIP, or IPLOSE.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.14.11         :LAN:VISA?
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:VISA? [<type>]
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.               DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                Guide
                                                                                                 145
Command System
              Description
              Queries the VISA address of the instrument.
              Parameter
               Name              Type               Range                                  Default
               <type>            Discrete           {USB|LXI|SOCKet}                       -
              Remarks
              This command contains a parameter "type" and it is used to set or query the address
              type. By default, it returns the LXI address.
              Return Format
              The query returns the VISA address in strings.
              Example
              N/A
3.14.12      :LAN:MDNS
              Syntax
              :LAN:MDNS <bool>
              :LAN:MDNS?
              Description
              Enables or disables mDNS; or queries the mDNS status.
              Parameter
               Name              Type               Range                                  Default
               <bool>            Bool               {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :LAN:MDNS ON                            /*Enables mDNS.*/
              :LAN:MDNS?                              /*The query returns 1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
146
                                                                                            Command System
3.14.13         :LAN:HOST:NAME
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:HOST:NAME <name>
                 :LAN:HOST:NAME?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the host name.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                                                          The label can contain English
                  <name>              ASCII String        letters and numbers, as well as    -
                                                          some symbols.
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the host name in ASCII strings.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.14.14         :LAN:DESCription
                 Syntax
                 :LAN:DESCription <name>
                 :LAN:DESCription?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the description.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                                                          The label can contain English
                  <name>              ASCII String        letters and numbers, as well as    -
                                                          some symbols.
                 Remarks
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                        147
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns the description in ASCII strings.
              Example
              N/A
3.14.15      :LAN:APPLy
              Syntax
              :LAN:APPLy
              Description
              Applies the network configuration.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              After configuring all the LAN-related parameters with the :LAN commands, you need
              to send this command to make all the LAN configurations take effect.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.15         :MASK Commands
              :MASK commands are used to set or query the pass/fail test related parameters.
              During the product design and manufacturing process, you usually need to monitor
              the variations of the signal or judge whether the product is up to standard. The
              standard pass/fail test function of this series oscilloscope can accomplish this task
              perfectly. You can use this function to set the test rules based on standard waveforms
              and define the mask. It compares the signal under test with the mask and displays the
              test results.
3.15.1       :MASK:ENABle
              Syntax
              :MASK:ENABle <bool>
              :MASK:ENABle?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
148
                                                                                        Command System
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the pass/fail test function; or queries the on/off status of the pass/
                 fail test function.
                 Parameter
                     Name              Type               Range                          Default
                     <bool>            Bool               {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}               0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 The pass/fail test is disabled in the following conditions:
                 •     When the horizontal time base is in ROLL mode; (to set or query the horizontal
                       time base mode, run :TIMebase:MODE.)
                 •     When the delayed sweep mode (Zoom) is enabled; (to set or query the on/off
                       status of the delayed sweep, run :TIMebase:DELay:ENABle.)
                 •     When performing the waveform recording and playing.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :MASK:ENABle ON              /*Enables the pass/fail test function.*/
                 :MASK:ENABle?                /*The query returns 1.*/
3.15.2          :MASK:SOURce
                 Syntax
                 :MASK:SOURce <source>
                 :MASK:SOURce?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the source of the pass/fail test.
                 Parameter
                     Name              Type               Range                          Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                     <source>          Discrete                                          CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       149
Command System
              Remarks
              When you use the command to set the disabled channel, the disabled channel will be
              enabled automatically.
              Return Format
              The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
              Example
              :MASK:SOURce CHANnel2            /*Sets the source of the pass/fail test to
              CHANnel2.*/
              :MASK:SOURce?                      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.15.3       :MASK:OPERate
              Syntax
              :MASK:OPERate <oper>
              :MASK:OPERate?
              Description
              Starts or stops the pass/fail test; or queries the operating status of the pass/fail test.
              Parameter
               Name                 Type            Range                                  Default
               <oper>               Discrete        {RUN|STOP}                             STOP
              Remarks
              Before running this command, send the :MASK:ENABle command to enable the pass/
              fail test function.
              Return Format
              The query returns RUN or STOP.
              Example
              :MASK:OPERate RUN            /*Starts the pass/fail test.*/
              :MASK:OPERate?                /*The query returns RUN.*/
3.15.4       :MASK:X
              Syntax
              :MASK:X <x>
              :MASK:X?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
150
                                                                                      Command System
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the horizontal adjustment parameter of the pass/fail test mask. The
                 default unit is div.
                 Parameter
                  Name                  Type              Range                        Default
                  <x>                   Real              0.01 div to 2 div            0.24 div
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the current horizontal adjustment parameter in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MASK:X 0.28           /*Sets the horizontal adjustment parameter to 0.28
                 div.*/
                 :MASK:X?               /*The query returns 2.800000E-1.*/
3.15.5          :MASK:Y
                 Syntax
                 :MASK:Y <y>
                 :MASK:Y?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the vertical adjustment parameter of the pass/fail test mask. The
                 default unit is div.
                 Parameter
                  Name                  Type              Range                        Default
                  <y>                   Real              0.04 div to 2 div            0.48 div
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the current vertical adjustment parameter in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MASK:Y 0.36           /*Sets the vertical adjustment parameter to 0.36
                 div.*/
                 :MASK:Y?               /*The query returns 3.600000E-1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                       151
Command System
3.15.6       :MASK:CREate
              Syntax
              :MASK:CREate
              Description
              Creates the pass/fail test mask with the currently set horizontal and vertical
              adjustment parameters.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              •     This command is only valid when the pass/fail test function is enabled and not in
                    the running state. You can use :MASK:ENABle to query or set the status of the
                    pass/fail test function. You can use :MASK:OPERate to query or set the running
                    status.
              •     You can use :MASK:X and :MASK:Y to query or set the horizontal and vertical
                    adjustment parameters.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.15.7       :MASK:RESet
              Syntax
              :MASK:RESet
              Description
              Resets the number of frames that passed and failed the pass/fail test, as well as the
              total number of frames.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
152
                                                                                        Command System
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.15.8          :MASK:FAILed?
                 Syntax
                 :MASK:FAILed?
                 Description
                 Queries the total number of failed frames in the pass/fail test results.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.15.9          :MASK:PASSed?
                 Syntax
                 :MASK:PASSed?
                 Description
                 Queries the total number of passed frames in the pass/fail test results.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      153
Command System
              Example
              N/A
3.15.10      :MASK:TOTal?
              Syntax
              :MASK:TOTal?
              Description
              Queries the total number of frames in the pass/fail test results.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer.
              Example
              N/A
3.15.11      :MASK:OUTPut:ENABle
              Syntax
              :MASK:OUTPut:ENABle <bool>
              :MASK:OUTPut:ENABle?
              Description
              Sets or queries the output on/off status of the rear-panel [AUX OUT] connector.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <bool>         Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              •     If enabled, in the Utility menu, "AUX Out" is automatically set to "PassFail". When
                    a successful or failed event is detected, a pulse will be output from the [AUX
                    OUT] connector.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
154
                                                                                        Command System
                 •     If disabled, in the Utility menu, "AUX Out" is automatically set to "TrigOut". The
                       output of the [AUX OUT] connector is irrelevant with the pass/fail test.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :MASK:OUTPut:ENABle ON                /*Enables the Aux output.*/
                 :MASK:OUTPut:ENABle?                  /*The query returns 1.*/
3.15.12         :MASK:OUTPut:EVENt
                 Syntax
                 :MASK:OUTPut:EVENt <item>
                 :MASK:OUTPut:EVENt?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the output event.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <item>           Discrete            {FAIL|PASS}                     FAIL
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns FAIL or PASS.
                 Example
                 :MASK:OUTPut:EVENt PASS /*Sets the output event to PASS.*/
                 :MASK:OUTPut:EVENt? /*The query returns PASS.*/
3.15.13         :MASK:OUTPut:TIME
                 Syntax
                 :MASK:OUTPut:TIME <time>
                 :MASK:OUTPut:TIME?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the output pulse time.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        155
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name              Type               Range                                   Default
                  <time>            Real               100 ns to 10 ms                         1 μs
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the pulse time in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MASK:OUTPut:TIME 0.000003 /*Sets the pulse time to 3 μs.*/
              :MASK:OUTPut:TIME? /*The query returns 3.000000E-6.*/
3.16         :MATH<n> Commands
              :MATH<n> commands are used to set various math operation function of the
              waveform between channels.
              This series oscilloscopes can realize multiple math operations between waveforms of
              different channels, including arithmetic operation, function operation, FFT operation,
              logic operation, and digital filter.
              Operator
              Arithmetic Operation
              The arithmetic operations supported by this oscilloscope include A+B, A-B, A×B, and
              A÷B.
              •      A+B adds the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point
                     and displays the results.
              •      A-B subtracts the waveform voltage values of signal source B from that of source
                     A point by point and displays the results.
              •      A×B multiplies the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by
                     point and displays the results.
              •      A÷B divides the waveform voltage values of signal source A by that of source B
                     point by point and displays the results. It can be used to analyze the Multiple
                     relation of the two channels waveforms. When the voltage of signal source B is 0
                     V, the division result is treated as 0.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                              Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
156
                                                                                         Command System
                 Function Operation
                 The available function operation types of this oscilloscope include Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg
                 (Base 10 Exponential), Ln, Exp, Abs, and AX+B.
                 •     Intg: calculates the integral of the selected source. For example, you can use
                       integral to measure the area under a waveform or the pulse energy.
                 •     Diff: calculates the discrete time derivative of the selected source. For example,
                       you can use differentiate to measure the instantaneous slope of a waveform.
                 •     Sqrt: calculates the square roots of the selected source point by point and
                       displays the results.
                 •     Lg (Base 10 Exponential): calculates the base 10 exponential of the selected
                       source point by point and displays the results.
                 •     Ln: calculates the natural logarithm (Ln) of the selected source point by point
                       and displays the results.
                 •     Exp: calculates the exponential of the selected source point by point and
                       displays the results.
                 •     Abs: calculates the absolute value of the selected source and displays the results.
                 •     AX+B: applies a linear function to the selected source, and displays the results.
                 FFT Operation
                 FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is used to transform time-domain signals to frequency-
                 domain components (frequency spectrum). This oscilloscope provides FFT operation
                 function which enables you to observe the time-domain waveform and spectrum of
                 the signal at the same time. FFT operation can facilitate the following works:
                 •     Measure harmonic components and distortion in the system;
                 •     Display the characteristics of the noise in DC power;
                 •     Analyze vibration.
                Table 3.161 Window Function
                 Window                                        Waveforms Applicable to the Window
                                  Characteristics
                 Function                                      Function
                                                               Transient or short pulse, the signal levels
                 Rectangular      Best frequency resolution    before and after the multiplication are
                                                               basically the same
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         157
Command System
              Window                                        Waveforms Applicable to the Window
                            Characteristics
              Function                                      Function
                            Poorest amplitude               Sine waveforms with the same
                            resolution                      amplitudes and rather similar frequencies
                            Similar to the situation        Wide band random noise with relatively
                            when no window is applied slow change of waveform spectrum
                            Best amplitude resolution
              Blackman-                                     Single frequency signal, searching for
              Harris        Poorest frequency               higher order harmonics
                            resolution
                            Better frequency resolution
                            and poorer amplitude            Sine, periodic, and narrow band random
              Hanning
                            resolution compared with        noise
                            Rectangular
                                                            Transient or short pulse, the signal levels
                            A little bit better frequency
              Hamming                                       before and after the multiplication are
                            resolution than Hanning
                                                            rather different
                                                            Measure the signal that has no accurate
                            Measure the signals
              Flattop                                       reference and requires an accurate
                            accurately
                                                            measurement
                                                            Measure the narrow band signal and that
              Triangle      Better frequency resolution
                                                            has strong noise interference
              Spectral leakage can be considerably minimized when a window function is used. The
              oscilloscope provides 6 FFT window functions which have different characteristics and
              are applicable to measure different waveforms, as shown in the table below. You need
              to select the window function according to the characteristics of the waveform to be
              measured.
              Logic Operation
              The logic operations supported by this oscilloscope include A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A.
              The results of logic operation of one binary bit are shown in the table below:
             Table 3.162 Logic Operation Results
              A             B              A&&B             A||B            A^B              !A
              0             0              0                0               0                1
              0             1              0                1               1                1
              1             0              0                1               1                0
              1             1              1                1               0                0
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
158
                                                                                        Command System
                 Digital Filter
                 The digital filters supported by this oscilloscope include: low-pass filter, high-pass
                 filter, band-pass filter, and band-stop filter.
                 •     LowPass only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current
                       upper limit frequency to pass.
                 •     HighPass only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current
                       lower limit frequency to pass.
                 •     BandPass only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current
                       lower limit frequency and lower than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
                 •     BandStop only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current
                       lower limit frequency or higher than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
3.16.1          :MATH<n>:DISPlay
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:DISPlay <bool>
                 :MATH<n>:DISPlay?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the math operation function; or queries the on/off status of the
                 math operation function.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:DISPlay ON             /*Enables the math operation of Math1.*/
                 :MATH1:DISPlay?               /*The query returns 1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                          159
Command System
3.16.2       :MATH<n>:OPERator
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:OPERator <opt>
              :MATH<n>:OPERator?
              Description
              Sets or queries the operator of math operation.
              Parameter
               Name                Type          Range                                   Default
               <n>                 Discrete      {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                 {ADD|SUBTract|MULTiply|
                                                 DIVision|AND|OR|XOR|NOT|FFT|
               <opt>               Discrete                                              ADD
                                                 INTG|DIFF|SQRT|LG|LN|EXP|ABS|
                                                 LPASs|HPASs|BPASs|BSTop|AXB}
              Remarks
              The math operation supported include A+B (ADD), A-B (SUBTract), A×B (MULTiply),
              A÷B (DIVision), AND, OR, XOR, NOT, FFT, INTG, DIFF, SQRT, LG (Base 10 Exponential),
              natural logarithm (LN), EXP, ABS, LPASs, HPASs, BPASs, BSTop, and AXB. For details,
              refer to Operator.
              Return Format
              The query returns ADD, SUBT, MULT, DIV, AND, OR, XOR, NOT, FFT, INTG, DIFF, SQRT, ,
              LG, LN, EXP, ABS, LPAS, HPAS, BPAS, BST, or AXB.
              Example
              :MATH1:OPERator INTG /*Sets the math operator of Math1 to INTG.*/
              :MATH1:OPERator?        /*The query returns INTG.*/
3.16.3       :MATH<n>:SOURce1
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:SOURce1 <source>
              :MATH<n>:SOURce1?
              Description
              Sets or queries the source or Source A of arithmetic operation/function operation/
              filter operation.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
160
                                                                                         Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|REF1|
                     <source>         Discrete            REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7| CHANnel1
                                                          REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1|
                                                          MATH2|MATH3}
                 Remarks
                 •     When n = 1, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                       CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10}.
                 •     When n = 2, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                       CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1}.
                 •     When n = 3, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                       CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1|
                       MATH2}.
                 •     When n = 4, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                       CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1|
                       MATH2|MATH3}.
                 •     For arithmetic operation, this command is used to set Source A.
                 •     For function operation and filter operation, only use this command to set the
                       source.
                 •     For detailed operations, refer to the descriptions in Operator.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, REF1,
                 REF2, REF3, REF4, REF5, REF6, REF7, REF8, REF9, or REF10.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:SOURce1 CHANnel3               /*Sets Source A of the arithmetic
                 operation to CHANnel3.*/
                 :MATH1:SOURce1?                       /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       161
Command System
3.16.4       :MATH<n>:SOURce2
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:SOURce2 <source>
              :MATH<n>:SOURce2?
              Description
              Sets or queries Source B of arithmetic operation.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <n>            Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                              -
                                                  {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                                                  CHANnel3|CHANnel4|REF1|
                  <source>       Discrete         REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7| CHANnel1
                                                  REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1|
                                                  MATH2|MATH3}
              Remarks
              This command is only available for arithmetic operation (containing two sources). For
              detailed operations, refer to the descriptions in Operator.
              •     When n = 1, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                    CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10}.
              •     When n = 2, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                    CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1}.
              •     When n = 3, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                    CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1|
                    MATH2}.
              •     When n = 4, the range of the parameter is {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                    CHANnel4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|REF5|REF6|REF7|REF8|REF9|REF10|MATH1|
                    MATH2|MATH3}.
              Return Format
              The query returns MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, REF1,
              REF2, REF3, REF4, REF5, REF6, REF7, REF8, REF9, or REF10.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
162
                                                                                         Command System
                 Example
                 :MATH1:SOURce2 CHANnel3               /*Sets Source B of the arithmetic
                 operation to CHANnel3.*/
                 :MATH1:SOURce2?                       /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
3.16.5          :MATH<n>:LSOurce1
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:LSOurce1 <source>
                 :MATH<n>:LSOurce1?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries Source A of the logic operation.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
                 Remarks
                 The logic operations include A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A.
                 Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                 D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:LSOurce1 CHANnel3               /*Sets Source A of the logic operation
                 to CHANnel3.*/
                 :MATH1:LSOurce1?                       /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
3.16.6          :MATH<n>:LSOurce2
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:LSOurce2 <source>
                 :MATH<n>:LSOurce2?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      163
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries Source B of the logic operation.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                  <n>             Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>        Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                                                   CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
              Remarks
              •     The logic operations include A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A.
              •     This command is only available for the logic operation that contains two sources.
                    It is used to set Source B.
              •     Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
              Return Format
              The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
              D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
              Example
              :MATH1:LSOurce2 CHANnel4            /*Sets Source B of the logic operation
              to CHANnel4.*/
              :MATH1:LSOurce2?                    /*The query returns CHAN4.*/
3.16.7       :MATH<n>:SCALe
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:SCALe <scale>
              :MATH<n>:SCALe?
              Description
              Sets or queries the vertical scale of the operation results. The unit is related to the
              currently selected operator and the unit selected by the source.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                  <n>             Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
164
                                                                                          Command System
                     Name             Type                Range                             Default
                     <scale>          Real                Refer to Remarks                  -
                 Remarks
                 •      The setting range of the vertical scale is related to the currently selected
                        operator and the scale of the source channel. For integration and differentiation
                        operations, the actual range of <scale> is also related to the current horizontal
                        time base.
                 •      This command is invalid for logic operation and FFT operation.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the vertical scale of the current operation results in scientific
                 notation.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:SCALe 0.2    /*Sets the vertical scale to 200 mV.*/
                 :MATH1:SCALe?    /*The query returns 2.000000E-1.*/
3.16.8          :MATH<n>:OFFSet
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:OFFSet <offset>
                 :MATH<n>:OFFSet?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the vertical offset of the operation results. The unit is related to the
                 currently selected operator and the unit selected by the source.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                             Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                         -
                     <offset>         Real                -1 GV to +1 GV                    0.00 V
                 Remarks
                 This command is invalid for logic operation and FFT operation.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the vertical offset of the current operation results in scientific
                 notation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                            165
Command System
              Example
              :MATH1:OFFSet 8        /*Sets the vertical offset to 8 V.*/
              :MATH1:OFFSet?            /*The query returns 8.000000E0.*/
3.16.9       :MATH<n>:INVert
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:INVert <bool>
              :MATH<n>:INVert?
              Description
              Enables or disables the inverted display of the operation results; or queries the on/off
              status of the inverted display of the operation results.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <n>               Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              This command is invalid for FFT operation and logical operation.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :MATH1:INVert ON            /*Enables the inverted display.*/
              :MATH1:INVert?              /*The query returns 1.*/
3.16.10      :MATH<n>:RESet
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:RESet
              Description
              After you send this command, the instrument will adjust the vertical scale of the
              operation results to an optimal value based on the currently selected operator and
              the horizontal time base of the source.
              Parameter
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
166
                                                                                       Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.16.11         :MATH<n>:GRID
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:GRID <grid>
                 :MATH<n>:GRID?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the grid type of the math operation display.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <grid>           Discrete            {FULL|HALF|NONE}               -
                 Remarks
                 •      FULL: turns the background grid and coordinates on.
                 •      HALF: turns the background grid off and turns the coordinate on.
                 •      NONE: turns the background grid and coordinate off.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns FULL, HALF, or NONE.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:GRID NONE /*Turns the background grid and coordinates off.*/
                 :MATH1:GRID? /*The query returns NONE.*/
3.16.12         :MATH<n>:EXPand
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:EXPand <exp>
                 :MATH<n>:EXPand?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      167
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries the vertical expansion type of math operation.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type            Range                                   Default
                  <n>            Discrete        {1|2|3|4}                               -
                  <exp>          Discrete        {GND|CENTer}                            GND
              Remarks
              •     CENTer: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
                    compressed around the screen center.
              •     GND: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
                    compressed around the signal ground level position.
              Return Format
              The query returns GND or CENTer.
              Example
              :MATH1:EXPand CENTer /*Sets the vertical expansion type of math
              operation of CH1 to CENTer.*/
              :MATH1:EXPand? /*The query returns CENTer.*/
3.16.13      :MATH<n>:WAVetype
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:MATH<n>:WAVetype <type>
              :MATH<n>:WAVetype?
              Description
              Sets or queries the waveform type of math operation.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type            Range                                   Default
                  <n>            Discrete        {1|2|3|4}                               -
                  <type>         Discrete        {MAIN|ZOOM}                             MAIN
              Remarks
              •     MAIN: indicates the main time base region.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
168
                                                                                       Command System
                 •     ZOOM: indicates the zoomed time base region.
                       Only when the zoom function is enabled, can the Zoom waveform type be
                       enabled. Zoom is not supported for the FFT operation.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns MAIN or ZOOM.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:WAVetype ZOOM /*Sets the waveform type of math operation to
                 ZOOM.*/
                 :MATH1:WAVetype? /*The query returns ZOOM.*/
3.16.14         :MATH<n>:FFT:SOURce
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SOURce <source>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SOURce?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the channel source of FFT operation.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                      -
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                     <source>         Discrete                                           CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:FFT:SOURce CHANnel3     /*Sets the channel source of FFT
                 operation to CHANnel3.*/
                 :MATH1:FFT:SOURce?       /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
3.16.15         :MATH<n>:FFT:WINDow
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:WINDow <window>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      169
Command System
              :MATH<n>:FFT:WINDow?
              Description
              Sets or queries the window function of FFT operation.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <n>            Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
                                                   {RECTangle|BLACkman|
                  <window>       Discrete          HANNing|HAMMing|FLATtop|               HANNing
                                                   TRIangle}
              Remarks
              •     Spectral leakage can be considerably minimized when a window function is
                    used.
              •     Different window functions are applicable to measurements of different
                    waveforms. You need to select the window function according to the different
                    waveforms to be measured and their characteristics. For the characteristics of the
                    window function and its applicable waveforms, refer to Table 3.161 Window
                    Function .
              Return Format
              The query returns RECT, BLAC, HANN, HAMM, FLAT, or TRI.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:WINDow BLACkman    /*Sets the window function of FFT
              operation to Blackman-Harris.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:WINDow?              /*The query returns BLAC.*/
3.16.16      :MATH<n>:FFT:UNIT
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:FFT:UNIT <unit>
              :MATH<n>:FFT:UNIT?
              Description
              Sets or queries the vertical unit of FFT operation results.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
170
                                                                                         Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                     <unit>           Discrete            {VRMS|DB}                        DB
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns VRMS or DB.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:FFT:UNIT VRMS                  /*Sets the vertical unit of FFT operation
                 results to Vrms.*/
                 :MATH1:FFT:UNIT?                       /*The query returns VRMS.*/
3.16.17         :MATH<n>:FFT:SCALe
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SCALe <scale>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SCALe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the vertical unit of FFT operation results.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                     <scale>          Real                Refer to Remarks                 -
                 Remarks
                 •       When the unit is set to dBm/dBV, the range of <scale> is from 1.0E-9dB to 5
                         GdB. The default value is 2.0 dB.
                 •       When the unit is set to Vrms, the range of <scale> is from 1.00 nVrms to 5.00
                         GVrms. The default value is 500.00 μVrms.
                 You can run the :MATH<n>:FFT:UNIT command to configure or query the current
                 unit.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                         171
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns the current vertical scale in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:SCALe 0.3    /*Sets the vertical scale of the FFT
              operation results to 300 mdB.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:SCALe?          /*The query returns 3.000000E-1.*/
3.16.18      :MATH<n>:FFT:OFFSet
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:FFT:OFFSet <offset>
              :MATH<n>:FFT:OFFSet?
              Description
              Sets or queries the vertical offset of FFT operation results.
              Parameter
                  Name              Type             Range                                   Default
                  <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                  <offset>          Real             Refer to Remarks                        0 dB
              Remarks
              •       When the unit is set to dBm/dBV, the range of <offset> is from -1.00G dBV to
                      1.00 GdBV. The default value is 0.0 dBV.
              •       When the unit is set to Vrms, the range of <offset> is from -1.00 GVrms to 1.00
                      GVrms. The default value is 0.00 Vrms.
              You can run the :MATH<n>:FFT:UNIT command to configure or query the current
              unit.
              Return Format
              The query returns the current vertical offset in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:OFFSet 0.3    /*Sets the vertical offset of the FFT
              operation results to 300 mdB.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:OFFSet?          /*The query returns 3.000000E-1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
172
                                                                                         Command System
3.16.19         :MATH<n>:FFT:HSCale
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:HSCale <hsc>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:HSCale?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the frequency range of FFT operation results. The default unit is Hz.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <hsc>               Real                10 Hz to 1 GHz                  1 MHz
                 Remarks
                 You can reduce the frequency range to observe the details of the spectrum.
                 Modifying the frequency range of the FFT operation results will affect the value of the
                 center frequency. You can run the :MATH<n>:FFT:HCENter command to query or
                 modify the center frequency.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the current frequency range in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:FFT:HSCale 500000    /*Sets the frequency range of the FFT
                 operation results to 500 kHz.*/
                 :MATH1:FFT:HSCale?          /*The query returns 5.000000E+5.*/
3.16.20         :MATH<n>:FFT:HCENter
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:HCENter <cent>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:HCENter?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the center frequency of FFT operation results, that is, the frequency
                 relative to the horizontal center of the screen.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                         173
Command System
               Name              Type             Range                                   Default
               <cent>            Real             5 Hz to 1GHz                            1 MHz
              Remarks
              Modifying the center frequency of the FFT operation results will affect the value of the
              frequency range. You can run the :MATH<n>:FFT:HSCale command to query or
              modify the frequency range.
              Return Format
              The query returns the current center frequency in scientific notation. The unit is Hz.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:HCENter 10000000    /*Sets the center frequency of the
              FFT operation results to 10 MHz.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:HCENter?          /*The query returns 1.000000E+7.*/
3.16.21      :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:STARt
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:STARt <value>
              :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:STARt?
              Description
              Sets or queries the start frequency of FFT operation results.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                   Default
               <n>               Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
               <value>           Real             0 Hz to (stop frequency -10 Hz)         1 Hz
              Remarks
              The range of the start frequency of FFT operation is related to the stop frequency. You
              can run the :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:END command to query or configure the stop
              frequency.
              Return Format
              The query returns the start frequency of the operation results in scientific notation.
              The unit is Hz.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:FREQuency:STARt 10000000    /*Sets the start frequency of
              the FFT operation results to 10 MHz.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
174
                                                                                          Command System
                 :MATH1:FFT:FREQuency:STARt?                          /*The query returns 1.000000E
                 +7.*/
3.16.22         :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:END
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:END <value>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:END?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the stop frequency of FFT operation results.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                  <value>             Real                (Start Freq + 10 Hz) to 1 GHz    10 MHz
                 Remarks
                 The range of the stop frequency of FFT operation is related to the start frequency. You
                 can run the :MATH<n>:FFT:FREQuency:STARt command to query or configure the
                 start frequency.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the stop frequency of the operation results in scientific notation.
                 The unit is Hz.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:FFT:FREQuency:END 10000000    /*Sets the stop frequency of
                 the FFT operation results to 10 MHz.*/
                 :MATH1:FFT:FREQuency:END?          /*The query returns 1.000000E
                 +7.*/
3.16.23         :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ENABle <bool>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the FFT peak search; or queries the on/off status of the FFT peak
                 search function.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                         175
Command System
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
               <n>              Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <bool>           Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:ENABle ON              /*Enables the FFT peak search.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:ENABle?                   /*The query returns 1.*/
3.16.24      :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:NUM
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:NUM <num>
              :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:NUM?
              Description
              Sets or queries the maximum number of the FFT peak search.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
               <n>              Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <num>            Integer          1 to 15                                5
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 15.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:NUM 10                 /*Sets the maximum number of the
              FFT peak search to 10.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:NUM?                   /*The query returns 10.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
176
                                                                                             Command System
3.16.25         :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:THReshold
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:THReshold <thres>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:THReshold?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the threshold of the FFT peak search.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                               Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                           -
                                                          Related to the vertical scale and
                  <thres>             Real                                                    -
                                                          vertical offset of FFT operation
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the threshold in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:THReshold 0.5                         /*Sets the threshold of the
                 FFT peak search to 500 mdB.*/
                 :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:THReshold?                           /*The query returns
                 5.000000E-1.*/
3.16.26         :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:EXCursion
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:EXCursion <excur>
                 :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:EXCursion?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the excursion of the FFT peak search.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                               Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                           -
                  <excur>             Real                0 to (8 x VerticalScale)            1.8 dB
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           177
Command System
              Remarks
              VerticalScale indicates the vertical scale of FFT.
              Return Format
              The query returns the excursion in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:EXCursion 0.5                       /*Sets the excursion of the
              FFT peak search to 500 mdB.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:EXCursion?                         /*The query returns
              5.000000E-1.*/
3.16.27      :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ORDer
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ORDer <order>
              :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:ORDer?
              Description
              Sets or queries the sequence of the FFT peak search results.
              Parameter
               Name              Type               Range                                  Default
               <n>               Discrete           {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <order>           Discrete           {AMPorder|FREQorder}                   AMPorder
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns AMP or FREQ.
              Example
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:ORDer AMPorder /*Sets the sequence of the FFT
              peak search results to AMPorder.*/
              :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:ORDer?           /*The query returns AMP.*/
3.16.28      :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:RES?
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:FFT:SEARch:RES?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
178
                                                                                         Command System
                 Description
                 Queries the FFT peak search results table.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the peak search results table in strings.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:FFT:SEARch:RES?    /*The query returns the peak search
                 results table in strings.*/
                 1,2.50000MHz,-24.98dBV
                 2,3.50000MHz,-27.84dBV
                 3,4.50000MHz,-30.04dBV
                 4,5.50125MHz,-31.5dBV
                 5,6.50125MHz,-32.34dBV
3.16.29         :MATH<n>:FILTer:TYPE
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FILTer:TYPE <type>
                 :MATH<n>:FILTer:TYPE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the filter type.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                  <type>              Discrete            {LPASs|HPASs|BPASs|BSTop}        LPASs
                 Remarks
                 The oscilloscope provides 4 practical filters (Low Pass Filter, High Pass Filter, Band Pass
                 Filter, and Band Stop Filter), which can filter the specified frequencies in the signal by
                 setting the bandwidth. You can use the :MATH<n>:FFT:SOURce command to set or
                 query the channel source of the filter.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                         179
Command System
              •     LPASs: indicates low pass filter, which only allows the signals whose frequencies
                    are smaller than the current cut-off frequency to pass.
              •     HPASs: indicates high pass filter, which only allows the signals whose
                    frequencies are greater than the current cut-off frequency to pass.
              •     BPASs: indicates band pass filter, which only allows the signals whose
                    frequencies are greater than the current cut-off frequency 1 and smaller than the
                    current cut-off frequency 2 to pass.
                    Note: The cut-off frequency 1 must be smaller than the cut-off frequency 2.
              •     BSTop: indicates band stop filter, which only allows the signals whose
                    frequencies are smaller than the current cut-off frequency 1 or greater than the
                    current cut-off frequency 2 to pass.
                    Note: The cut-off frequency 1 must be smaller than the cut-off frequency 2.
              Return Format
              The query returns LPAS, HPAS, BPAS, or BST.
              Example
              :MATH1:FILTer:TYPE LPASs            /*Sets the filter type to Low Pass
              Filter.*/
              :MATH1:FILTer:TYPE?                 /*The query returns LPAS.*/
3.16.30      :MATH<n>:FILTer:W1
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:FILTer:W1 <freq1>
              :MATH<n>:FILTer:W1?
              Description
              Sets or queries the cut-off frequency of Low Pass Filter/High Pass Filter; or the cut-off
              frequency 1 of Band Pass Filter/Band Stop Filter. The default unit is Hz.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <n>            Discrete          {1|2|3|4}                              -
                                                                                          Refer
                  <freq1>        Real              Refer toRemarks
                                                                                          toRemarks
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
180
                                                                                          Command System
                 Remarks
                 •     When the filter type is set to LPASs (Low Pass Filter) or HPASs (High Pass Filter),
                       you need to set one cut-off frequency.
                       At this time, the range of <freq1> is from (0.005 x screen sample rate) to (0.1 x
                       screen sample rate), at a step of (0.005 x screen sample rate). Wherein, screen
                       sample rate = 100/horizontal time base
                 •     When the filter type is set to BPASs (Band Pass Filter) or BSTop (Band Stop Filter),
                       you need to set two cut-off frequencies. The cut-off frequency 1 must be smaller
                       than the cut-off frequency 2. Run this command to set the cut-off frequency 1;
                       run the :MATH<n>:FILTer:W2 command to set the cut-off frequency 2.
                       At this time, the range of <freq1> is from (0.005×screen sample rate) to
                       (0.095×screen sample rate), at a step of (0.005×screen sample rate). Wherein,
                       screen sample rate = 100/horizontal time base
                 •     The default value of the parameter <freq1> is related to the filter type.
                       -     When the filter type is set to LPASs (Low Pass Filter), BPASs (Band Pass
                             Filter), or BSTop (Band Stop Filter), the default value of <freq1> is (0.005 x
                             screen sample rate).
                       -     When the filter type is set to HPASs (High Pass Filter), the default value of
                             <freq1> is (0.1 x screen sample rate).
                 •     To set or query the filter type, run the :MATH<n>:FILTer:TYPE command.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the current cut-off frequency or cut-off frequency 1 in scientific
                 notation.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:FILTer:W1 1000000                      /*Sets the cut-off frequency of Low
                 Pass Filter to 1 MHz.*/
                 :MATH1:FILTer:W1?                             /*The query returns +100000000000E
                 +06.*/
3.16.31         :MATH<n>:FILTer:W2
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:FILTer:W2 <freq2>
                 :MATH<n>:FILTer:W2?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                          181
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries the cut-off frequency 2 of Band Pass Filter/Band Stop Filter. The
              default unit is Hz.
              Parameter
               Name                 Type            Range                                  Default
               <n>                  Discrete        {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <freq2>              Real            Refer toRemarks                        0.1×screen
                                                                                           sample rate
              Remarks
              When the filter type is set to BPASs (Band Pass Filter) or BSTop (Band Stop Filter), you
              need to set two cut-off frequencies. The cut-off frequency 2 must be greater than the
              cut-off frequency 1. Run the :MATH<n>:FILTer:W1 command to set the cut-off
              frequency 1, and run this command to set the cut-off frequency 2.
              At this time, the range of <freq2> is from (0.01 x screen sample rate) to (0.1 x screen
              sample rate), at a step of (0.005 x screen sample rate). Wherein, screen sample rate =
              100/horizontal time base
              Return Format
              The query returns the current cut-off frequency 2 in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MATH1:FILTer:W2 1500000       /*Sets the cut-off frequency 2 of
              Band Pass Filter to 1.5 MHz.*/
              :MATH1:FILTer:W2?              /*The query returns 1.500000E+6.*/
3.16.32      :MATH<n>:SENSitivity
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:SENSitivity <sens>
              :MATH<n>:SENSitivity?
              Description
              Sets or queries the sensitivity of the logic operation. The default unit is div.
              Parameter
               Name                 Type            Range                                  Default
               <n>                  Discrete        {1|2|3|4}                              -
               <sens>               Real            100 mdiv to 1 div                      300 mdiv
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
182
                                                                                        Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the sensitivity of the logic operation in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:SENSitivity 0.2    /*Sets the sensitivity of the logic
                 operation to 0.2 div.*/
                 :MATH1:SENSitivity?     /*The query returns 2.000000E-1.*/
3.16.33         :MATH<n>:DISTance
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:DISTance <dist>
                 :MATH<n>:DISTance?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the smoothing window width of differential operation.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <n>                 Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                  <dist>              Integer             1 to 1,000                      -
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 1,000.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:DISTance 20    /*Sets the smoothing window width of
                 differential operation to 20.*/
                 :MATH1:DISTance?     /*The query returns 20.*/
3.16.34         :MATH<n>:THReshold1
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:THReshold1 <thre>
                 :MATH<n>:THReshold1?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      183
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries threshold level of Analog Channel 1 in the logic operation. The default
              unit is V.
              Parameter
                  Name             Type             Range                                   Default
                  <n>              Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                    (-4 × VerticalScale -
                                                    VerticalOffset)
                  <thre>           Real             to                                      0V
                                                    (4 × VerticalScale -
                                                    VerticalOffset)
              Remarks
              •      This command is only available for the logic operations A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A.
              •      VerticalScale indicates the vertical scale of Analog Channel 1. VerticalOffset
                     indicates the vertical offset of Analog Channel 1. The step value is
                     VerticalScale/10.
              Return Format
              The query returns the threshold level of of Analog Channel 1 in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MATH1:THReshold1 0.8   /*Sets the threshold level of Analog
              Channel 1 in logic operation to 800 mV.*/
              :MATH1:THReshold1?      /*The query returns 8.000000E-1.*/
3.16.35      :MATH<n>:THReshold2
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:THReshold2 <thre>
              :MATH<n>:THReshold2?
              Description
              Sets or queries threshold level of Analog Channel 2 in the logic operation. The default
              unit is V.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
184
                                                                                         Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                                                          (-4 × VerticalScale -
                                                          VerticalOffset)
                     <thre>           Real                to                               0V
                                                          (4 × VerticalScale -
                                                          VerticalOffset)
                 Remarks
                 •      This command is only available for the logic operations A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A.
                 •      VerticalScale indicates the vertical scale of Analog Channel 2. VerticalOffset
                        indicates the vertical offset of Analog Channel 2. The step value is
                        VerticalScale/10.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the threshold level of of Analog Channel 2 in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:THReshold2 0.8   /*Sets the threshold level of Analog
                 Channel 2 in logic operation to 800 mV.*/
                 :MATH1:THReshold2?      /*The query returns 8.000000E-1.*/
3.16.36         :MATH<n>:THReshold3
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:THReshold3 <thre>
                 :MATH<n>:THReshold3?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries threshold level of Analog Channel 3 in the logic operation. The default
                 unit is V.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                        -
                                                          (-4 × VerticalScale -
                     <thre>           Real                                                 0V
                                                          VerticalOffset)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                         185
Command System
                  Name             Type             Range                                   Default
                                                    to
                                                    (4 × VerticalScale -
                                                    VerticalOffset)
              Remarks
              •      This command is only available for the logic operations A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A.
              •      VerticalScale indicates the vertical scale of Analog Channel 3. VerticalOffset
                     indicates the vertical offset of Analog Channel 3. The step value is
                     VerticalScale/10.
              Return Format
              The query returns the threshold level of of Analog Channel 3 in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MATH1:THReshold3 0.8   /*Sets the threshold level of Analog
              Channel 3 in logic operation to 800 mV.*/
              :MATH1:THReshold3?      /*The query returns 8.000000E-1.*/
3.16.37      :MATH<n>:THReshold4
              Syntax
              :MATH<n>:THReshold4 <thre>
              :MATH<n>:THReshold4?
              Description
              Sets or queries threshold level of Analog Channel 4 in the logic operation. The default
              unit is V.
              Parameter
                  Name             Type             Range                                   Default
                  <n>              Discrete         {1|2|3|4}                               -
                                                    (-4 × VerticalScale -
                                                    VerticalOffset)
                  <thre>           Real             to                                      0V
                                                    (4 × VerticalScale -
                                                    VerticalOffset)
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
186
                                                                                        Command System
                 Remarks
                 •     This command is only available for the logic operations A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A.
                 •     VerticalScale indicates the vertical scale of Analog Channel 4. VerticalOffset
                       indicates the vertical offset of Analog Channel 4. The step value is
                       VerticalScale/10.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the threshold level of of Analog Channel 4 in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:THReshold4 0.8   /*Sets the threshold level of Analog
                 Channel 4 in logic operation to 800 mV.*/
                 :MATH1:THReshold4?      /*The query returns 8.000000E-1.*/
3.16.38         :MATH<n>:WINDow:TITLe?
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:WINDow:TITLe?
                 Description
                 Queries the title of the specified math operation window.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <n>              Discrete            {1|2|3|4}                       -
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the title of the specified math operation window in strings.
                 Example
                 :MATH1:WINDow:TITLe? /*The query returns Math1 CH1*CH1 Scale:0U
                 Sa:2GSa/s.*/
3.16.39         :MATH<n>:LABel:SHOW
                 Syntax
                 :MATH<n>:LABel:SHOW <bool>
                 :MATH<n>:LABel:SHOW?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        187
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries whether to display the waveform label of the specified operation.
              Parameter
               Name               Type                      Range                                      Default
               <n>                Discrete                  {1|2|3|4}                                  -
               <bool>             Bool                      {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                           -
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :MATH1:LABel:ENABle ON                               /*Enables the display of the
              label.*/
              :MATH1:LABel:ENABle?                                 /*The query returns 1.*/
3.17         :MEASure Commands
              :MEASure commands are used to set and query the parameters related to
              measurements.
              This oscilloscope allows you to set the measurement source, enable or disable the all
              measurement function, the statistical function, and etc.
              Measurement Parameters
              TIP
              If there is no signal input for the current source or the measurement result is not within the
              valid range (too large or too small), then the measurement results are invalid.
              Horizontal Parameters
                                      Rise Time                Fall Time
                                                                                               Threshold
                                                                                              Upper Limit
                                                  +Width                   - Width             Threshold
                                                                                              Middle Value
                                                                                               Threshold
                                                                                              Lower Limit
                                                   Period
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                   Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
188
                                                                                       Command System
                 •     Period (PERiod): defined as the time between the middle threshold points of
                       two consecutive, like-polarity edges.
                 •     Frequency (FREQuency): defined as the reciprocal of period.
                 •     Rise Time (RTIMe): indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the
                       threshold lower limit to the threshold upper limit.
                 •     Fall Time (FTIMe): indicates the time for the signal amplitude to drop from the
                       threshold upper limit to the threshold lower limit.
                 •     +Width (PWIDth): indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a
                       rising edge to the threshold middle value of the next falling edge.
                 •     -Width (NWIDth): indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a
                       falling edge to the threshold middle value of the next rising edge.
                 •     +Duty (PDUTy): indicates the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period.
                 •     -Duty (NDUTy): indicates the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period.
                 •     Tvmax (TVMAX): indicates the time that corresponds to the maximum value of
                       the waveform (Vmax).
                 •     Tvmin (TVMIN): indicates the time that corresponds to the minimum value of
                       the waveform (Vmin).
                 Delay and Phase Parameters
                                                               Period
                       Source A
                                                                  Delay
                         Source B
                 •     Delay(r-r) (RRDelay): indicates the time difference between the threshold
                       middle values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative
                       delay indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                       189
Command System
              •   Delay(f-f) (FFDelay): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
                  values of the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay
                  indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
              •   Delay(r-f) (RFDelay): indicates the time difference between the threshold
                  middle values of the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B.
                  Negative delay indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after the
                  falling edge of Source B.
              •   Delay(f-r) (FRDelay): indicates the time difference between the threshold
                  middle values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative
                  delay indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after the rising edge of
                  Source B.
              •   Phase(r-r) (RRPHase): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold
                  middle values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B.
              •   Phase(f-f) (FFPHase): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold
                  middle values of the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B.
              •   Phase(r-f) (RFPHase): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold
                  middle values of the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B.
              •   Phase(f-r) (FRPHase): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold
                  middle values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B.
              Count Values
              •   Positive Pulse Count (PPULses): It is specified as the number of positive pulses
                  that rise from under the threshold lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
                                                                               Positive Pulse Count = n
                               1                    2                      n
                                                                                                Threshold
                                                                                               Upper Limit
                                                                                                Threshold
                                                                                               Lower Limit
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
190
                                                                                            Command System
                 •     Negative Pulse Count (NPULses): It is specified as the number of negative
                       pulses that fall from above the threshold upper limit to below the threshold
                       lower limit.
                                                                        Negative Pulse Count = n
                                                                                          Threshold
                                                                                         Upper Limit
                                                                                          Threshold
                                                                                         Lower Limit
                                         1                     2        n
                 •     Rising Edge Count (PEDGes): It is specified as the number of rising edges that
                       rise from under the threshold lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
                                                                                      Rising Edge Count = n
                                 1                         2                 n
                                                                                                        Threshold
                                                                                                       Upper Limit
                                                                                                        Threshold
                                                                                                       Lower Limit
                 •     Falling Edge Count (NEDGes): It is specified as the number of falling edges that
                       fall from above the threshold upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.
                                                                                  Falling Edge Count = n
                                                                                                       Threshold
                                                                                                       Upper Limit
                                                                                                       Threshold
                                                                                                       Lower Limit
                                     1                             2              n
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                                 191
Command System
              Voltage Parameters
                                   Overshoot
                    Vmax
                                                                                                Vupper
                                Vtop
                      Vpp                                                                         Vmid
                                            Vamp
                                Vbase
                                                                                                 Vlower
                    Vmin
                                        Preshoot
              •   Vmax (VMAX): indicates the voltage value from the highest point of the
                  waveform to the GND.
              •   Vmin (VMIN): indicates the voltage value from the lowest point of the waveform
                  to the GND.
              •   Vpp (VPP): indicates the voltage value from the highest point to the lowest
                  point of the waveform.
              •   Vtop (VTOP): indicates the voltage value from the flat top of the waveform to
                  the GND.
              •   Vbase (VBASe): indicates the voltage value from the flat base of the waveform
                  to the GND.
              •   Vamp (VAMP): indicates the voltage value from the top of the waveform to the
                  base of the waveform.
              •   Vupper (VUPPer): indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the
                  threshold maximum value.
              •   Vmid (VMID) indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the
                  threshold middle value.
              •   Vlower (VLOWer): indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the
                  threshold minimum value.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
192
                                                                                       Command System
                 •     Vavg (VAVG): indicates the arithmetic average value on the whole waveform or
                       in the gating area.
                 •     VRMS (VRMS): indicates the root mean square value on the whole waveform or
                       in the gating area.
                 •     Per.VRMS (PVRMs): indicates the root mean square value within a period.
                 •     Overshoot (OVERshoot): indicates the ratio of the difference between the
                       maximum value and the top value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
                 •     Preshoot (PREShoot): indicates the ratio of the difference between the
                       minimum value and the base value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
                 •     AC RMS (ACRMs): indicates the root-mean-square value of the waveforms, with
                       the DC component removed.
                 Other Parameters
                 •     Positive Slew Rate (PSLewrate): On the rising edge, first calculate the difference
                       between the high value and the low value, then use the difference to divide the
                       corresponding time value to obtain the positive slew rate.
                 •     Negative Slew Rate (NSLewrate): On the falling edge, first calculate the
                       difference between the low value and the high value, then use the difference to
                       divide the corresponding time value to obtain the negative slew rate.
                 •     Area (MARea): indicates the area of the whole waveform within the screen. The
                       unit is V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the
                       vertical offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference
                       is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the whole
                       waveform within the screen.
                 •     Period Area (MPARea): indicates the area of the first period of waveform on the
                       screen. The unit is V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference
                       (namely the vertical offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the
                       zero reference is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the whole
                       period area.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                       193
Command System
              Measurement Results
              This oscilloscope can make a statistics and display the measurement results.
              •     MAXimum: the maximum value.
              •     MINimum: the minimum value.
              •     CURRent: the current value.
              •     AVERages: the average value.
              •     DEViation: the standard deviation.
              •     CNT: the count value.
3.17.1       :MEASure:SOURce
              Syntax
              :MEASure:SOURce <source>
              :MEASure:SOURce?
              Description
              Sets or queries the channel source of the current measurement parameter.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                   Default
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>       Discrete          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|                      CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                   MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
              Remarks
              This command has the same function as the :MEASure:SETup:DSA
              and :MEASure:SETup:PSA commands.
              Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
              Return Format
              The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
              D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or MATH4.
              Example
              :MEASure:SOURce CHANnel2    /*Sets the channel source of the
              measurement parameter to CHANnel2.*/
              :MEASure:SOURce?             /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
194
                                                                                         Command System
3.17.2          :MEASure:ITEM
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:ITEM <item>[,<src>[,<src>]]
                 :MEASure:ITEM? <item>[,<src>[,<src>]]
                 Description
                 Measures any waveform parameter of the specified source, or queries the statistical
                 results of any waveform parameter of the specified source.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {VMAX|VMIN|VPP|VTOP|VBASe|
                                                          VAMP|VAVG|VRMS|OVERshoot|
                                                          PREShoot|MARea|MPARea|
                                                          PERiod|FREQuency|RTIMe|
                                                          FTIMe|PWIDth|NWIDth|PDUTy|
                                                          NDUTy|TVMAX|TVMIN|
                     <item>           Discrete            PSLewrate|NSLewrate|VUPPer|     -
                                                          VMID|VLOWer|VARiance|PVRMs|
                                                          PPULses|NPULses|PEDGes|
                                                          NEDGes|RRDelay|RFDelay|
                                                          FRDelay|FFDelay|RRPHase|
                                                          RFPHase|FRPHase|FFPHase|
                                                          ACRMs}
                     <src>            Discrete            {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|    -
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                          MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
                 Remarks
                 •      For the detailed measurement item parameter <item>, refer to Measurement
                        Parameters.
                 •      The parameter [,<src>[,<src>]] is used to set the source of the parameter under
                        measurement.
                        -     Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                        -     If the parameter <item> is set to PERiod, FREQuency, PWIDth, NWIDth,
                              PDUTy, NDUTy, RRDelay, RFDelay, FRDelay, FFDelay, RRPHase, RFPHase,
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      195
Command System
                        FRPHase, or FFPHase, the range of the parameter <src> can be any one of
                        the values in {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                        CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|MATH2|MATH3|
                        MATH4}.
                        Otherwise, the range of <src> can be any one of the values in {CHANnel1|
                        CHANnel2|CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}.
                    -   If the measurement parameter is a single source, you only need to set one
                        source. If this parameter is omitted, then the source is, by default, the one
                        that you've selected in the last sent command
                        (:MEASure:SOURce, :MEASure:SETup:PSA, or :MEASure:SETup:DSA).
                    -   If the measurement parameter is a dual channel source, observe the
                        following rules to determine the source that you've selected. That is, if the
                        parameter <src> is omitted, the first source is, by default, the one that
                        you've selected in the last sent command
                        (:MEASure:SOURce, :MEASure:SETup:PSA, or :MEASure:SETup:DSA); the
                        second source is, by default, the one that you've selected in the last sent
                        command (:MEASure:SETup:PSB or :MEASure:SETup:DSB).
              Return Format
              The query returns the current measurement value in scientific notation.
              Example
              :MEASure:ITEM OVERshoot,CHANnel2 /*Measures the overshoot value of
              Channel 2.*/
              :MEASure:ITEM? OVERshoot,CHANnel2   /*The query returns
              8.888889E-3.*/
3.17.3       :MEASure:CLEar
              Syntax
              :MEASure:CLEar
              Description
              Clears all the enabled measurement items.
              Parameter
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
196
                                                                                       Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.17.4          :MEASure:AMSource
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:AMSource <chan>
                 :MEASure:AMSource?
                 Description
                 Sets the source and displays all measurement values of the set source; or queries the
                 channel source(s) of the all measurement function.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <chan>              Discrete                                           OFF
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|OFF}
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or OFF.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:AMSource CHANnel1                    /*Sets the source to CHANnel1.*/
                 :MEASure:AMSource?                             /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
3.17.5          :MEASure:STATistic:COUNt
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:STATistic:COUNt <val>
                 :MEASure:STATistic:COUNt?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the statistics count.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      197
Command System
              Parameter
               Name               Type                Range                                   Default
               <val>              Integer             2 to 100,000                            1,000
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 2 to 100,000.
              Example
              :MEASure:STATistic:COUNt 1000                       /*Sets the statistics count to
              1,000.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:COUNt?                   /*The query returns 1000.*/
3.17.6       :MEASure:STATistic:DISPlay
              Syntax
              :MEASure:STATistic:DISPlay <bool>
              :MEASure:STATistic:DISPlay?
              Description
              Enables or disables the statistical function; or queries the status of the statistical
              function.
              Parameter
               Name               Type                Range                                   Default
               <bool>             Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                        0|OFF
              Remarks
              When the statistical function is enabled, the instrument makes statistics of the
              measurement results for at most 10 measurement items that are turned on last time
              and displays the statistical results.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :MEASure:STATistic:DISPlay ON                  /*Enables the statistical
              function.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:DISPlay?                    /*The query returns 1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                             Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
198
                                                                                         Command System
3.17.7          :MEASure:STATistic:RESet
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:STATistic:RESet
                 Description
                 Clears the history statistics data and makes statistics again.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.17.8          :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM <item>[,<src>[,<src>]]
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM?<type>,<item>[,<src>[,<src>]]
                 Description
                 Enables the statistical function of any waveform parameter of the specified source, or
                 queries the statistical results of any waveform parameter of the specified source.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                                                          {VMAX|VMIN|VPP|VTOP|VBASe|
                                                          VAMP|VAVG|VRMS|OVERshoot|
                                                          PREShoot|MARea|MPARea|
                                                          PERiod|FREQuency|RTIMe|
                                                          FTIMe|PWIDth|NWIDth|PDUTy|
                  <item>              Discrete                                             -
                                                          NDUTy|TVMAX|TVMIN|
                                                          PSLewrate|NSLewrate|VUPPer|
                                                          VMID|VLOWer|VARiance|PVRMs|
                                                          PPULses|NPULses|PEDGes|
                                                          NEDGes|RRDelay|RFDelay|
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                        199
Command System
                  Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                                                     FRDelay|FFDelay|RRPHase|
                                                     RFPHase|FRPHase|FFPHase|
                                                     ACRMs}
                                                     {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                     D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <src>            Discrete          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|                     -
                                                     CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                     MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
                                                     {MAXimum|MINimum|CURRent|
                  <type>           Discrete                                                 -
                                                     AVERages|DEViation|CNT}
              Remarks
              •      For the detailed measurement item parameter <item>, refer to Measurement
                     Parameters.
              •      The parameter [,<src>[,<src>]] is used to set the source of the parameter under
                     measurement.
                     -     Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                     -     If the parameter <item> is set to PERiod, FREQuency, PWIDth, NWIDth,
                           PDUTy, NDUTy, RRDelay, RFDelay, FRDelay, FFDelay, RRPHase, RFPHase,
                           FRPHase, or FFPHase, the range of the parameter <src> can be any one of
                           the values in {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                           CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|MATH2|MATH3|
                           MATH4}.
                           Otherwise, the range of <src> can be any one of the values in {CHANnel1|
                           CHANnel2|CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}.
                     -     If the measurement parameter is a single source, you only need to set one
                           source. If this parameter is omitted, then the source is, by default, the one
                           that you've selected in the last sent command
                           (:MEASure:SOURce, :MEASure:SETup:PSA, or :MEASure:SETup:DSA).
                     -     If the measurement parameter is a dual channel source, observe the
                           following rules to determine the source that you've selected. That is, if the
                           parameter <src> is omitted, the first source is, by default, the one that
                           you've selected in the last sent command
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
200
                                                                                            Command System
                               (:MEASure:SOURce, :MEASure:SETup:PSA, or :MEASure:SETup:DSA); the
                               second source is, by default, the one that you've selected in the last sent
                               command (:MEASure:SETup:PSB or :MEASure:SETup:DSB).
                 •     For the results of <type>, refer to Measurement Results.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the statistical results in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM VPP,CHANnel2   /*Enables the statistical
                 function of the peak-peak value of CH2.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? MAXimum,VPP   /*Queries the maximum value.
                 The query returns 9.120000E-1.*/
3.17.9          :MEASure:SETup:MAX
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:SETup:MAX <value>
                 :MEASure:SETup:MAX?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the threshold level upper limit of the analog channel in auto
                 measurement.
                 Parameter
                     Name              Type               Range                               Default
                     <value>           Integer            Refer to Remarks                    -
                 Remarks
                 The range of the upper limit of the threshold level is related to the current threshold
                 level middle value. You can run the :MEASure:SETup:MID command to set or query
                 the middle value of the threshold level of the analog channel in auto measurement.
                 •     When the threshold type is percentage, its range is from (threshold middle value
                       + 1%) to 100%.
                 •     When the threshold type is absolute, its range changes with the probe ratio. Its
                       max. range is from -100 MV to 100 MV; and its min. range is from -20 V to 20 V.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                             201
Command System
              •     When the set upper limit is smaller than the current threshold middle value, a
                    message "Set at lower limit" will be displayed, and the threshold middle value
                    will not be modified automatically.
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer. When the threshold type is absolute, the default unit of
              the returned value is V.
              Example
              :MEASure:SETup:MAX 95            /*Sets the upper limit of the threshold
              level to 95%.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MAX?              /*The query returns 95.*/
3.17.10      :MEASure:SETup:MID
              Syntax
              :MEASure:SETup:MID <value>
              :MEASure:SETup:MID?
              Description
              Sets or queries the threshold level middle value of the analog channel in auto
              measurement.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type               Range                                   Default
                  <value>        Integer            Refer to Remarks                        -
              Remarks
              The set middle value must be smaller than the currently set upper limit and greater
              than the currently set lower limit.
              You can send the :MEASure:SETup:MAX and :MEASure:SETup:MIN commands to set or
              query the threshold level upper limit and lower limit of the current analog channel in
              auto measurement.
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer. When the threshold type is absolute, the default unit of
              the returned value is V.
              Example
              :MEASure:SETup:MID 89            /*Sets the middle value of the threshold
              level to 89%.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MID?              /*The query returns 89.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
202
                                                                                      Command System
3.17.11         :MEASure:SETup:MIN
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:SETup:MIN <value>
                 :MEASure:SETup:MIN?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the threshold level lower limit of the analog channel in auto
                 measurement.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <value>          Integer             Refer to Remarks              -
                 Remarks
                 The range of the threshold level lower limit is related to the current threshold middle
                 value. You can send the :MEASure:SETup:MID command to set or query the threshold
                 middle value of the current analog channel in auto measurement.
                 •     When the threshold type is percentage, its range is from 0% to (threshold middle
                       value - 1%).
                 •     When the threshold type is absolute, its range changes with the probe ratio. Its
                       max. range is from -100 MV to 100 MV; and its min. range is from -20 V to 20 V.
                 •     When the set lower limit is greater than the current threshold middle value, a
                       message "Set at upper limit" will be displayed, and the threshold middle value
                       will not be modified automatically.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer. When the threshold type is absolute, the default unit of
                 the returned value is V.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:SETup:MIN 53               /*Sets the lower limit of the threshold
                 level to 53%.*/
                 :MEASure:SETup:MIN?                 /*The query returns 53.*/
3.17.12         :MEASure:SETup:PSA
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:SETup:PSA <source>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                        203
Command System
              :MEASure:SETup:PSA?
              Description
              Sets or queries Source A in the phase or delay measurement.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
               <source>         Discrete         CHANnel1|CHANnel2|                     CHANnel1
                                                 CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                 MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
              Remarks
              This command has the same function as the :MEASure:SOURce
              and :MEASure:SETup:DSA commands.
              Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
              Return Format
              The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
              D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or MATH4.
              Example
              :MEASure:SETup:PSA CHANnel1           /*Sets Source A of the phase
              measurement to CHANnel1.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:PSA?                     /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
3.17.13      :MEASure:SETup:PSB
              Syntax
              :MEASure:SETup:PSB <source>
              :MEASure:SETup:PSB?
              Description
              Sets or queries Source B in the phase or delay measurement.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
               <source>         Discrete         CHANnel1|CHANnel2|                     CHANnel1
                                                 CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                 MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
204
                                                                                         Command System
                 Remarks
                 This command has the same function as the :MEASure:SETup:DSB command.
                 Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                 D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or MATH4.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:SETup:PSB CHANnel2                   /*Sets Source B of the phase
                 measurement to CHANnel2.*/
                 :MEASure:SETup:PSB?                            /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.17.14         :MEASure:SETup:DSA
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:SETup:DSA <source>
                 :MEASure:SETup:DSA?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries Source A in the phase or delay measurement.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete            CHANnel1|CHANnel2|              CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                          MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
                 Remarks
                 This command has the same function as the :MEASure:SOURce
                 and :MEASure:SETup:PSA commands.
                 Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                 D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or MATH4.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:SETup:DSA CHANnel1                   /*Sets Source A of the delay
                 measurement to CHANnel1.*/
                 :MEASure:SETup:DSA?                            /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      205
Command System
3.17.15      :MEASure:SETup:DSB
              Syntax
              :MEASure:SETup:DSB <source>
              :MEASure:SETup:DSB
              Description
              Sets or queries Source B in the phase or delay measurement.
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
               <source>         Discrete          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|                     CHANnel1
                                                  CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                  MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
              Remarks
              This command has the same function as the :MEASure:SETup:PSB command.
              Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
              Return Format
              The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
              D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or MATH4.
              Example
              :MEASure:SETup:DSB CHANnel2             /*Sets Source B of the delay
              measurement to CHANnel2.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:DSB?                      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.17.16      :MEASure:THReshold:SOURce
              Syntax
              :MEASure:THReshold:SOURce <source>
              :MEASure:THReshold:SOURce?
              Description
              Sets or queries the threshold source.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
206
                                                                                       Command System
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>            Discrete            CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|       CHANnel1
                                                          MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
                 Remarks
                 Modifying the threshold will affect the measurement results of time, delay and phase
                 parameters.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or
                 MATH4.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:THReshold:SOURce CHANnel2                  /*Sets the threshold source
                 to CHANnel2.*/
                 :MEASure:THReshold:SOURce?                           /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.17.17         :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE <type>
                 :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the measurement threshold type.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <type>              Discrete            {PERCent|ABSolute}             PERCent
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns PERC or ABS.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE ABSolute                 /*Sets the threshold type to
                 ABSolute.*/
                 :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE?                           /*The query returns ABS.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      207
Command System
3.17.18      :MEASure:THReshold:DEFault
              Syntax
              :MEASure:THReshold:DEFault
              Description
              Sets the threshold level of the analog channel in auto measurement to a default
              value.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              For the default threshold level in absolute, its upper limit and lower limit are +
              (vertical scale x 3) and -(vertical scale x 3), respectively.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.17.19      :MEASure:AREA
              Syntax
              :MEASure:AREA <area>
              :MEASure:AREA?
              Description
              Sets or queries the type of the measurement range.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type               Range                                  Default
                  <area>          Discrete           {MAIN|ZOOM}                            MAIN
              Remarks
              •     MAIN: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base
                    region.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
208
                                                                                      Command System
                 •     ZOOM: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base
                       region. Note that only when you enable the delayed sweep function first, can
                       "Zoom" be enabled.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns MAIN, ZOOM.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:AREA ZOOM                        /*Sets the type of the measurement
                 range to ZOOM.*/
                 :MEASure:AREA?                                /*The query returns ZOOM.*/
3.17.20         :MEASure:INDicator
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:INDicator <bool>
                 :MEASure:INDicator?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the on/off status of the measurement auto cursor.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}              0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:INDicator ON   /*Sets the measurement auto cursor to be
                 on.*/
                 :MEASure:INDicator? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.17.21         :MEASure:COUNter:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:COUNter:ENABle <bool>
                 :MEASure:COUNter:ENABle?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                      209
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries the on/off status of the frequency counter.
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
               <bool>           Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :MEASure:COUNter:ENABle ON            /*Enables the frequency counter.*/
              :MEASure:COUNter:ENABle?              /*The query returns 1.*/
3.17.22      :MEASure:COUNter:SOURce
              Syntax
              :MEASure:COUNter:SOURce <source>
              :MEASure:COUNter:SOURce?
              Description
              Sets or queries the measurement source for the frequency counter.
              Parameter
               Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
               <source>         Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                  CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                                                  CHANnel3|CHANnel4|EXT}
              Remarks
              Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
              EXT is only available for DHO812 and DHO802 models.
              Return Format
              The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
              D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or EXT.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
210
                                                                                    Command System
                 Example
                 :MEASure:COUNter:SOURce CHANnel4 /*Sets the measurement source of
                 the frequency counter to CHANnel4.*/
                 :MEASure:COUNter:SOURce? /*The query returns CHAN4.*/
3.17.23         :MEASure:COUNter:VALue?
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:COUNter:VALue?
                 Description
                 Queries the measurement results of the frequency counter.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the measurement results of the frequency counter in scientific
                 notation.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:COUNter:VALue?               /*The query returns 9.999996E-04.*/
3.17.24         :MEASure:AMP:TYPE
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:AMP:TYPE <val>
                 :MEASure:AMP:TYPE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the amplitude method.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                       Default
                     <val>            Discrete            {AUTO|MANual}               MANual
                 Remarks
                 •      AUTO: indicates the Auto method.
                 •      MANual: indicates the Manual method.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                    211
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns AUTO or MAN.
              Example
              :MEASure:AMP:TYPE MANual /*Sets the amplitude method to MANual.*/
              :MEASure:AMP:TYPE? /*The query returns MAN.*/
3.17.25      :MEASure:AMP:MANual:TOP
              Syntax
              :MEASure:AMP:MANual:TOP <val>
              :MEASure:AMP:MANual:TOP?
              Description
              Sets or queries the amplitude top value type for the manual amplitude method.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <val>          Discrete         {HISTogram|MAXMin}                     HISTogram
              Remarks
              •      HISTogram: indicates the histogram type.
              •      MAXMin: indicates the Max-Min type.
              Return Format
              The query returns HIST or MAXM.
              Example
              :MEASure:AMP:MANual:TOP MAXMin   /*Sets the amplitude top value
              type for the manual amplitude method to MAXMin.*/
              :MEASure:AMP:MANual:TOP?    /*The query returns MAXM.*/
3.17.26      :MEASure:AMP:MANual:BASE
              Syntax
              :MEASure:AMP:MANual:BASE <val>
              :MEASure:AMP:MANual:BASE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the amplitude base value type for the manual amplitude method.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
212
                                                                                      Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <val>            Discrete            {HISTogram|MAXMin}            HISTogram
                 Remarks
                 •      HISTogram: indicates the histogram type.
                 •      MAXMin: indicates the Max-Min type.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns HIST or MAXM.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:AMP:MANual:BASE MAXMin   /*Sets the amplitude base value
                 type for the manual amplitude method to MAXMin.*/
                 :MEASure:AMP:MANual:BASE?    /*The query returns MAXM.*/
3.17.27         :MEASure:CATegory
                 Syntax
                 :MEASure:CATegory <val>
                 :MEASure:CATegory?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the measurement type.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <val>            Integer             0 to 2                        0
                 Remarks
                 0: horizontal; 1: vertical; 2: other.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 2.
                 Example
                 :MEASure:CATegory 1 /*Sets the measurement category to Vertical
                 measurement.*/
                 :MEASure:CATegory? /*The query returns 1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     213
Command System
3.18         :QUICK Command
              The :QUICK command is used to set and query the relevant parameters for quick
              operation shortcut keys.
3.18.1       :QUICk:OPERation
              Syntax
              :QUICk:OPERation <type>
              :QUICk:OPERation?
              Description
              Sets or queries the type of the shortcut keys.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                   Default
                                                    {SIMage|SWAVe|SSETup|
                  <type>          Discrete          AMEasure|SRESet|RECord|                 SIMage
                                                    SSAVe}
              Remarks
              •     SIMage: indicates the screen image.
              •     SWAVe: indicates the waveform saving.
              •     SSETup: indicates the setup saving.
              •     AMEasure: indicates all measurement.
              •     SRESet: indicates statistics reset.
              •     RECord: indicates waveform recording.
              •     SSAVe: indicates saving group.
              Return Format
              The query returns SIM, SWAV, SSET, AME, REC, SSAV, or SRES.
              Example
              :QUICk:OPERation SWAVe                 /*Sets the type of the shortcut key to
              "save waveform".*/
              :QUICk:OPERation?                           /*The query returns SWAV.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
214
                                                                                      Command System
3.19            :RECord Commands
                 The :RECord commands are used to set and query the parameters related to the
                 waveform recording mode and frames.
                 Waveform recording/playing function allows you to record and play the waveforms,
                 enabling you to analyze the waveforms better.
3.19.1          :RECord:WRECord:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WRECord:ENABle <bool>
                 :RECord:WRECord:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the waveform recording function; or queries the on/off status of
                 the waveform recording function.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                        Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}             0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :RECord:WRECord:ENABle ON                 /*Enables the waveform recording
                 function.*/
                 :RECord:WRECord:ENABle?                   /*The query returns 1.*/
3.19.2          :RECord:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:ENABle <bool>
                 :RECord:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the waveform recording function; or queries the on/off status of
                 the waveform recording function.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                    215
Command System
              Parameter
               Name              Type            Range                                  Default
               <bool>            Bool            {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              This command exists for backwards compatibility. Use the
              command :RECord:WRECord:ENABle.
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              Example
              :RECord:ENABle ON           /*Enables the waveform recording function.*/
              :RECord:ENABle?             /*The query returns 1.*/
3.19.3       :RECord:WRECord:OPERate
              Syntax
              :RECord:WRECord:OPERate <operate>
              :RECord:WRECord:OPERate?
              Description
              Sets to start the waveform recording, or queries whether the waveform recording
              starts or stops.
              Parameter
               Name              Type            Range                                  Default
               <operate>         Discrete        {RUN|STOP}                             STOP
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns RUN or STOP.
              Example
              :RECord:WRECord:OPERate RUN           /*Sets to start recording
              waveforms.*/
              :RECord:WRECord:OPERate?             /*The query returns RUN.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
216
                                                                                        Command System
3.19.4          :RECord:STARt
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:STARt <bool>
                 :RECord:STARt?
                 Description
                 Sets to start the waveform recording, or queries whether the waveform recording
                 starts or stops.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 This command exists for backwards compatibility. Use the
                 command :RECord:WRECord:OPERate.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :RECord:STARt ON             /*Sets to start recording the waveforms.*/
                 :RECord:STARt?               /*The query returns 1.*/
3.19.5          :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes <value>
                 :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the number of frames for waveform recording.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          1 to the maximum number of
                  <value>             Integer             frames that can be recorded     1,000
                                                          currently
                 Remarks
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       217
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to the maximum number of frames that
              can be recorded currently.
              Example
              :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes 300           /*Sets the number of recorded frames
              to 300.*/
              :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes?              /*The query returns 300.*/
3.19.6       :RECord:FRAMes
              Syntax
              :RECord:FRAMes <value>
              :RECord:FRAMes?
              Description
              Sets or queries the number of frames for waveform recording.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
                                                 1 to the maximum number of
               <value>          Integer          frames that can be recorded            1,000
                                                 currently
              Remarks
              This command exists for backwards compatibility. Use the
              command :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes.
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to the maximum number of frames that
              can be recorded currently.
              Example
              :RECord:FRAMes 300           /*Sets the number of recorded frames to 300.*/
              :RECord:FRAMes?              /*The query returns 300.*/
3.19.7       :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes:MAX
              Syntax
              :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes:MAX
              Description
              Sets the number of recorded frames to the maximum number of frames.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
218
                                                                                   Command System
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 :RECord:WRECord:FRAMes:MAX   /*Sets the number of recorded frames
                 to the maximum number of frames.*/
3.19.8          :RECord:WRECord: FMAX?
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WRECord: FMAX?
                 Description
                 Queries the maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer. The maximum number of frames that can be recorded
                 currently is determined by the current memory depth.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.19.9          :RECord:WRECord:FINTerval
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WRECord:FINTerval <interval>
                 :RECord:WRECord:FINTerval?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the time interval between frames in waveform recording.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                 Guide
                                                                                                  219
Command System
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                   Default
               <interval>        Real              10 ns to 1 s                            10 ns
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the time interval in scientific notation. The unit is s.
              Example
              :RECord:WRECord:FINTerval 1 /*Sets the time interval between frames
              in waveform recording to 1 s.*/
              :RECord:WRECord:FINTerval? /*The query returns 1.000000E0.*/
3.19.10      :RECord:WRECord:PROMpt
              Syntax
              :RECord:WRECord:PROMpt <bool>
              :RECord:WRECord:PROMpt?
              Description
              Sets or queries the on/off status of the beeper when the recording is completed.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                   Default
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                        1|ON
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              Example
              :RECord:WRECord:PROMpt ON             /*Enables the beeper when the
              recording is completed.*/
              :RECord:WRECord:PROMpt?                 /*The query returns 1.*/
3.19.11      :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent
              Syntax
              :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent <value>
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
220
                                                                                       Command System
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the current frame in waveform playing.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                                                                                        The maximum
                                                          1 to the maximum number of    number of
                  <value>             Integer
                                                          frames recorded               frames
                                                                                        recorded
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
                 Example
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent 300                   /*Sets the current frame for
                 waveform playing to 300.*/
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent?                     /*The query returns 300.*/
3.19.12         :RECord:CURRent
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:CURRent <value>
                 :RECord:CURRent?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the current frame in waveform playing.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                                                                                        The maximum
                                                          1 to the maximum number of    number of
                  <value>             Integer
                                                          frames recorded               frames
                                                                                        recorded
                 Remarks
                 This command exists for backwards compatibility. Use the
                 command :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     221
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer.
              Example
              :RECord:CURRent 300          /*Sets the current frame for waveform
              playing to 300.*/
              :RECord:CURRent?            /*The query returns 300.*/
3.19.13      :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent:TIME?
              Syntax
              :RECord:WREPlay:FCURrent:TIME?
              Description
              Queries the time stamp of the current frame in waveform playing.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              Queries the time stamp of the current frame in strings in waveform playing.
              Example
              N/A
3.19.14      :RECord:WREPlay:FSTart
              Syntax
              :RECord:WREPlay:FSTart <start>
              :RECord:WREPlay:FSTart?
              Description
              Sets or queries the start frame in waveform playback.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
                                                 1 to the maximum number of
               <start>          Integer          frames that can be played back         -
                                                 currently
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
222
                                                                                       Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the start frame in integer.
                 Example
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FSTart 10                 /*Sets the start frame in waveform
                 playing to 10.*/
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FSTart?                   /*The query returns 10.*/
3.19.15         :RECord:WREPlay:FEND
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FEND <end>
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FEND?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the end frame in waveform playback.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                                                          1 to the maximum number of
                  <end>               Integer                                           -
                                                          frames recorded
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the end frame in integer.
                 Example
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FEND 346                 /*Sets the end frame for waveform
                 playing to 346.*/
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FEND?                  /*The query returns 346.*/
3.19.16         :RECord:WREPlay:FMAX?
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WREPlay:FMAX?
                 Description
                 Queries the maximum number of frames that can be played back currently.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     223
Command System
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to the number of frames that have been
              recorded currently.
              Example
              N/A
3.19.17      :RECord:WREPlay:FINTerval
              Syntax
              :RECord:WREPlay:FINTerval <interval>
              :RECord:WREPlay:FINTerval?
              Description
              Sets or queries the time interval between frames in waveform playback.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                   Default
               <interval>        Real              1 ms to 1 s                             -
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the time interval in scientific notation. The unit is s.
              Example
              :RECord WREPlay:FINTerval 1 /*Sets the time interval between frames
              in waveform playback to 1 s.*/
              :RECord:WREPlay:FINTerval? /*The query returns 1.000000E0.*/
3.19.18      :RECord:WREPlay:MODE
              Syntax
              :RECord:WREPlay:MODE <mode>
              :RECord:WREPlay:MODE?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
224
                                                                                      Command System
                 Description
                 Sets the waveform playback mode to Repeat or Single; queries the waveform
                 playback mode.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <mode>              Discrete            {REPeat|SINGle}               SINGle
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns REP or SING.
                 Example
                 :RECord:WREPlay:MODE REP                /*Sets the playback mode to REP.*/
                 :RECord:WREPlay:MODE?                  /*The query returns REP.*/
3.19.19         :RECord:WREPlay:DIRection
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WREPlay:DIRection <direction>
                 :RECord:WREPlay:DIRection?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the playback direction in waveform playing.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <direction>         Discrete            {FORWard|BACKward}            FORWard
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns FORW or BACK.
                 Example
                 :RECord:WREPlay:DIRection BACK /*Sets the direction of waveform
                 playback to BACK.*/
                 :RECord:WREPlay:DIRection? /*The query returns BACK.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     225
Command System
3.19.20      :RECord:WREPlay:OPERate
              Syntax
              :RECord:WREPlay:OPERate <operate>
              :RECord:WREPlay:OPERate?
              Description
              Enables or disables the waveform playing function; or queries the on/off status of the
              waveform playing function.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                   Default
               <operate>        Discrete         {RUN|STOP}                              STOP
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns RUN or STOP.
              Example
              :RECord:WREPlay:OPERate RUN            /*Sets to play the waveforms.*/
              :RECord:WREPlay:OPERate?              /*The query returns RUN.*/
3.19.21      :RECord:PLAY
              Syntax
              :RECord:PLAY <bool>
              :RECord:PLAY?
              Description
              Enables or disables the waveform playing function; or queries the on/off status of the
              waveform playing function.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                   Default
               <bool>           Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                        0|OFF
              Remarks
              This command exists for backwards compatibility. Use the
              command :RECord:WREPlay:OPERate.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
226
                                                                                Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :RECord:PLAY ON             /*Sets to play the waveforms.*/
                 :RECord:PLAY?               /*The query returns 1.*/
3.19.22         :RECord:WREPlay:BACK
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WREPlay:BACK
                 Description
                 Plays back the previous frame of waveforms manually.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 :RECord:WREPlay:BACK /*Plays back the previous frame of waveforms
                 manually.*/
3.19.23         :RECord:WREPlay:NEXT
                 Syntax
                 :RECord:WREPlay:NEXT
                 Description
                 Plays back the next frame of waveforms manually.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.             DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                              Guide
                                                                                               227
Command System
              Example
              :RECord:WREPlay:NEXT /*Plays back the next frame of waveforms
              manually.*/
3.19.24      :RECord:WREPlay:PLAY
              Syntax
              :RECord:WREPlay:PLAY <val>
              Description
              Sets to play from the start frame or end frame manually.
              Parameter
                  Name             Type             Range                                   Default
                  <val>            Discrete         {FFIRst|FEND}                           FFIRst
              Remarks
              •      FFIRst: starts from the start frame.
              •      FEND: starts from the end frame.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              :RECord:WREPlay: PLAY FEND /*Sets to play from end frame manually.*/
3.20         :REFerence Commands
              :REFerence commands are used to set the reference waveform parameters.
              This series oscilloscope provides 10 reference waveform positions (Ref1-Ref10). In the
              actual test process, you can compare the signal waveform with the reference
              waveform to locate the failure.
3.20.1       :REFerence:SOURce
              Syntax
              :REFerence:SOURce <ref>,<chan>
              :REFerence:SOURce? <ref>
              Description
              Sets or queries the source of the specified reference channel.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
228
                                                                                          Command System
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <ref>               Discrete            {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}            -
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <chan>              Discrete            CHANnel1|CHANnel2|                CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                          MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
                 Remarks
                 Only the currently enabled channel can be selected as the source of the specified
                 reference channel.
                 Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                 D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or MATH4.
                 Example
                 :REFerence:SOURce 1,CHANnel1                  /*Sets the source of the reference
                 channel 1 to CHANnel1.*/
                 :REFerence:SOURce? 1                          /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
3.20.2          :REFerence:VSCale
                 Syntax
                 :REFerence:VSCale <ref>,<scale>
                 :REFerence:VSCale? <ref>
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified reference channel.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <ref>               Discrete            {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}            -
                  <scale>             Real                Refer to Remarks                  50mV
                 Remarks
                 Related to the probe ratio setting
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                         229
Command System
              When the probe ratio is 1X, the value of <scale> ranges from 100 μV to 10 V. When
              the probe ratio is 10X, the value of <scale> ranges from 1 mV to 100 V.
              This command is only available when the specified reference channel has saved the
              reference waveforms.
              Return Format
              The query returns the vertical scale in scientific notation.
              Example
              :REFerence:VSCale 1,2            /*Sets the vertical scale of reference
              channel 1 to 2 V.*/
              :REFerence:VSCale? 1          /*The query returns 2.000000E0.*/
3.20.3       :REFerence:VOFFset
              Syntax
              :REFerence:VOFFset <ref>,<offset>
              :REFerence:VOFFset? <ref>
              Description
              Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified reference channel.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                   Default
               <ref>             Discrete          {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}                  -
                                                   (-10 × RefVerticalScale) to (10 ×
               <offset>          Real                                                      0V
                                                   RefVerticalScale)
              Remarks
              RefVerticalScale indicates the vertical scale of the currently set reference channel.
              Return Format
              The query returns the vertical position in scientific notation.
              Example
              :REFerence:VOFFset 1,0.5    /*Sets the vertical offset of reference
              channel 1 to 500 mV.*/
              :REFerence:VOFFset? 1   /*The query returns 5.000000E-1.*/
3.20.4       :REFerence:RESet
              Syntax
              :REFerence:RESet <ref>
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
230
                                                                                          Command System
                 Description
                 Resets the vertical scale and vertical offset of the specified reference channel to the
                 defaults.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <ref>               Discrete            {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}            -
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.20.5          :REFerence:CURRent
                 Syntax
                 :REFerence:CURRent <ref>
                 Description
                 Sets the current reference channel.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <ref>               Discrete            {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}            1
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.20.6          :REFerence:SAVE
                 Syntax
                 :REFerence:SAVE <ref>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                         231
Command System
              Description
              Saves the waveform of the specified reference channel to the internal memory as the
              reference waveform.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                  Default
               <ref>             Discrete         {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}                 -
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.20.7       :REFerence:COLor
              Syntax
              :REFerence:COLor <ref>, <color>
              :REFerence:COLor? <ref>
              Description
              Sets or queries the color of the specified reference channel.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                  Default
               <ref>             Discrete         {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}                 -
                                                  {GRAY|GREen|BLUE|RED|
               <color>           Discrete                                                -
                                                  ORANge}
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns GRAY, GRE, BLUE, RED, or ORAN.
              Example
              :REFerence:COLor 1,GREen   /*Sets the display color of the
              reference channel 1 to GREen.*/
              :REFerence:COLor? 1      /*The query returns GRE.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
232
                                                                                            Command System
3.20.8          :REFerence:LABel:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :REFerence:LABel:ENABle <bool>
                 :REFerence:LABel:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the label display of all the reference channels; or queries the
                 on/off label display status of all the reference channels.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                   0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :REFerence:LABel:ENABle ON                         /*Enables the label display of
                 all the reference channels.*/
                 :REFerence:LABel:ENABle?                           /*The query returns 1.*/
3.20.9          :REFerence:LABel:CONTent
                 Syntax
                 :REFerence:LABel:CONTent <ref>,<str>
                 :REFerence:LABel:CONTent? <ref>
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the label of the specified reference channel.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                  <ref>               Discrete            {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}             -
                                                          The label can contain English
                  <str>               ASCII String        letters and numbers, as well as    -
                                                          some symbols.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                         233
Command System
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the label of the specified reference channel in strings.
              Example
              :REFerence:LABel:CONTent 1,REF1                    /*Sets the label of
              reference channel 1 to REF1.*/
              :REFerence:LABel:CONTent? 1                        /*The query returns REF1.*/
3.21         :SAVE Commands
              You can save the current setups, waveforms, screen image, and parameters of the
              oscilloscope to the internal memory or external USB storage device (such as USB
              storage device) in various formats and recall the stored files when necessary.
3.21.1       :SAVE:IMAGe:INVert
              Syntax
              :SAVE:IMAGe:INVert <bool>
              :SAVE:IMAGe:INVert?
              Description
              Enables or disables the invert function when saving the image; or queries whether the
              invert function is enabled when saving the image.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                  Default
               <bool>            Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :SAVE:IMAGe:INVert ON                   /*Enables the invert function when
              saving the image.*/
              :SAVE:IMAGe:INVert?                     /*The query returns 1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
234
                                                                                      Command System
3.21.2          :SAVE:IMAGe:COLor
                 Syntax
                 :SAVE:IMAGe:COLor <color>
                 :SAVE:IMAGe:COLor?
                 Description
                 Sets the image color for image saving to Color or Gray; or queries image color for
                 image saving.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <color>             Discrete            {COLor|GRAY}                  COLor
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns COL or GRAY.
                 Example
                 :SAVE:IMAGe:COLor GRAY                           /*Sets the image color for image
                 saving to GRAY.*/
                 :SAVE:IMAGe:COLor?                                /*The query returns GRAY.*/
3.21.3          :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat
                 Syntax
                 :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat <format>
                 :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries in what format is the image saved.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <format>            Discrete            {PNG|BMP|JPG}                 -
                 Remarks
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                      235
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns PNG, BMP, or JPG.
              Example
              :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat PNG                /*Sets the storage format to PNG.*/
              :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat?                       /*The query returns PNG.*/
3.21.4       :SAVE:IMAGe:HEADer
              Syntax
              :SAVE:IMAGe:HEADer <bool>
              :SAVE:IMAGe:HEADer?
              Description
              Sets or queries whether to display the image header.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type               Range                                   Default
                  <bool>         Bool               {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                        -
              Remarks
              •     1|ON: enables to display the image header. If you select "ON", the instrument
                    model and the image creation date will be displayed in the header of the image
                    when you save the image file.
              •     0|OFF: disables to display the image header.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :SAVE:IMAGe:HEADer ON /*Enables the display of the image header.*/
              :SAVE:IMAGe:HEADer? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.21.5       :SAVE:IMAGe:DATA?
              Syntax
              :SAVE:IMAGe:DATA?
              Description
              Queries the bitmap data stream of the currently displayed image.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
236
                                                                                       Command System
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 The read data format is TMC header + binary data stream of the screenshot +
                 terminator. The TMC header is in #NXXXXXX format; wherein, # is the TMC header
                 identifier; N following # represents the number of digits (in the decimal integer) that
                 follow; the length of the binary data stream of the screenshot is expressed in ASCII
                 strings, and the terminator represents the ending of communication. For example, the
                 data read for one time is #9000387356. 9 indicates the number of digits (in the
                 decimal integer) that follow, and "000387356" indicates the length of the binary data
                 stream, that is, 387356 bytes.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the binary data stream.
                 Example
                 :SAVE:IMAGe:DATA? /*The query returns the binary data stream.*/
3.21.6          :SAVE:IMAGe
                 Syntax
                 :SAVE:IMAGe <path>
                 Description
                 Stores the contents displayed on the screen into the internal or external memory in
                 image format.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <path>           ASCII String        Refer to Remarks               -
                 Remarks
                 <path> includes the file storage location and the filename with a suffix.
                 •     The path of the local disk is C:/ and the path of the external storage device can
                       be D:/E:/...
                 •     The suffix of the filename can be .bmp, .png, or .jpg.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        237
Command System
              •     Refer to :SAVE:OVERlap . When you send the command :SAVE:OVERlap ON, if the
                    specified storage location already contains a file with the same filename, the
                    original file will be overwritten.
              •     The filename can contain letters, numbers, and other non-Chinese characters.
                    The length of the filename shall not exceed 16 characters.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              :SAVE:IMAGe D:/123.png    /*Stores the contents displayed on the
              screen into the external storage device Disk D, with the filename
              123.png.*/
3.21.7       :SAVE:SETup
              Syntax
              :SAVE:SETup <path>
              Description
              Saves the current setup parameters of the oscilloscope to the internal or external
              memory as a file.
              Parameter
                  Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                  <path>           ASCII String      Refer to Remarks                       -
              Remarks
              <path> includes the file storage location and the filename with a suffix.
              •     The path of the local disk is C:/ and the path of the external storage device can
                    be D:/E:/...
              •     The suffix of the filename is "*.stp".
              •     Refer to :SAVE:OVERlap . When you send the command :SAVE:OVERlap ON, if the
                    specified storage location already contains a file with the same filename, the
                    original file will be overwritten.
              •     The filename can contain letters, numbers, and other non-Chinese characters.
                    The length of the filename shall not exceed 16 characters.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
238
                                                                                       Command System
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 :SAVE:SETup D:/123.stp /*Stores the current setup parameters of the
                 oscilloscope into the external storage device Disk D, with the
                 filename 123.stp.*/
3.21.8          :SAVE:WAVeform
                 Syntax
                 :SAVE:WAVeform <path>
                 Description
                 Saves the screen waveform data to the internal or external memory as a file.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <path>           ASCII String        Refer to Remarks               -
                 Remarks
                 <path> includes the file storage location and the filename with a suffix.
                 •     The path of the local disk is C:/ and the path of the external storage device can
                       be D:/E:/...
                 •     The suffix of the filename is "*.bin" or "*.csv".
                 •     Refer to :SAVE:OVERlap . When you send the command :SAVE:OVERlap ON, if the
                       specified storage location already contains a file with the same filename, the
                       original file will be overwritten.
                 •     The filename can contain letters, numbers, and other non-Chinese characters.
                       The length of the filename shall not exceed 16 characters.
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 :SAVE:WAVeform D:/123.csv   /*Saves the screen waveform file to the
                 external storage device Disk D, with the filename 123.csv.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                        239
Command System
3.21.9       :SAVE:MEMory:WAVeform
              Syntax
              :SAVE:MEMory:WAVeform <path>
              Description
              Saves the memory waveform data of the oscilloscope to the specified path as a file.
              Parameter
                  Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                  <path>           ASCII String      Refer to Remarks                       -
              Remarks
              <path> includes the file storage location and the filename with a suffix.
              •     The path of the local disk is C:/ and the path of the external storage device can
                    be D:/E:/...
              •     The suffix of the filename is "*.bin", "*.csv", or "*.wfm".
              •     Refer to :SAVE:OVERlap . When you send the command :SAVE:OVERlap ON, if the
                    specified storage location already contains a file with the same filename, the
                    original file will be overwritten.
              •     The filename can contain letters, numbers, and other non-Chinese characters.
                    The length of the filename shall not exceed 16 characters.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              :SAVE:MEMory:WAVeform D:/123.bin /*Saves the memory waveform data
              of the oscilloscope to Disk D, with the filename 123.bin.*/
3.21.10      :SAVE:STATus?
              Syntax
              :SAVE:STATus?
              Description
              Queries the status of the memory.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
240
                                                                                      Command System
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1 (when the saving operation is completed).
                 Example
                 N/A
3.21.11         :SAVE:OVERlap
                 Syntax
                 :SAVE:OVERlap <bool>
                 :SAVE:OVERlap?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries whether to enable or disable the file overwriting function.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}              -
                 Remarks
                 •     1|ON: enables to overwrite the existing file. The existing file with the same name
                       as the file to be saved will be overwritten.
                 •     0|OFF: disables to overwrite the existing file.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :SAVE:OVERlap ON /*Enables to overwrite the existing file.*/
                 :SAVE:OVERlap? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.21.12         :SAVE:PREFix
                 Syntax
                 :SAVE:PREFix <name>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                      241
Command System
              :SAVE:PREFix?
              Description
              Sets or queries the prefix of the filename when saving a file.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                   Default
               <name>            ASCII String     Remarks                                 -
              Remarks
              Each filename consists of the given prefix, appended with an appropriate extension.
              The prefix of the filename mentioned in this command shall not contain the suffix. Its
              prefix can contain letters, numbers, and other non-Chinese characters. The length of
              the prefix shall not exceed 16 characters.
              Return Format
              The query returns the prefix of the filename in strings.
              Example
              :SAVE:PREFix Rigol /*Sets the prefix of the filename to Rigol.*/
              :SAVE:PREFix? /*The query returns Rigol.*/
3.21.13      :SAVe:SMB:SERVerpath
              Syntax
              :SAVe:SMB:SERVerpath <path>
              :SAVe:SMB:SERVerpath?
              Description
              Sets or queries the server path for SMB file sharing.
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                   Default
               <path>            ASCII String     -                                       -
              Remarks
              The format of the server path is "\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\name". Wherein, "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
              indicates the IP address of the computer; "name" indicates the name of the SMB
              shared folder. Note that "name" is only allowed to be named in English letters.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
242
                                                                                         Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the server path of the SMB file sharing in strings.
                 Example
                 :SAVe:SMB:SERVerpath \\172.16.25.77\Share    /*Sets the server path
                 of the SMB file sharing to \\172.16.25.77\Share.*/
                 :SAVe:SMB:SERVerpath? /*The query returns \\172.16.25.77\Share.*/
3.21.14         :SAVe:SMB:USERname
                 Syntax
                 :SAVe:SMB:USERname <name>
                 :SAVe:SMB:USERname?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the user name for SMB file sharing.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <name>              ASCII String        -                               -
                 Remarks
                 The user name shall not contain Chinese characters.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the user name for the SMB file sharing in strings.
                 Example
                 :SAVe:SMB:USERname Rigol /*Sets the user name for SMB file sharing
                 to Rigol.*/
                 :SAVe:SMB:USERname? /*The query returns Rigol.*/
3.21.15         :SAVe:SMB:PASSword
                 Syntax
                 :SAVe:SMB:PASSword <password>
                 :SAVe:SMB:PASSword?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the password of the user name for SMB file sharing.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                    243
Command System
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
               <password>       ASCII String     -                                      -
              Remarks
              The password shall not contain Chinese characters.
              Return Format
              The query returns the password of the user name for SMB file sharing.
              Example
              :SAVe:SMB:PASSword Rigol /*Sets the password of the user name for
              SMB file sharing to Rigol*/
              :SAVe:SMB:PASSword? /*The query returns Rigol.*/
3.21.16      :SAVe:SMB:AUToconnect
              Syntax
              :SAVe:SMB:AUToconnect <bool>
              :SAVe:SMB:AUToconnect?
              Description
              Sets or queries whether to enable or disable auto connection of SMB file sharing at
              bootup.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
               <bool>           Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       OFF
              Remarks
              1: enables auto-connecting SMB file sharing at bootup. 0: disables auto-connecting
              SMB file sharing at bootup.
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              Example
              :SAVe:SMB:AUToconnect ON /*Enables auto-connecting SMB file sharing
              at bootup.*/
              :SAVe:SMB:AUToconnect? /*The query returns 1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
244
                                                                         Command System
3.21.17         :SAVe:SMB:CONNect
                 Syntax
                 :SAVe:SMB:CONNect
                 Description
                 Configures to connect the SMB file sharing.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.21.18         :SAVe:SMB:DISConnect
                 Syntax
                 :SAVe:SMB:DISConnect
                 Description
                 Configures to disconnect the SMB file sharing.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.21.19         :SAVe:SMB:CONState?
                 Syntax
                 :SAVe:SMB:CONState?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                        245
Command System
              Description
              Queries the connection status of the SMB file sharing.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              1: indicates connected; 0: indicates disconnected.
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              Example
              N/A
3.21.20      :LOAD:SETup
              Syntax
              :LOAD:SETup <path>
              Description
              Loads the setup file of the oscilloscope from the specified path.
              Parameter
                  Name             Type             Range                                  Default
                  <path>           ASCII String     Refer to Remarks                       -
              Remarks
              <path> includes the file storage location and the filename with a suffix.
              •     The path of the local disk is C:/ and the path of the external storage device can
                    be D:/E:/...
              •     The suffix of the filename to be loaded is "*.stp".
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              :LOAD:SETup D:/123.stp      /*Loads the setup file "123.stp" from
              the external storage device Disk D.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
246
                                                                                       Command System
3.22            :SEARch Commands
3.22.1          :SEARch:COUNt?
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:COUNt?
                 Description
                 Queries the total number of the search events.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the total number of the search events in integer.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.22.2          :SEARch:STATe
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:STATe <bool>
                 :SEARch:STATe?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the search function; or queries the on/off status of the search
                 function.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}              0|OFF
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :SEARch:STATe ON             /*Enables the search function.*/
                 :SEARch:STATe?               /*The query returns 1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                       247
Command System
3.22.3       :SEARch:MODE
              Syntax
              :SEARch:MODE <value>
              :SEARch:MODE?
              Description
              Sets the search type.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <value>        Discrete          {EDGE|PULSe}                           EDGE
              Remarks
              •     EDGe: selects "Edge" as the search type.
              •     PULSe: selects "Pulse" as the search type.
              Return Format
              The query returns EDGE or PULS.
              Example
              :SEARch:MODE PULSe            /*Selects the search type to "PULSe".*/
              :SEARch:MODE?                 /*The query returns PULS.*/
3.22.4       :SEARch:EVENt
              Syntax
              :SEARch:EVENt <value>
              :SEARch:EVENt?
              Description
              Sets to navigate a search event.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   0 to (the number of searched
                  <value>        Integer                                                  0
                                                   events
              Remarks
              If no search event is found in the current search event table, the query returns 0.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
248
                                                                                       Command System
                 If the parameter <value> is set to 0, then the instrument navigates to the event with
                 the index number 1.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
                 Example
                 :SEARch:EVENt 1                     /*Sets to navigate to Search Event 1.*/
                 :SEARch:EVENt?                      /*The query returns 1.*/
3.22.5          :SEARch:VALue?
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:VALue? <x>
                 Description
                 Queries the time value for the specified Line No. in the marktable.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <x>                 Integer             -                             -
                 Remarks
                 <x> denotes the line number of the marktable.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns a time value.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.22.6          :SEARch:EDGE:SLOPe
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:EDGE:SLOPe <slope>
                 :SEARch:EDGE:SLOPe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the edge for the "Edge" search type.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                    249
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <slope>        Discrete          {POSitive|NEGative|EITHer}             POSitive
              Remarks
              •     POSitive: indicates the rising edge.
              •     NEGative: indicates the falling edge.
              •     EITHer: indicates the rising edge or the falling edge.
              Return Format
              The query returns POS, NEG, or EITH.
              Example
              :SEARch:EDGE:SLOPe NEGative             /*Sets the edge type to NEGative.*/
              :SEARch:EDGE:SLOPe?                     /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.22.7       :SEARch:EDGE:SOURce
              Syntax
              :SEARch:EDGE:SOURce <source>
              :SEARch:EDGE:SOURce?
              Description
              Sets or queries the source for the "Edge" search type.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>       Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
              Example
              :SEARch:EDGE:SOURce CHANnel1                 /*Sets the source for the Edge
              search type to CHANnel1.*/
              :SEARch:EDGE:SOURce?                         /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
250
                                                                                               Command System
3.22.8          :SEARch:EDGE:THReshold
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:EDGE:THReshold <thre>
                 :SEARch:EDGE:THReshold?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the threshold for the "Edge" search type.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                 Default
                                                          (-4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset) to
                  <thre>              Real                                                      0.000V
                                                          (4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset)
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the threshold for the edge search type in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :SEARch:EDGE:THReshold 0.01                        /*Sets the threshold to 0.01
                 V.*/
                 :SEARch:EDGE:THReshold?                          /*The query returns 1.000000E-2.*/
3.22.9          :SEARch:PULSe:POLarity
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:PULSe:POLarity <polarity>
                 :SEARch:PULSe:POLarity?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the polarity for the "Pulse" search type.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                 Default
                  <polarity>          Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}                   POSitive
                 Remarks
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                           251
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns POS or NEG.
              Example
              :SEARch:PULSe:POLarity POSitive                /*Sets the polarity for the
              Pulse search type to POSitive.*/
              :SEARch:PULSe:POLarity?                       /*The query returns POS.*/
3.22.10      :SEARch:PULSe:QUALifier
              Syntax
              :SEARch:PULSe:QUALifier <qualifier>
              :SEARch:PULSe:QUALifier?
              Description
              Sets or queries the search condition for the "Pulse" search type.
              Parameter
                  Name              Type            Range                                  Default
                  <qualifier>       Discrete        {GREater|LESS|GLESs}                   GREater
              Remarks
              •      GREater: the positive/negative pulse width of the input signal is greater than the
                     specified pulse width.
              •      LESS: the positive/negative pulse width of the input signal is smaller than the
                     specified pulse width.
              •      GLESs: the positive/negative pulse width of the input signal is greater than the
                     specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified upper limit of
                     pulse width.
              Return Format
              The query returns GRE, LESS, or GLES.
              Example
              :SEARch:PULSe:QUALifier LESS               /*Sets the search condition for the
              "Pulse" search type to LESS.*/
              :SEARch:PULSe:QUALifier?                       /*The query returns LESS.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
252
                                                                                       Command System
3.22.11         :SEARch:PULSe:SOURce
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:PULSe:SOURce <source>
                 :SEARch:PULSe:SOURce?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the source for the "Pulse" search type.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>            Discrete                                           CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                 Example
                 :SEARch:PULSe:SOURce CHANnel1                 /*Sets the source for the Pulse
                 search type to CHANnel1.*/
                 :SEARch:PULSe:SOURce?                         /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
3.22.12         :SEARch:PULSe:UWIDth
                 Syntax
                 :SEARch:PULSe:UWIDth <width>
                 :SEARch:PULSe:UWIDth?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the upper limit of the pulse width for the "Pulse" search type.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <width>             Real                800 ps to 10 s                 2 us
                 Remarks
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      253
Command System
              Return Format
              The query returns the upper limit of the pulse width in scientific notation.
              Example
              :SEARch:PULSe:UWIDth 1   /*Sets the upper limit of the pulse width
              for the Pulse search type to 1 s.*/
              :SEARch:PULSe:UWIDth?           /*The query returns 1.000000E0.*/
3.22.13      :SEARch:PULSe:LWIDth
              Syntax
              :SEARch:PULSe:LWIDth <width>
              :SEARch:PULSe:LWIDth?
              Description
              Sets or queries the lower limit of the pulse width for the "Pulse" search type.
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <width>           Real              800 ps to 10 s                         1 us
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the lower limit of the pulse width in scientific notation.
              Example
              :SEARch:PULSe:LWIDth 0.2   /*Sets the lower limit of the pulse
              width for the Pulse search type to 200 ms.*/
              :SEARch:PULSe:LWIDth?           /*The query returns 2.000000E-1.*/
3.22.14      :SEARch:PULSe:THReshold
              Syntax
              :SEARch:PULSe:THReshold <thre>
              :SEARch:PULSe:THReshold?
              Description
              Sets or queries the threshold for the "Pulse" search type.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
254
                                                                                             Command System
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                               Default
                                                          (-5 × VerticalScale - OFFSet) to
                  <thre>              Real                                                    0.000 V
                                                          (5 × VerticalScale - OFFSet)
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the threshold for the pulse search type in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :SEARch:PULSe:THReshold 0.01                        /*Sets the threshold to 10
                 mV.*/
                 :SEARch:PULSe:THReshold?                         /*The query returns
                 1.000000E-2.*/
3.23            :NAVigate Commands
3.23.1          :NAVigate:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:ENABle <bool>
                 :NAVigate:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the on/off status of the Navigation function.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                               Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                    0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :NAVigate:ENABle ON              /*Enables the Navigation function.*/
                 :NAVigate:ENABle?                /*The query returns 1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                       DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                        Guide
                                                                                                         255
Command System
3.23.2       :NAVigate:MODE
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:MODE <mode>
              :NAVigate:MODE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the navigation mode.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <mode>         Discrete          {TIME|SEARch|FRAMe}                    TIME
              Remarks
              •     TIME: indicates the time navigation. It is available only when in "YT" time mode.
              •     SEARch: indicates event search navigation. When you enable the navigation
                    function and complete the event search, you can use the navigation combination
                    keys to quickly navigate the specific event in the event mark table.
              •     FRAMe: indicates frame segment navigation. This mode is available only in
                    UltraAcquire acquisition mode. When UltraAcquire is enabled, the Mode is
                    automatically set to "Frame Segment" which cannot be modified.
              The navigation function is available only when the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state
              (acquisition stopped). You can send the :STOP command to set the oscilloscope to
              STOP status.
              Return Format
              The query returnsTIME FRAMeor SEARch.
              Example
              :NAVigate:MODE TIME /*Sets the navigation mode to Time navigation.*/
              :NAVigate:MODE? /*The query returns TIME.*/
3.23.3       :NAVigate:TIME:SPEed
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:TIME:SPEed <speed>
              :NAVigate:TIME:SPEed?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
256
                                                                                     Command System
                 Description
                 Sets the speed of playing the waveforms in time navigation mode.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                        Default
                     <speed>          Discrete            {HIGH|NORMal|LOW}            NORMal
                 Remarks
                 •     HIGH: indicates playing the waveforms at a high speed.
                 •     NORMal: indicates playing the waveforms at a normal speed.
                 •     LOW: indicates playing the waveforms at a low speed.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns HIGH, NORMal, or LOW.
                 Example
                 :NAVigate:TIME:SPEed LOW /*Sets to play the waveforms in time
                 navigation mode at a low speed.*/
                 :NAVigate:TIME:SPEed? /*The query returns LOW.*/
3.23.4          :NAVigate:TIME:PLAY
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:TIME:PLAY <bool>
                 :NAVigate:TIME:PLAY?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries whether to play the waveforms in time navigation mode.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                        Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}             0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 •     1|ON: starts playing the waveforms.
                 •     0|OFF: stops playing the waveforms.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                    257
Command System
              Example
              :NAVigate:TIME:PLAY ON /*Sets to play the waveforms in time
              navigation.*/
              :NAVigate:TIME:PLAY? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.23.5       :NAVigate:TIME:END
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:TIME:END
              Description
              Sets to navigate to the end waveforms (waveforms ending at the rightmost end of
              screen) in time navigation mode.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.23.6       :NAVigate:TIME:STARt
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:TIME:STARt
              Description
              Sets to navigate to the start waveform (waveform starting at the leftmost end of
              screen) in time navigation mode.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
258
                                                                                     Command System
                 Example
                 N/A
3.23.7          :NAVigate:TIME:NEXT
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:TIME:NEXT
                 Description
                 Sets to play forward the waveform in time navigation mode.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.23.8          :NAVigate:TIME:BACK
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:TIME:BACK
                 Description
                 Sets to play backward the waveform in time navigation mode.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                    259
Command System
3.23.9       :NAVigate:SEARch:END
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:SEARch:END
              Description
              Sets to navigate to the last event.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.23.10      :NAVigate:SEARch:STARt
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:SEARch:STARt
              Description
              Sets to navigate to the first event.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.23.11      :NAVigate:SEARch:NEXT
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:SEARch:NEXT
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
260
                                                                                 Command System
                 Description
                 Sets to navigate to the next event.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.23.12         :NAVigate:SEARch:BACK
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:SEARch:BACK
                 Description
                 Sets to navigate to the previous event.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.23.13         :NAVigate:FRAMe:DISPlay:MODE
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:DISPlay:MODE <mode>
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:DISPlay:MODE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the display mode in Frame Segment navigation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.              DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                               Guide
                                                                                                261
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                                                   {ADJacent|OVERlay|WATerfall|
                  <mode>          Discrete                                                 -
                                                   PERSpective|MOSaic}
              Remarks
              •     ADJacent: indicates the adjacent display. Waveform segments are shown in
                    adjacent display, with each segment shown next to the previous segment. In this
                    mode, a maximum of 100 frames of waveforms can be displayed on the screen
                    at a time.
              •     OVERlay: indicates the overlay display. All the captured waveform segments are
                    overwritten to display as one single segment of the waveform. In this mode, a
                    maximum of 100 frames of waveforms can be displayed on the screen at a time.
              •     WATerfall: indicates the waterfall display. It displays the captured waveform
                    segments in a cascaded display order. In this mode, a maximum of 100 frames of
                    waveforms can be displayed on the screen at a time.
              •     PERSpective: indicates the perspective display. The waveform segments are
                    displayed in the ladder-like form, with each segment being arranged above
                    another with a certain perspective (angle), moving up like a rising slope. In this
                    mode, a maximum of 100 frames of waveforms can be displayed on the screen
                    at a time.
              •     MOSaic: indicates the mosaic display. The whole waveform view is divided into
                    several blocks, and each waveform segment is displayed in each block in
                    sequence. In this mode, a maximum of 80 frames of waveforms can be displayed
                    on the screen at a time.
              Return Format
              The query returns ADJ, OVER, WAT, PERS, or MOS.
              Example
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:DISPlay:MODE ADJacent /*Sets the display mode to
              ADJacent in Frame Segment navigation.*/
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:DISPlay:MODE? /*The query returns ADJ.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
262
                                                                                       Command System
3.23.14         :NAVigate:FRAMe:END:FRAMe
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:END:FRAMe <frame>
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:END:FRAMe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the end frame in Frame Segment navigation mode.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <frame>             Integer             -                              -
                 Remarks
                 The range of the end frame is from Start Frame to the maximum number of the
                 frames acquired in UltraAcquire acquisition mode. You can send
                 the :ACQuire:ULTRa:MAXFrame command to query the maximum number of frames
                 that can be set for UltraAcquire acquisition mode.
                 When you click or tap the Play key, it plays from the "Start Frame". The number of
                 frames that can be displayed on the current screen page is (End Frame - Start Frame
                 + 1). For example, if you set Start Frame to 3 and End Frame to 9, it will play from the
                 3rd frame and displays 7 frames on one screen page.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
                 Example
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:END:FRAMe 8 /*Sets the end frame in Frame Segment
                 navigation to 8.*/
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:END:FRAMe? /*The query returns 8.*/
3.23.15         :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt:FRAMe
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt:FRAMe <frame>
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt:FRAMe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the start frame in Frame Segment navigation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                      263
Command System
              Parameter
               Name              Type             Range                                   Default
               <frame>           Integer          -                                       -
              Remarks
              When you click or tap the Play key, it plays from the "Start Frame". The number of
              frames that can be displayed on the current screen page is (End Frame - Start Frame
              + 1). For example, if you set Start Frame to 3 and End Frame to 9, it will play from the
              3rd frame and displays 7 frames on one screen page.
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer.
              Example
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt:FRAMe 3 /*Sets the start frame in Frame
              Segment navigation to 3.*/
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt:FRAMe? /*The query returns 3.*/
3.23.16      :NAVigate:FRAMe:END
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:END
              Description
              Sets to play the final page in Frame Segment navigation mode.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.23.17      :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:STARt
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
264
                                                                                    Command System
                 Description
                 Sets to play the first page in Frame Segment navigation mode.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.23.18         :NAVigate:FRAMe:NEXT
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:NEXT
                 Description
                 Sets to play the next page in Frame Segment navigation mode.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.23.19         :NAVigate:FRAMe:BACK
                 Syntax
                 :NAVigate:FRAMe:BACK
                 Description
                 Sets to play the previous page in Frame Segment navigation mode.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.               DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                Guide
                                                                                                 265
Command System
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.23.20      :NAVigate:FRAMe:PLAY
              Syntax
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:PLAY <bool>
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:PLAY?
              Description
              Sets or queries whether to play the waveforms in Frame Segment navigation mode.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type            Range                                  Default
                  <bool>         Bool            {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              •     1|ON: starts playing the waveforms.
              •     0|OFF: stops playing the waveforms.
              During playing in Frame Segment navigation mode, you are not allowed to set the
              Start Frame and the End Frame.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:PLAY ON /*Sets to play the waveforms in Frame
              Segment navigatio mode.*/
              :NAVigate:FRAMe:PLAY? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.24         :SYSTem Commands
              The :SYSTem commands are used to set the system-related parameters.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
266
                                                                                        Command System
3.24.1          :SYSTem:AOUTput
                 Syntax
                 :SYSTem:AOUTput <auxoutput>
                 :SYSTem:AOUTput?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the type of the signal output from the rear-panel [AUX OUT]
                 connector.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <auxoutput>      Discrete            {TOUT|PFAil}                    TOUT
                 Remarks
                 •     TOUT: after you select this type, the oscilloscope initiates a trigger and then a
                       signal which reflects the current capture rate of the oscilloscope can be output
                       from the connector.
                 •     PFAil: after you select this type, a pulse signal will be output from the connector
                       once the oscilloscope detects a successful or failed event.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns TOUT or PFA.
                 Example
                 :SYSTem:AOUTput PFAil   /*Sets the signal type to PFAil.*/
                 :SYSTem:AOUTput?      /*The query returns PFA.*/
3.24.2          :SYSTem:BEEPer
                 Syntax
                 :SYSTem:BEEPer <bool>
                 :SYSTem:BEEPer?
                 Description
                 Turns on or off the beeper or queries the on/off status of the beeper.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                0|OFF
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                           267
Command System
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :SYSTem:BEEPer ON           /*Enables the beeper.*/
              :SYSTem:BEEPer?             /*The query returns 1.*/
3.24.3       :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
              Description
              Queries and clears the error queue message.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query is in <Message Number>,<Message Content> format. Wherein, <Message
              Number> is an integer; <Message Content> is a double-quoted ASCII string. For
              example, -113,"Undefined header; command cannot be found".
              Example
              N/A
3.24.4       :SYSTem:PON
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:PON <power_on>
              :SYSTem:PON?
              Description
              Sets or queries the configuration type recalled by the oscilloscope when it is powered
              on again after power-off.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
268
                                                                                       Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <power_on>       Discrete            {LATest|DEFault}               DEFault
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns LAT or DEF.
                 Example
                 :SYSTem:PON LATest        /*Sets the oscilloscope to recall Last
                 value after it is powered on again.*/
                 :SYSTem:PON?             /*The query returns LAT.*/
3.24.5          :SYSTem:PSTatus
                 Syntax
                 :SYSTem:PSTatus <sat>
                 :SYSTem:PSTatus?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the power status of the oscilloscope.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <sat>            Discrete            {DEFault|OPEN}                 OPEN
                 Remarks
                 •     DEFault: after the oscilloscope is powered on, you need to press the Power key
                       on the front panel to start the oscilloscope.
                 •     OPEN: after the oscilloscope is powered on, it starts directly. You do not have to
                       press the Power key.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns DEF or OPEN.
                 Example
                 :SYSTem:PSTatus DEFault                        /*Sets the power status to DEFault.*/
                 :SYSTem:PSTatus?                              /*The query returns DEF.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      269
Command System
3.24.6       :SYSTem:RAMount?
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:RAMount?
              Description
              Queries the number of analog channels of the current instrument.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the number of analog channels of the current instrument in integer.
              Example
              N/A
3.24.7       :SYSTem:RESet
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:RESet
              Description
              Resets the system to power on.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              N/A
3.24.8       :SYSTem:SETup
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:SETup <setup_data>
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
270
                                                                                         Command System
                 :SYSTem:SETup?
                 Description
                 Sends or reads the data stream of the system setup file.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                            Default
                     <setup_data>     Binary              Refer to Remarks                 -
                 Remarks
                 •      <setup_data> is a binary data block, which consists of the TMC data block
                        header and setup data.
                        -    The format of the TMC data block header is #NX…X. Wherein, # is the start
                             identifier of the data stream; the N-digit data "X...X" (N≤9) following the
                             start identifier indicate the length of the data stream (the number of bytes).
                             For example, 9000002506
                             Wherein, N is 9, 000002506 following it represents that the data stream
                             contains 2506 bytes of effective data.
                        -    The setup data are expressed in ASCII format.
                 •      When sending the command, directly place the data stream after the command
                        string, then complete the whole sending process in one time. When reading the
                        data stream, ensure that there is enough buffer space to receive the data stream;
                        otherwise, errors might occur in reading the program.
                 Return Format
                 N/A
                 Example
                 N/A
3.24.9          :SYSTem:LOCKed
                 Syntax
                 :SYSTem:LOCKed <bool>
                 :SYSTem:LOCKed?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the front-panel key operation and touch screen operation; queries
                 whether the front-panel key operation and touch screen operation are locked.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                           271
Command System
              Parameter
               Name              Type              Range                                  Default
               <bool>            Bool              {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                       0|OFF
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :SYSTem:LOCKed ON          /*Disables the front-panel key operation
              and touch screen operation.*/
              :SYSTem:LOCKed?            /*The query returns 1.*/
3.24.10      :SYSTem:MODules?
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:MODules?
              Description
              Queries the hardware modules.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1,0,0,0,0. The first figure indicates LA; the second figure indicates
              DG; and the others are not defined currently. 1 indicates available, and 0 indicates not
              available.
              Example
              N/A
3.24.11      :SYSTem:AUToscale
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:AUToscale <bool>
              :SYSTem:AUToscale?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
272
                                                                                      Command System
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the function of the Auto menu; or queries the on/off status of the
                 Auto menu.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                1|ON
                 Remarks
                 •     You can send this command or use the menu key to disable the function of the
                       AUTO key.
                 •     After the function of the AUTO key is disabled, you cannot perform the Auto
                       Scale operation.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :SYSTem:AUToscale ON               /*Enables the function of the front-panel
                 AUTO key.*/
                 :SYSTem:AUToscale?                 /*The query returns 1.*/
3.24.12         :SYSTem:GAMount?
                 Syntax
                 :SYSTem:GAMount?
                 Description
                 Queries the number of grids in the horizontal direction of the screen.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the number of grids in integer. For this oscilloscope, the query
                 returns a fixed value 10.
                 Example
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                      273
Command System
3.24.13      :SYSTem:VERSion?
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:VERSion?
              Description
              Queries the version number of the SCPI used by the system.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns the SCPI version number in strings.
              Example
              :SYSTem:VERSion?        /*The query returns 3.0 */
3.24.14      :SYSTem:DGSTatus?
              Syntax
              :SYSTem:DGSTatus?
              Description
              Queries whether the DG module exists.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :SYSTem:DGSTatus? /*The query returns 1 if the instrument has
              installed the DG module; otherwise, it returns 0.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
274
                                                                                     Command System
3.24.15         :SYSTem:KEYBOARDCheck?
                 Syntax
                 :SYSTem:KEYBOARDCheck?
                 Description
                 Queries the status of the keyboard.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns true or false.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.25            :SOURce Commands
                 :SOURce commands are used to set AFG parameters.
                 This series oscilloscope has a standard built-in 25 MHz AFG, which integrates the
                 signal source and the oscilloscope into one.
                 NOTE
                 The commands are only available for DHO914S and DHO924S.
3.25.1          :SOURce:OUTPut:STATe
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:OUTPut:STATe <bool>
                 :SOURce:OUTPut:STATe?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the channel output; or queries the channel output status.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                        Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}             0|OFF
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                     275
Command System
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 0 or 1.
              Examples
              :SOURce:OUTPut:STATe ON /*Enables the channel output for AFG.*/
              :SOURce:OUTPut:STATe? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.25.2       :SOURce:FUNCtion
              Syntax
              :SOURce:FUNCtion <wave>
              :SOURce:FUNCtion?
              Description
              Sets or queries the function of the basic waveform.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                   Default
                                                 {SINusoid|SQUare|RAMP|DC|
               <wave>           Discrete                                                 SINusoid
                                                 NOISe|ARB}
              Remarks
              The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of this series can output a variety
              of basic waveforms, including Sine, Square, Ramp, DC, Noise, and Arb.
              Return Format
              The query returns SIN, SQU, RAMP, DC, NOIS, or ARB.
              Example
              :SOURce:FUNCtion SQUare /*Sets the output waveform type to Square.*/
              :SOURce:FUNCtion? /*The query returns SQU.*/
3.25.3       :SOURce:FREQuency
              Syntax
              :SOURce:FREQuency <freq>
              :SOURce:FREQuency?
              Description
              Sets or queries the frequency of basic waveforms.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
276
                                                                                      Command System
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                        Default
                     <freq>           Real                Refer to Remarks             1 kHz
                 Remarks
                 •      Sine: 2 mHz to 25 MHz
                 •      Square: 2 mHz to 15 MHz
                 •      Ramp: 2 mHz to 150 kHz
                 •      Arb: 2 mHz to 10 MHz
                 •      DC and Noise: no frequency parameter
                 You can use :SOURce:FUNCtion to set or query the basic wave type.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the frequency in scientific notation, for example, 2.000000E+5.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:FREQuency 1000 /*Sets the frequency of the basic waveform
                 to 1 kHz.*/
                 :SOURce:FREQuency? /*The query returns 1.000000E+3.*/
3.25.4          :SOURce:PHASe
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:PHASe <phase>
                 :SOURce:PHASe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the starting phase of basic waveforms.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                        Default
                     <phase>          Real                0° to 360°                   0°
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the starting phase in scientific notation. For example, the query
                 might return 1.0000000000E+01, indicating that the starting phase is 10°.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                       277
Command System
              Example
              :SOURce:PHASe 10 /*Sets the starting phase of basic waveforms to
              10°.*/
              :SOURce:PHASe? /*The query returns 1.0000000000E+01.*/
3.25.5       :SOURce:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry
              Syntax
              :SOURce:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry <symm>
              :SOURce:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry?
              Description
              Sets or queries the symmetry of Ramp.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
               <symm>           Real             0% to 100%                             50%
              Remarks
              This command is available only when the waveform function (:SOURce:FUNCtion) is
              set to Ramp.
              Symmetry is defined as the percentage of the amount of time Ramp wave is rising in
              the period.
                   t                      Symmetry=t/T*100%
                   T
              Return Format
              The query returns the symmetry in scientific notation. For example, the query might
              return 5.5000000000E+01, indicating that the Ramp symmetry is 55%.
              Example
              :SOURce:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry 55 /*Sets the symmetry of Ramp to
              55%.*/
              :SOURce:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry? /*The query returns 5.5000000000E
              +01.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
278
                                                                                      Command System
3.25.6          :SOURce:FUNCtion:SQUare:DUTY
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:FUNCtion:SQUare:DUTY <percent>
                 :SOURce:FUNCtion:SQUare:DUTY?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the duty cycle of the square wave generated by the AFG function.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <percent>           Real                0 to 100                      50
                 Remarks
                 This command is valid only when the wave type is set to "Square". You can
                 use :SOURce:FUNCtion to set or query the waveform type.
                 Square duty cycle is the percentage of time that the square wave is at a high level
                 over the period of the square wave.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the duty cycle in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:FUNCtion:SQUare:DUTY 55 /*Sets the square duty cycle to
                 55%.*/
                 :SOURce:FUNCtion:SQUare:DUTY? /*The query returns 5.5000000000E
                 +01.*/
3.25.7          :SOURce:VOLTage:AMPLitude
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:VOLTage:AMPLitude <amp>
                 :SOURce:VOLTage:AMPLitude
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the amplitude of basic waveforms. The default unit is V.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <amp>               Real                Refer to Remarks              6V
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                       279
Command System
              Remarks
              The amplitude range of basic waveforms is related to the frequency:
              •      2 mV to 10 V (frequency ≤ 10 MHz)
              •      2 mV to 5 V (frequency > 10 MHz)
              You can use :SOURce:FREQuency to set or query the frequency of the basic waveform.
              Return Format
              The query returns the amplitude in scientific notation. The unit is V.
              Example
              :SOURce:VOLTage:AMPLitude 1 /*Sets the amplitude to 1 V.*/
              :SOURce:VOLTage:AMPLitude? /*The query returns 1.0000000000E+00.*/
3.25.8       :SOURce:VOLTage:OFFSet
              Syntax
              :SOURce:VOLTage:OFFSet <offset>
              :SOURce:VOLTage:OFFSet?
              Description
              Sets or queries the offset of basic waveforms. The default unit is V.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                  Default
                  <offset>        Real              Refer to Remarks                       0V
              Remarks
              The offset range of basic waveforms is related to the amplitude:
              Offset range = ± (maximum amplitude that can be set - current amplitude)/2
              For example,
              •      If the frequency of the current basic waveform is 5 MHz, the maximum
                     amplitude that can be set is 10 V, and the set amplitude is 6 V,
                     then the offset range is ±(10 V - 6 V)/2 = ±2 V.
              •      If the frequency of the current basic waveform is 15 MHz, the maximum
                     amplitude that can be set is 5 V, and the set amplitude is 3 V,
                     then the offset range is ±(5 V - 3 V)/2 = ±1 V.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
280
                                                                                        Command System
                 You can use :SOURce:VOLTage:AMPLitude to set or query the amplitude of the basic
                 waveform.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the offset in scientific notation. The unit is V.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:VOLTage:OFFSet 0.2 /*Sets the waveform offset to 200 mV.*/
                 :SOURce:VOLTage:OFFSet? /*The query returns 2.0000000000E-01.*/
3.25.9          :SOURce:MOD:STATe
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:MOD:STATe <bool>
                 :SOURce:MOD:STATe?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the modulation output; or queries the modulation output status.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 1 or 0.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:MOD:STATe /*Enables the modulation output*/
                 :SOURce:MOD:STATe? /*The query returns 1.*/
3.25.10         :SOURce:MOD:TYPe
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:MOD:TYPe <type>
                 :SOURce:MOD:TYPe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the modulation type.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       281
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <type>         Discrete          {AM|FM|PM}                             AM
              Remarks
              •     AM: amplitude modulation. The amplitude of the carrier waveform is varied by
                    the voltage of the modulating waveform.
              •     FM: frequency modulation. The frequency of the carrier waveform is varied by
                    the voltage of the modulating waveform.
              •     PM: phase modulation. The phase of the carrier waveform is varied by the
                    voltage of the modulating waveform.
              Return Format
              The query returns AM, FM, or PM.
              Example
              :SOURce:MOD:TYPe AM /*Sets the modulation type to AM*/
              :SOURce:MOD:TYPe? /*The query returns AM.*/
3.25.11      :SOURce:MOD:AM:DEPTh
              Syntax
              :SOURce:MOD:AM:DEPTh <depth>
              :SOURce:MOD:AM:DEPTh?
              Description
              Sets or queries the modulation depth of AM.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type              Range                                  Default
                  <depth>        Real              0% to 120%                             100%
              Remarks
              Modulation depth is a percentage that represents the amplitude variation.
              •     At 0% depth, the amplitude is one-half of the carrier's amplitude setting.
              •     At 100% depth, the amplitude is identical to the carrier's amplitude setting.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
282
                                                                                       Command System
                 •      At greater than 100% depth, envelop distortion will occur which must be
                        avoided in actual circuits. The instrument will not exceed 2.5 Vpp on the output
                        (into a 50 Ω load).
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the AM modulation depth in scientific notation. For example, the
                 query might return 5.0000000000E+01, indicating that the modulation depth is 50%.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:MOD:AM:DEPTh 50 /*Sets the modulation depth of AM to 50%.*/
                 :SOURce:MOD:AM:DEPTh? /*The query returns 5.0000000000E+01.*/
3.25.12         :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FREQuency
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FREQuency <freq>
                 :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FREQuency?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the modulation frequency of AM.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <freq>           Real                2 mHz to 1 MHz                 100 Hz
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the AM modulation frequency in scientific notation. For example,
                 the query might return 1.5000000000E+02, indicating that the modulation frequency
                 is 150 Hz.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FREQuency 150 /*Sets the modulation
                 frequency of AM to 150 Hz.*/
                 :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FREQuency? /*The query returns 1.5000000000E
                 +02.*/
3.25.13         :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion <function>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                      283
Command System
              :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
              Description
              Sets or queries the modulation waveform of AM.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                                                  {SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|
                  <function>     Discrete                                                SINusoid
                                                  UPRamp|DNRamp|NOISe}
              Remarks
              •      SINusoid: sine wave.
              •      SQUare: square with 50% duty cycle.
              •      TRIangle: triangle with 50% symmetry
              •      UPRamp: UpRamp with 100% symmetry.
              •      DNRamp: DnRamp with 0% symmetry.
              •      NOISe: noise-white gaussian noise.
              Return Format
              The query returns SIN, SQU, TRI, UPR, DNR, and NOIS.
              Example
              :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion SQUare /*Sets the modulation
              waveform of AM to Square.*/
              :SOURce:MOD:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion? /*The query returns SQU.*/
3.25.14      :SOURce:MOD:FM:DEViation
              Syntax
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:DEViation <deviation>
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:DEViation?
              Description
              Sets or queries the frequency deviation of FM.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                                                  2 mHz to the current carrier
                  <deviation>    Real                                                    1 kHz
                                                  frequency
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
284
                                                                                       Command System
                 Remarks
                 •      Frequency deviation represents the peak variation in frequency of the modulated
                        waveform from the carrier frequency.
                 •      The carrier frequency plus the deviation must be less than or equal to the
                        selected carrier's maximum frequency plus 1 kHz.
                 •      The ranges of different carrier frequencies (:SOURce:FREQuency) vary in different
                        modulation modes.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the frequency deviation in scientific notation. For example, the
                 query might return 1.0000000000E+02, indicating that the frequency deviation is 100
                 Hz.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:MOD:FM:DEViation 100 /*Sets the frequency deviation of FM
                 to 100 Hz.*/
                 :SOURce:MOD:FM:DEViation? /*The query returns 1.0000000000E+02.*/
3.25.15         :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FREQuency
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FREQuency <freq>
                 :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FREQuency?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the modulation frequency of FM.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <freq>           Real                2 mHz to 1 MHz                 100 Hz
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the FM modulation frequency in scientific notation. For example,
                 the query might return 1.5000000000E+02, indicating that the modulation frequency
                 is 150 Hz.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                      285
Command System
              Example
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FREQuency 150 /*Sets the modulation
              frequency of FM to 150 Hz.*/
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FREQuency? /*The query returns 1.5000000000E
              +02.*/
3.25.16      :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion
              Syntax
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion <function>
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
              Description
              Sets or queries the modulation waveform of FM.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                                                  {SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|
                  <function>     Discrete                                                SINusoid
                                                  UPRamp|DNRamp|NOISe}
              Remarks
              •      SINusoid: sine wave.
              •      SQUare: square with 50% duty cycle.
              •      TRIangle: triangle with 50% symmetry
              •      UPRamp: UpRamp with 100% symmetry.
              •      DNRamp: DnRamp with 0% symmetry.
              •      NOISe: noise-white gaussian noise.
              Return Format
              The query returns SIN, SQU, TRI, UPR, DNR, and NOIS.
              Example
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion SQUare /*Sets the modulation
              waveform of FM to Square.*/
              :SOURce:MOD:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion? /*The query returns SQU.*/
3.25.17      :SOURce:MOD:PM:DEViation
              Syntax
              :SOURce:MOD:PM:DEViation <deviation>
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
286
                                                                                     Command System
                 :SOURce:MOD:PM:DEViation?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the phase deviation of PM.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                       Default
                  <deviation>         Real                0° to 360°                  90°
                 Remarks
                 Phase deviation represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform
                 from the carrier waveform.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the PM phase deviation in scientific notation. For example, the
                 query might return 5.0000000000E+01, indicating that the phase deviation is 50°.
                 Example
                 :SOURce:MOD:PM:DEViation 50 /*Sets the phase deviation of PM to
                 50°.*/
                 :SOURce:MOD:PM:DEViation? /*The query returns 5.0000000000E+01.*/
3.25.18         :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FREQuency
                 Syntax
                 :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FREQuency <freq>
                 :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FREQuency?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the modulation frequency of PM.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                       Default
                  <freq>              Real                2 mHz to 1 MHz              100 Hz
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the PM modulation frequency in scientific notation. For example,
                 the query might return 1.5000000000E+02, indicating that the modulation frequency
                 is 150 Hz.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                     287
Command System
              Example
              :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FREQuency 150 /*Sets the modulation
              frequency of PM to 150 Hz.*/
              :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FREQuency? /*The query returns 1.5000000000E
              +02.*/
3.25.19      :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion
              Syntax
              :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion <function>
              :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
              Description
              Sets or queries the modulation waveform of PM.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                                                  {SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|
                  <function>     Discrete                                                SINusoid
                                                  UPRamp|DNRamp|NOISe}
              Remarks
              •      SINusoid: sine wave.
              •      SQUare: square with 50% duty cycle.
              •      TRIangle: triangle with 50% symmetry
              •      UPRamp: UpRamp with 100% symmetry.
              •      DNRamp: DnRamp with 0% symmetry.
              •      NOISe: noise-white gaussian noise.
              Return Format
              The query returns SIN, SQU, TRI, UPR, DNR, and NOIS.
              Example
              :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion SQUare /*Sets the modulation
              waveform of PM to Square.*/
              :SOURce:MOD:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion? /*The query returns SQU.*/
3.26         :TIMebase Commands
              :TIMebase commands are used to set the horizontal system. For example, you can
              enable the Zoom mode or set the horizontal time base mode.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
288
                                                                                              Command System
                 Horizontal Time Base Mode
                 •     YT Mode: By default, this series oscilloscope uses the YT mode for waveform
                       display window. In YT mode, Y-axis indicates the Voltage and X-axis indicates the
                       Time.
                 •     XY Mode: In XY mode, both the X-axis and Y-axis indicate voltage. The XY mode
                       converts the oscilloscope from a "Voltage-Time" display to a "Voltage-Voltage"
                       display using two input channels. The XY mode can be used to measure the
                       phase deviation occurred when the signal under test passes through a circuit
                       network.
                 •     Roll Mode: The roll mode causes the waveform to move across the screen from
                       right to left. It allows you to view the acquired data without waiting for a
                       complete acquisition. The Roll mode is automatically enabled when the
                       horizontal time base is set to 50 ms/div or slower.
                        TIP
                        -      If the Zoom mode is currently turned on, enabling the roll mode automatically turns
                               off the Zoom mode.
                        -      The following functions are not available when the roll mode is enabled: To Adjust
                               the Horizontal Position (available when the oscilloscope run state is STOP), Zoom
                               Mode (Delayed Sweep), Triggering the Oscilloscope, Protocol Decoding, Pass/Fail
                               Test, Waveform Recording and Playing, Persistence Time, XY Mode, and Average.
3.26.1          :TIMebase:DELay:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:DELay:ENABle <bool>
                 :TIMebase:DELay:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Turns on or off the delayed sweep; or queries the on/off status of the delayed sweep.
                 Parameter
                     Name              Type               Range                                 Default
                     <bool>            Bool               {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                      0|OFF
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                          DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                           Guide
                                                                                                               289
Command System
              Remarks
              Delayed sweep can be used to enlarge a length of waveform horizontally to view
              waveform details.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :TIMebase:DELay:ENABle ON            /*Enables the delayed sweep.*/
              :TIMebase:DELay:ENABle?              /*The query returns 1.*/
3.26.2       :TIMebase:DELay:OFFSet
              Syntax
              :TIMebase:DELay:OFFSet <offset>
              :TIMebase:DELay:OFFSet?
              Description
              Sets or queries the offset of the delayed time base.
              Parameter
               Name               Type            Range                                  Default
                                                  -(LeftTime - DelayRange/2) to
               <offset>           Real                                                   0
                                                  (RightTime - DelayRange/2)
              Remarks
              LeftTime = 5 × MainScale - MainOffset
              RightTime = 5 × MainScale + MainOffset
              DelayRange = 10 × DelayScale
              Wherein, MainScale indicates the current main time base scale, MainOffset indicates
              the current main time base offset, and
              DelayScale indicates the current delay time base scale.
              Return Format
              The query returns the offset of the delayed time base in scientific notation.
              Example
              :TIMebase:DELay:OFFSet 0.000002             /*Sets the offset of the delayed
              time base to 2 μs.*/
              :TIMebase:DELay:OFFSet?                     /*The query returns 2.000000E-6.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
290
                                                                                        Command System
3.26.3          :TIMebase:DELay:SCALe
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:DELay:SCALe <scale>
                 :TIMebase:DELay:SCALe?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the scale of the delayed time base. The default unit is s/div.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                             Default
                     <scale>          Real                Refer toRemarks                   -
                 Remarks
                 •      The maximum value of the parameter <scale> is the current scale of the main
                        time base.
                 •      The delayed time base scale can only be the maximum value or the values
                        acquired by reducing the maximum value at 1-2-5 step. If the minimum value
                        calculated according to the above formula is not one of the settable values, take
                        the minimum settable value that is greater than the minimum value calculated.
                 •      The default value of the delayed time base scale is determined by the scale in
                        Main mode and its value is the next scale value in Main mode.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the scale of the delayed time base in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :TIMebase:DELay:SCALe 0.00000005   /*Sets the scale of the delayed
                 time base to 50 ns/div.*/
                 :TIMebase:DELay:SCALe?           /*The query returns 5.000000E-8.*/
3.26.4          :TIMebase[:MAIN][:OFFSet]
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase[:MAIN][:OFFSet] <offset>
                 :TIMebase[:MAIN][:OFFSet]?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the offset of the main time base. The default unit is s.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         291
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                  Default
                  <offset>        Real              Refer to Remarks                       0
              Remarks
              •      In RUN state, the offset range of the main time base is as follows:
                     MainLeftTime = -5 x MainScale
                     When MainScale ≤ 10 ms, MainRightTime = 1 s
                     When 10 ms < MainScale < 10 s, MainRightTime = 100 x MainScale
                     When MainScale < 200 s and MainScale ≥ 10 s, MainRightTime = 1 ks
                     When MainScale ≥ 200s, MainRightTime = 5 x MainScale
                     MainRightTime indicates the maximum offset value of the main time base;
                     MainLeftTime indicates the minimum offset value of the main time base;
                     MainScale is the current scale of the main time base.
              •      In Stop state, the offset range of the main time base is the same as that of the
                     memory sampling.
              Return Format
              The query returns the offset of the main time base in scientific notation.
              Example
              :TIMebase:MAIN:OFFSet 0.0002             /*Sets the offset of the main time
              base to 200 μs.*/
              :TIMebase:MAIN:OFFSet?                   /*The query returns 2.000000E-4.*/
3.26.5       :TIMebase[:MAIN]:SCALe
              Syntax
              :TIMebase[:MAIN]:SCALe <scale>
              :TIMebase[:MAIN]:SCALe?
              Description
              Sets or queries the main time base scale.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type              Range                                  Default
                  <scale>         Real              Refer to Remarks                       5 ns/div
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
292
                                                                                       Command System
                 Remarks
                 The range of <scale> is related to the bandwidth of the oscilloscope and the
                 horizontal time base mode.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the main time base scale in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :TIMebase:MAIN:SCALe 0.0002                   /*Sets the main time base scale to
                 200 μs/div.*/
                 :TIMebase:MAIN:SCALe?                           /*The query returns 2.000000E-4.*/
3.26.6          :TIMebase:MODE
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:MODE <mode>
                 :TIMebase:MODE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the horizontal time base mode.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <mode>           Discrete            {MAIN|XY|ROLL}                 MAIN
                 Remarks
                 •     MAIN: indicates the current time base mode. When you send the :TIMebase:
                       MODE MAINcommand, the time base is set to YT mode.
                 •     XY: indicates the XY mode. After performing the command :TIMebase:MODE XY
                       to configure the XY mode, you can send the query command:TIMebase:MODE?
                       to query the time base mode. The query returns MAIN.
                 •     ROLL: roll mode.
                 For different time base modes, refer to Horizontal Time Base Mode.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns MAIN or ROLL.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      293
Command System
              Example
              :TIMebase:MODE ROLL            /*Sets the horizontal time base mode to
              ROLL.*/
              :TIMebase:MODE?             /*The query returns ROLL.*/
3.26.7       :TIMebase:HREFerence:MODE
              Syntax
              :TIMebase:HREFerence:MODE <href>
              :TIMebase:HREFerence:MODE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the horizontal reference mode.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                  Default
                  <href>          Discrete         {CENTer|LB|RB|TRIG|USER}               CENTer
              Remarks
              •      CENTer: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will
                     be expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the screen center.
              •      LB: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be
                     expanded or compressed relative to the left border of the screen.
              •      RB: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be
                     expanded or compressed relative to the right border of the screen.
              •      TRIG: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be
                     expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the trigger position.
              •      USER: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be
                     expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the user-defined reference
                     position.
              Return Format
              The query returns CENT, LB, RB, TRIG, or USER.
              Example
              :TIMebase:HREFerence:MODE TRIG        /*Sets the horizontal
              reference mode to trigger position.*/
              :TIMebase:HREFerence:MODE?            /*The query returns TRIG.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
294
                                                                                          Command System
3.26.8          :TIMebase:HREFerence:POSition
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:HREFerence:POSition <pos>
                 :TIMebase:HREFerence:POSition?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the user-defined reference position when the waveforms are
                 expanded or compressed horizontally.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <pos>               Integer             -500 to 500                      0
                 Remarks
                 When <pos> is set to -500, the reference position is the leftmost side of the screen.
                 When <pos> is set to 500, the reference position is the rightmost side of the screen.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer ranging from -500 to 500.
                 Example
                 :TIMebase:HREFerence:POSition 60                    /*Sets the user-defined
                 reference position to 60.*/
                 :TIMebase:HREFerence:POSition?                              /*The query returns
                 60.*/
3.26.9          :TIMebase:VERNier
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:VERNier <bool>
                 :TIMebase:VERNier?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the fine adjustment function of the horizontal scale; or queries the
                 on/off status of the fine adjustment function of the horizontal scale.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                 0|OFF
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     295
Command System
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :TIMebase:VERNier ON             /*Sets the fine adjustment function
              of the horizontal scale to ON.*/
              :TIMebase:VERNier?                /*The query returns 1.*/
3.26.10      :TIMebase:HOTKeys
              Syntax
              :TIMebase:HOTKeys <action>
              Description
              Sets the running status.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                  Default
                  <action>        Discrete         {STOP|RUN|SINGle}                      -
              Remarks
              •      STOP: stops the measurement.
              •      RUN: runs the measurement.
              •      SINGle: indicates the single trigger measurement.
              Return Format
              N/A
              Example
              :TIMebase:HOTKeys RUN          /*Sets the operating status to RUN.*/
3.26.11      :TIMebase:ROLL
              Syntax
              :TIMebase:ROLL <value>
              :TIMebase:ROLL?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
296
                                                                                      Command System
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the status of the ROLL mode.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <value>          Integer             {0|1}                         1
                 Remarks
                 •     0: disables the Auto ROLL mode.
                 •     1: enables the Auto ROLL mode. The system enters the ROLL mode automatically
                       when the time base is greater than or equal to 50 ms.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :TIMebase:ROLL 0             /*Disables the ROLL mode.*/
                 :TIMebase:ROLL?               /*The query returns 0.*/
3.26.12         :TIMebase:XY:ENABle
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:XY:ENABle <bool>
                 :TIMebase:XY:ENABle?
                 Description
                 Enables or disables the XY mode; or queries the on/off status of the XY mode.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                         Default
                     <bool>           Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}              0|OFF
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 or 1.
                 Example
                 :TIMebase:XY:ENABle OFF                /*Disables the XY mode.*/
                 :TIMebase:XY:ENABle?                  /*The query returns 0.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     297
Command System
3.26.13      :TIMebase:XY:X
              Syntax
              :TIMebase:XY:X <s>
              :TIMebase:XY:X?
              Description
              Sets or queries the source channel of X coordinate when the horizontal time base
              mode is XY.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
                                                 {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
               <s>              Discrete                                                CHANnel1
                                                 CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
              Example
              :TIMebase:XY:X CHANnel3                 /*Sets the source channel of X
              coordinate to CHANnel3.*/
              :TIMebase:XY:X?                       /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
3.26.14      :TIMebase:XY:Y
              Syntax
              :TIMebase:XY:Y <s>
              :TIMebase:XY:Y?
              Description
              Sets or queries the channel source of the Y coordinate when the horizontal time base
              mode is XY.
              Parameter
               Name             Type             Range                                  Default
                                                 {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
               <s>              Discrete                                                CHANnel2
                                                 CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
298
                                                                                       Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                 Example
                 :TIMebase:XY:Y CHANnel3                        /*Sets the channel source of the Y
                 coordinate to CHANnel3.*/
                 :TIMebase:XY:Y?                               /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
3.26.15         :TIMebase:XY:Z
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:XY:Z <s>
                 :TIMebase:XY:Z?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries Source Z in XY mode.
                 Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <s>                 Discrete                                           -
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4|NONE}
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or NONE.
                 Example
                 :TIMebase:XY:Z CHANnel3          /*Sets Source Z in XY mode to
                 CHANnel3.*/
                 :TIMebase:XY:Z?         /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
3.26.16         :TIMebase:XY:GRID
                 Syntax
                 :TIMebase:XY:GRID <grid>
                 :TIMebase:XY:GRID?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the grid type of the XY display.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      299
Command System
              Parameter
                  Name            Type            Range                                   Default
                  <grid>          Discrete        {FULL|HALF|NONE}                        FULL
              Remarks
              •      FULL: turns the background grid and coordinates on.
              •      HALF: turns the background grid off and turns the coordinate on.
              •      NONE: turns the background grid and coordinate off.
              Return Format
              The query returns FULL, HALF, or NONE.
              Example
              :TIMebase:XY: GRID NONE /*Sets the grid type of the XY display.*/
              :TIMebase:XY: GRID? /*The query returns NONE.*/
3.27         :TRIGger Commands
              The :TRIGger commands are used to set the trigger source type, trigger input edge
              type and trigger delay as well as generating a trigger event.
3.27.1       :TRIGger:MODE
              Syntax
              :TRIGger:MODE <mode>
              :TRIGger:MODE?
              Description
              Sets or queries the trigger type.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type            Range                                   Default
                                                  {EDGE|PULSe|SLOPe|VIDeo|
                                                  PATTern|DURation|TIMeout|
                  <mode>          Discrete                                                EDGE
                                                  RUNT|WINDow|DELay|SETup|
                                                  NEDGe|RS232|IIC|SPI|CAN|LIN}
              Remarks
              Only the DHO900 series supports LIN trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
300
                                                                                        Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns EDGE, PULS, SLOP, VID, PATT, DUR, TIM, RUNT, WIND, DEL, SET,
                 NEDG, RS232, IIC, SPI, CAN, LIN.
                 Example
                 :TRIGger:MODE SLOPe              /*Selects the Slope trigger.*/
                 :TRIGger:MODE?                   /*The query returns SLOP.*/
3.27.2          :TRIGger:COUPling
                 Syntax
                 :TRIGger:COUPling <couple>
                 :TRIGger:COUPling?
                 Description
                 Selects or queries the trigger coupling type.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                           Default
                     <couple>         Discrete            {AC|DC|LFReject|HFReject}       DC
                 Remarks
                 This command is only available for the Edge trigger in which the analog channel is
                 selected as the source.
                 •     AC: blocks any DC components to pass the trigger path.
                 •     DC: allows DC and AC components to pass the trigger path.
                 •     LFReject: blocks the DC components and rejects the low frequency components
                       to pass the trigger path.
                 •     HFReject: rejects the high frequency components to pass the trigger path.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns AC, DC, LFR, or HFR.
                 Example
                 :TRIGger:COUPling LFReject                    /*Sets the trigger coupling type to
                 low frequency rejection.*/
                 :TRIGger:COUPling?                        /*The query returns LFR.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       301
Command System
3.27.3       :TRIGger:STATus?
              Syntax
              :TRIGger:STATus?
              Description
              Queries the current trigger status.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              N/A
              Return Format
              The query returns TD, WAIT, RUN, AUTO, or STOP.
              Example
              N/A
3.27.4       :TRIGger:SWEep
              Syntax
              :TRIGger:SWEep <sweep>
              :TRIGger:SWEep?
              Description
              Sets or queries the trigger mode.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type               Range                                   Default
                  <sweep>        Discrete           {AUTO|NORMal|SINGle}                    AUTO
              Remarks
              •     AUTO: Auto trigger. The waveforms are displayed no matter whether the trigger
                    conditions are met.
              •     NORMal: Normal trigger. The waveforms are displayed when trigger conditions
                    are met. If the trigger conditions are not met, the oscilloscope displays the
                    original waveforms and waits for another trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
302
                                                                                         Command System
                 •     SINGle: Single trigger. The oscilloscope waits for a trigger, displays the
                       waveforms when the trigger conditions are met, and then stops.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns AUTO, NORM, or SING.
                 Example
                 :TRIGger:SWEep NORMal               /*Selects the normal trigger mode.*/
                 :TRIGger:SWEep?                    /*The query returns NORM.*/
3.27.5          :TRIGger:HOLDoff
                 Syntax
                 :TRIGger:HOLDoff <value>
                 :TRIGger:HOLDoff?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the trigger holdoff time. The default unit is s.
                 Parameter
                     Name              Type               Range                            Default
                     <value>           Real               8 ns to 10 s                     8 ns
                 Remarks
                 •     Trigger holdoff can be used to stably trigger complex waveforms (such as pulse
                       waveform). Holdoff time indicates the time that the oscilloscope waits for re-
                       arming the trigger module. The oscilloscope will not trigger before the holdoff
                       time expires.
                 •     Holdoff time is not available for Video trigger, Timeout trigger, Setup&Hold
                       trigger, Nth Edge trigger, RS232 trigger, I2C trigger, SPI trigger, CAN trigger, LIN
                       trigger.
                 •     Only the DHO900 series supports LIN trigger.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the trigger holdoff time in scientific notation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                         303
Command System
              Example
              :TRIGger:HOLDoff 0.0000002            /*Sets the trigger holdoff time to 200
              ns.*/
              :TRIGger:HOLDoff?                     /*The query returns 2.000000E-7.*/
3.27.6       :TRIGger:NREJect
              Syntax
              :TRIGger:NREJect <bool>
              :TRIGger:NREJect?
              Description
              Turns on or off noise rejection; or queries the on/off status of noise rejection.
              Parameter
                  Name            Type             Range                                   Default
                  <bool>          Bool             {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}                        0|OFF
              Remarks
              •     Noise rejection reduces the possibility of the Noise trigger.
              •     This command is only available when the source is an analog channel or EXT.
              Return Format
              The query returns 1 or 0.
              Example
              :TRIGger:NREJect ON           /*Enables the noise rejection function.*/
              :TRIGger:NREJect?             /*The query returns 1.*/
3.27.7       :TRIGger:POSition?
              Syntax
              :TRIGger:POSition?
              Description
              Queries the waveform trigger position relative to the corresponding position in the
              internal memory.
              Parameter
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
304
                                                                                         Command System
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the waveform trigger position relative to the corresponding
                 position in the internal memory in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 :TRIGger:POSition?              /*The query returns 0.000E+00.*/
3.27.8          :TRIGger:EDGE
                 Edge trigger identifies a trigger on the trigger level of the specified edge on the input
                 signal.
 3.27.8.1        :TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce <source>
                  :TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger source of Edge trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4|EXT}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  EXT is only available for DHO812 and DHO802.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, or EXT.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce CHANnel1                   /*Sets the trigger source to
                  CHANnel1.*/
                  :TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce?                            /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                       305
Command System
3.27.8.2      :TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe <slope>
               :TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe?
               Description
               Sets or queries the edge type of Edge trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <slope>           Discrete          {POSitive|NEGative|RFALl}               POSitive
               Remarks
               •    POSitive: indicates the rising edge.
               •    NEGative: indicates the falling edge.
               •    RFALl: indicates the rising or falling edge.
               Return Format
               The query returns POS, NEG, or RFAL.
               Example
               :TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe NEGative                /*Sets the edge type to NEGative.*/
               :TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe?                        /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.27.8.3      :TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of Edge trigger. The unit is the same as that of
               current amplitude of the selected source.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  Analog channel: (-4.5 x
              <level>           Real              VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x       0V
                                                  VerticalScale - Offset)
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
306
                                                                                                 Command System
                  Name                Type                Range                                    Default
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Only when the selected source is an analog channel, a digital channel, or an external
                  trigger, can this setting command be valid.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel 0.16                    /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel?                        /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.9          :TRIGger:PULSe
                 Pulse trigger sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the positive or negative pulse of a
                 specified width. In this mode, the oscilloscope will trigger when the pulse width of the
                 input signal satisfies the specified pulse width condition.
                 In this oscilloscope, positive pulse width is defined as the time difference between the
                 two crossing points of the trigger level and positive pulse; negative pulse width is
                 defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level
                 and negative pulse, as shown in the figure below.
                                                          A               B
                                                                              Trigger Level
                                                                +Width
                                                                 -Width
                                                          A               B
                                                                              Trigger Level
 3.27.9.1        :TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce <source>
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger source of Pulse trigger.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                              DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                               Guide
                                                                                                                307
Command System
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>           Discrete                                                  CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                   CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce CHANnel1 /*Sets the trigger source of Pulse
               trigger to CHANnel1.*/
               :TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce? /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
3.27.9.2      :TRIGger:PULSe:POLarity
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:PULSe:POLarity <polarity>
               :TRIGger:PULSe:POLarity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the polarity of Pulse trigger.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
              <polarity>         Discrete          {POSitive|NEGative}                     POSitive
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns POS or NEG.
               Example
               :TRIGger:PULSe:POLarity NEGative              /*Sets the polarity of Pulse
               trigger to NEGative.*/
               :TRIGger:PULSe:POLarity?                         /*The query returns NEG.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
308
                                                                                         Command System
 3.27.9.3        :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN <when>
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger condition of Pulse trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <when>              Discrete            {GREater|LESS|GLESs}            GREater
                  Remarks
                  •     GREater: triggers when the positive/negative pulse width of the input signal is
                        greater than the specified pulse width.
                  •     LESS: triggers when the positive/negative pulse width of the input signal is
                        smaller than the specified pulse width.
                  •     GLESs: triggers when the positive/negative pulse is greater than than the
                        specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified upper limit of
                        pulse width.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns GRE, LESS, or GLES.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN LESS                 /*Sets the trigger condition to LESS.*/
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN?                      /*The query returns LESS.*/
 3.27.9.4        :TRIGger:PULSe:UWIDth
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:UWIDth <width>
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:UWIDth?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the pulse upper limit of the Pulse trigger. The default unit is s.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       309
Command System
               Parameter
              Name                  Type           Range                                   Default
              <width>               Real           Pulse lower limit to 10 s               2 μs
               Remarks
               This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to LESS or GLESs. To
               set or query the trigger condition of the Pulse trigger, send
               the :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN command.
               When the trigger condition is set to GLESs, if the set pulse upper limit value is
               smaller than the lower limit, the lower limit will be automatically changed. You can
               send the :TRIGger:PULSe:LWIDth command to set or query the pulse lower limit
               value of the Pulse trigger.
               Return Format
               The query returns the pulse upper limit in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:PULSe:UWIDth 0.000003              /*Sets the pulse upper limit to 3
               μs.*/
               :TRIGger:PULSe:UWIDth?                      /*The query returns 3.000000E-6.*/
3.27.9.5      :TRIGger:PULSe:LWIDth
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:PULSe:LWIDth <width>
               :TRIGger:PULSe:LWIDth?
               Description
               Sets or queries the pulse lower limit of the Pulse trigger. The default unit is s.
               Parameter
              Name                  Type           Range                                   Default
              <width>               Real           1 ns to upper limit                     1 µs
               Remarks
               This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to GREater or
               GLESs. To set or query the trigger condition of the Pulse trigger, send
               the :TRIGger:PULSe:WHEN command.
               When the trigger condition is set to GLESs, if the set pulse lower limit value is greater
               than the upper limit, the upper limit will be automatically changed. You can send
               the :TRIGger:PULSe:UWIDth command to set or query the pulse upper limit value of
               the Pulse trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
310
                                                                                              Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the pulse lower limit in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:LWIDth 0.000003                   /*Sets the pulse lower limit of
                  the Pulse trigger to 3 μs.*/
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:LWIDth?                          /*The query returns 3.000000E-6.*/
 3.27.9.6        :TRIGger:PULSe:LEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:LEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:LEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger level of Pulse trigger. The unit is the same as that of the
                  current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
                  <level>             Real                VerticalScale - Offset)              0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:LEVel 0.16                    /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:PULSe:LEVel?                        /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.10         :TRIGger:SLOPe
                 Slope trigger sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the positive or negative slope of the
                 specified time. This trigger mode is applicable to ramp and triangle waveforms.
                 In this oscilloscope, positive slope time is defined as the time difference between the
                 two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the rising edge; negative slope
                 time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level
                 line A and B with the falling edge. See the figure below.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           311
Command System
                                           A                                   Upper Limit of Trigger Level
                                                                               (Up Level)
                                   B
                                                                               Lower Limit of Trigger Level
                                                                               (Low Level)
                              Positive Slope Time       Negative Slope Time
3.27.10.1     :TRIGger:SLOPe:SOURce
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:SOURce <channel>
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of Slope trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type                Range                                   Default
                                                    {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
              <channel>         Discrete                                                    CHANnel1
                                                    CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:SOURce CHANnel2                 /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:SOURce?                          /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.10.2     :TRIGger:SLOPe:POLarity
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:POLarity <polarity>
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:POLarity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the edge type of Slope trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
312
                                                                                        Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <polarity>          Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}             POSitive
                  Remarks
                  •     POSitive: triggers on the rising edge.
                  •     NEGative: triggers on the falling edge.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns POS or NEG.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:POLarity POSitive                  /*Sets the polarity of Slope
                  trigger to POSitive.*/
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:POLarity?                         /*The query returns POS.*/
 3.27.10.3       :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN <when>
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger condition of Slope trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <when>              Discrete            {GREater|LESS|GLESs}            GREater
                  Remarks
                  •     GREater: the positive slope time of the input signal is greater than the specified
                        time.
                  •     LESS: the positive slope time of the input signal is smaller than the specified
                        time.
                  •     GLESs: the positive slope time of the input signal is greater than the specified
                        lower time limit and smaller than the specified upper time limit.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                          313
Command System
               Return Format
               The query returns GRE, LESS, or GLES.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN LESS            /*Sets the trigger condition to LESS.*/
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN?                 /*The query returns LESS.*/
3.27.10.4     :TRIGger:SLOPe:TUPPer
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:TUPPer <time>
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:TUPPer?
               Description
               Sets or queries the upper time limit value of the Slope trigger. The default unit s.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <time>            Real              Lower limit to 10 s                     2 μs
               Remarks
               This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to LESS or GLES. To
               set or query the trigger condition of the Slope trigger, send
               the :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN command.
               When the trigger condition is set to GLESs, if the set upper time limit value is smaller
               than the lower limit, the lower limit will be automatically changed. You can use
               the :TRIGger:SLOPe:TLOWer command to set or query the lower time limit value of
               the Slope trigger.
               Return Format
               The query returns the upper time limit in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:TUPPer 0.000003             /*Sets the upper time limit to 3
               μs.*/
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:TUPPer?                     /*The query returns 3.000000E-6.*/
3.27.10.5     :TRIGger:SLOPe:TLOWer
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:TLOWer <time>
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:TLOWer?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
314
                                                                                        Command System
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the lower time limit value of the Slope trigger. The default unit s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <time>              Real                1 ns to upper limit             1 μs
                  Remarks
                  This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to GREater or
                  GLESs. To set or query the trigger condition of the Slope trigger, send
                  the :TRIGger:SLOPe:WHEN command.
                  When the trigger condition is set to GLESs, if the set lower time limit value is greater
                  than the upper limit, the upper limit will be automatically changed. You can send
                  the :TRIGger:SLOPe:TUPPer command to set or query the upper time limit value of
                  the Slope trigger.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the lower time limit in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:TLOWer 0.000000020    /*Sets the lower time limit
                  to 20 ns.*/
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:TLOWer?         /*The query returns 2.000000E-8.*/
 3.27.10.6       :TRIGger:SLOPe:WINDow
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:WINDow <window>
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:WINDow?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the vertical window type of Slope trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <window>            Discrete            {TA|TB|TAB}                     TA
                  Remarks
                  •     TA: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level.
                  •     TB: only adjust the lower limit of the trigger level.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                         315
Command System
               •    TAB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time.
               Return Format
               The query returns TA, TB, or TAB.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:WINDow TB             /*Sets the vertical window type to
               TB.*/
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:WINDow?               /*The query returns TB.*/
3.27.10.7     :TRIGger:SLOPe:ALEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:ALEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:ALEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the upper limit of the trigger level of Slope trigger. The unit is the
               same as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
                                                   Trigger level lower limit to (4.5 x
              <level>            Real                                                      0V
                                                   VerticalScale - OFFSet)
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the upper limit of the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:ALEVel 0.16            /*Sets the upper limit of the trigger
               level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:ALEVel?               /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.10.8     :TRIGger:SLOPe:BLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:BLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:SLOPe:BLEVel?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
316
                                                                                               Command System
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the lower limit of the trigger level of Slope trigger. The unit is the
                  same as that of the current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                 Default
                                                          (-4.5 x VerticalScale - OFFSet) to
                  <level>             Real                                                      0V
                                                          trigger level upper limit
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the lower limit of the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:BLEVel 0.16                   /*Sets the lower limit of the trigger
                  level to 160 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:SLOPe:BLEVel?                   /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.11         :TRIGger:VIDeo
                 The video signal can include image information and timing information, which adopts
                 different standards and formats. This series can trigger on the standard video signal
                 field or line of NTSC (National Television Standards Committee), PAL (Phase
                 Alternating Line), or SECAM (Sequential Couleur A Memoire).
 3.27.11.1       :TRIGger:VIDeo:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:SOURce <source>
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger source of Video trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                 Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>            Discrete                                                  CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                          DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                           Guide
                                                                                                            317
Command System
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:SOURce CHANnel2               /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:SOURce?                        /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.11.2     :TRIGger:VIDeo:POLarity
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:POLarity <polarity>
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:POLarity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the video polarity of Video trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <polarity>        Discrete          {POSitive|NEGative}                     POSitive
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns POS or NEG.
               Example
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:POLarity NEGative                /*Sets the video polarity to
               NEGative.*/
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:POLarity?                      /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.27.11.3     :TRIGger:VIDeo:MODE
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:MODE <mode>
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:MODE?
               Description
               Sets or queries the sync type of Video trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
318
                                                                                        Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                                                          {ODDField|EVENfield|LINE|
                  <mode>              Discrete                                              ALINes
                                                          ALINes}
                  Remarks
                  •     ODDField: indicates the odd field. The oscilloscope triggers on the rising edge
                        of the first ramp waveform in the odd field. It is available when the video
                        standard is NTSC, PAL/SECAM, or 1080i.
                  •     EVENfield: indicates the even field. The oscilloscope triggers on the rising edge
                        of the first ramp waveform in the even field. It is available when the video
                        standard is NTSC, PAL/SECAM, or 1080i.
                  •     LINE: for NTSC and PAL/SECAM video standards, the oscilloscope triggers on
                        the specified line in the odd or even field. For 480p, 576p, 720p, 480p and 1080i
                        video standards, the oscilloscope triggers on the specified line.
                  •     ALINes: triggers on all the horizontal sync pulses.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns ODDF, EVEN, LINE, or ALIN.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:MODE ODDField                 /*Sets the sync type to ODDField.*/
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:MODE?                         /*The query returns ODDF.*/
 3.27.11.4       :TRIGger:VIDeo:LINE
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:LINE <line>
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:LINE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the line number when the sync type of Video trigger is set to Line.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <line>              Integer             Refer to Remarks                  1
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                        319
Command System
               Remarks
               •    PAL/SECAM: 1 to 625
               •    NTSC: 1 to 525
               •    480P: 1 to 525
               •    576P: 1 to 625
               •    720P60: 1 to 750
               •    720P50: 1 to 750
               •    720P30: 1 to 750
               •    720P25: 1 to 750
               •    720P24: 1 to 750
               •    1080P60: 1 to 1125
               •    1080P50: 1 to 1125
               •    1080P30: 1 to 1125
               •    1080P25: 1 to 1125
               •    1080P24: 1 to 1125
               •    1080I60: 1 to 1125
               •    1080I50: 1 to 1125
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer.
               Example
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:LINE 100           /*Sets the line number to 100.*/
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:LINE?              /*The query returns 100.*/
3.27.11.5     :TRIGger:VIDeo:STANdard
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:STANdard <standard>
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:STANdard?
               Description
               Sets or queries the video standard of Video trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
320
                                                                                            Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                 Default
                                                          {PALSecam|NTSC|480P|576P|
                                                          720P60|720P50|720P30|720P25|
                  <standard>          Discrete            720P24|1080P60|1080P50|               NTSC
                                                          1080P30|1080P25|1080P24|
                                                          1080I60|1080I50}
                  Remarks
                  Video Standard           Frame Frequency         Sweep Function         TV Scan Line
                                           (Frame)
                  PALSecam                 25                      Interlaced Scan        625
                  NTSC                     30                      Interlaced Scan        525
                  480P                     60                      Progressive Scan       525
                  576P                     50                      Progressive Scan       625
                  720P60                   60                      Progressive Scan       750
                  720P50                   50                      Progressive Scan       750
                  720P30                   30                      Progressive Scan       750
                  720P25                   25                      Progressive Scan       750
                  720P24                   24                      Progressive Scan       750
                  1080P60                  60                      Progressive Scan       1125
                  1080P50                  50                      Progressive Scan       1125
                  1080P30                  30                      Progressive Scan       1125
                  1080P25                  25                      Progressive Scan       1125
                  1080P24                  24                      Progressive Scan       1125
                  1080I60                  60                      Interlaced Scan        1125
                  1080I50                  50                      Interlaced Scan        1125
                  Return Format
                  The query returns PALS, NTSC, 480P, 576P, 720P60, 720P50, 720P30, 720P25, 720P24,
                  1080P60, 1080P50, 1080P30, 1080P25, 1080P24, 1080I60, or 1080I50.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:STANdard NTSC                 /*Sets the video standard to
                  NTSC.*/
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:STANdard?                        /*The query returns NTSC.*/
 3.27.11.6       :TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           321
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of Video trigger. The unit is the same as that of the
               current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name               Type                Range                                   Default
                                                     (-4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset) to
              <level>            Real                                                        0V
                                                     (4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset)
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel 0.16                 /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel?                     /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.12      :TRIGger:PATTern
              The pattern trigger identifies a trigger condition by looking for a specified pattern.
              This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of channels. Each channel can be set to H
              (high), L (low), or X (don't care). A rising or falling edge (you can only specify a single
              edge) can be specified for one channel included in the pattern. When an edge is
              specified, the oscilloscope will trigger at the edge specified if the pattern set for the
              other channels are true (namely the actual pattern of the channel is the same as the
              preset pattern). If no edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger on the last edge
              that makes the pattern true. If all the channels in the pattern are set to "X", the
              oscilloscope will not trigger.
                                         (CH1~CH4 or D0~D15)
                                                    H
                                                     .
                                                     .
                                                         ...
                                                     .
                                                     L
                                         (CH1~CH4 or D0~D15)
3.27.12.1     :TRIGger:PATTern:PATTern
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:PATTern:PATTern <pch1>[,<pch2>[,<pch3>[,<pch4>]]]
               :TRIGger:PATTern:PATTern?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                            Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
322
                                                                                           Command System
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the channel pattern of Pattern trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <pch1>              Discrete            {H|L|X|R|F}                       X
                  <pch2>              Discrete            {H|L|X|R|F}                       X
                  <pch3>              Discrete            {H|L|X|R|F}                       X
                  <pch4>              Discrete            {H|L|X|R|F}                       X
                  Remarks
                  •     The parameter "<pch1> to <pch4>" sets the patterns of the analog channels
                        "CHANnel1 to CHANnel4".
                  •     In the parameter range, H indicates high level (higher than the threshold level
                        of the channel), L indicates low level (lower than the threshold level of the
                        channel), and X indicates omitting the channel (This channel is not used as a
                        part of the pattern. When all the channels are set to X, the oscilloscope will not
                        trigger.) R indicates rising edge, and F indicates falling edge.
                  •     In the pattern, you can only specify one edge (rising edge or falling edge). If
                        one edge item is currently defined and then another edge item is defined in
                        another channel in the pattern, then a prompt message "Invalid input" is
                        displayed. Then, the latter defined edge item will be replaced by X.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the currently set pattern of all the channels. The channels are
                  separated by commas.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:PATTern:PATTern H,R,L,X /*Sets the patterns of "CHANnel1
                  to CHANnel4" to H,R,L,X.*/
                  :TRIGger:PATTern:PATTern? /*The query returns H,R,L,X.*/
 3.27.12.2       :TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce <source>
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                          323
Command System
               :TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of Pattern trigger.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>           Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                   CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce CHANnel2                /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce?                         /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.12.3     :TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel <source>,<level>
               :TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel? <source>
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of the specified channel in Pattern trigger. The unit is
               the same as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>           Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                   CHANnel4}
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
324
                                                                                              Command System
                  Name                 Type               Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
                  <level>              Real               VerticalScale - Offset)              0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel CHANnel2,0.16 /*Sets the trigger level of
                  CHANnel2 to 160 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel? CHANnel2    /*The query returns
                  1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.13         :TRIGger:DURation
                 In Duration trigger, the oscilloscope identifies a trigger condition by searching for the
                 duration of a specified pattern. This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of the
                 channels. Each channel can be set to 1 (high), 0 (low), or X (don't care). The
                 instrument triggers when the duration (∆T) of this pattern meets the preset time, as
                 shown in the figure below.
                                                         ∆T           ∆T
                                                                                     Pattern:HLHL
                                 CH1
                                 CH2
                                  CH3
                                 CH4
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           325
Command System
3.27.13.1     :TRIGger:DURation:SOURce
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DURation:SOURce <source>
               :TRIGger:DURation:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of Duration trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>          Discrete                                                  CHANnel1
                                                  CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                  CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:DURation:SOURce CHANnel2                /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:DURation:SOURce?                          /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.13.2     :TRIGger:DURation:TYPE
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DURation:TYPE <pch1>[,<pch2>[,<pch3>[,<pch4>]]]
               :TRIGger:DURation:TYPE?
               Description
               Sets or queries the channel pattern of Duration trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <pch1>            Discrete          {H|L|X}                                 X
              <pch2>            Discrete          {H|L|X}                                 X
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
326
                                                                                         Command System
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <pch3>              Discrete            {H|L|X}                         X
                  <pch4>              Discrete            {H|L|X}                         X
                  Remarks
                  •     The parameter "<pch1> to <pch4>" sets the patterns of the analog channels
                        "CHANnel1 to CHANnel4".
                  •     In the parameter range, H indicates high level (higher than the threshold level
                        of the channel), L indicates low level (lower than the threshold level of the
                        channel), and X indicates omitting the channel (This channel is not used as a
                        part of the pattern. When all the channels are set to X, the oscilloscope will not
                        trigger.)
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the currently set pattern of all the channels. The channels are
                  separated by commas.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TYPE L,X,H,L /*Sets the patterns of "CHANnel1 to
                  CHANnel4" to L,X,H,L.*/
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TYPE? /*The query returns L,X,H,L.*/
 3.27.13.3       :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN <when>
                  :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger condition of Duration trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <when>              Discrete            {GREater|LESS|GLESs|UNGLess}    GREater
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        327
Command System
               Remarks
               •     GREater: triggers when the set duration time of the pattern is greater than the
                     preset time.
               •     LESS: triggers when the set duration time of the pattern is smaller than the
                     preset time.
               •     GLESs: triggers when the set duration time of the pattern is smaller than the
                     preset upper time limit and greater than the preset lower time limit.
               •     UNGLess: triggers when the set duration time of the pattern is greater than the
                     preset upper time limit or smaller than the preset lower time limit.
               Return Format
               The query returns GRE, LESS, GLES, or UNGL.
               Example
               :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN LESS             /*Sets the trigger condition to
               LESS.*/
               :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN?                 /*The query returns LESS.*/
3.27.13.4     :TRIGger:DURation:TUPPer
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DURation:TUPPer <time>
               :TRIGger:DURation:TUPPer?
               Description
               Sets or queries the upper limit of the duration time of Duration trigger. The default
               unit is s.
               Parameter
              Name                  Type          Range                                   Default
              <time>                Real          1.01 ns to 10 s                         1 μs
               Remarks
               This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to LESS, GLESs, or
               UNGLess. To set or query the trigger condition of the Duration trigger, send
               the :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN command.
               When the trigger condition is set to GLESs or UNGLess, if the set upper limit of the
               duration time value is smaller than the lower limit, the lower limit will be
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
328
                                                                                       Command System
                  automatically changed. You can send the :TRIGger:DURation:TLOWer command to
                  set or query the lower limit of the duration time value of the Duration trigger.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the upper limit of the duration time in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TUPPer 0.000003                  /*Sets the upper limit of the
                  duration time to 3 μs.*/
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TUPPer?                          /*The query returns
                  3.000000E-6.*/
 3.27.13.5       :TRIGger:DURation:TLOWer
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TLOWer <time>
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TLOWer?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the lower limit of the duration time of Duration trigger. The default
                  unit is s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <time>              Real                1 ns to 9.9 s                  1 μs
                  Remarks
                  This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to GREater, GLESs,
                  or UNGLess. To set or query the trigger condition of the Duration trigger, send
                  the :TRIGger:DURation:WHEN command.
                  When the trigger condition is set to GLESs or UNGLess, if the set lower limit of the
                  duration time value is greater than the upper limit, the upper limit will be
                  automatically changed. You can send the :TRIGger:DURation:TUPPer command to set
                  or query the upper limit of the duration time value of the Duration trigger.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the lower limit of the duration time in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TLOWer 0.000003                  /*Sets the lower limit of the
                  duration time to 3 μs.*/
                  :TRIGger:DURation:TLOWer?                          /*The query returns
                  3.000000E-6.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      329
Command System
3.27.13.6     :TRIGger:DURation:LEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DURation:LEVel <source>,<level>
               :TRIGger:DURation:LEVel?<source>
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of the specified channel in Duration trigger. The unit
               is the same as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name                Type             Range                                  Default
                                                   {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                   D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>            Discrete                                                CHANnel1
                                                   CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                   CHANnel4}
                                                   Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                   VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
              <level>             Real             VerticalScale - Offset)                0V
                                                   Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:DURation:LEVel CHANnel2,0.16 /*Sets the trigger level of
               CHANnel2 to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:DURation:LEVel? CHANnel2    /*The query returns
               1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.14      :TRIGger:TIMeout
              In Timeout trigger, the oscilloscope triggers when the time interval (∆T) (the time
              from when the rising edge (or falling edge) of the input signal passes through the
              trigger level to the time from when the neighboring falling edge (or rising edge)
              passes through the trigger level) is greater than the preset timeout value, as shown in
              the figure below.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
330
                                                                                         Command System
                                                    T                        Time Out < T
                                             Time Out
 3.27.14.1       :TRIGger:TIMeout:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:SOURce <source>
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger source of Timeout trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:SOURce CHANnel2                 /*Sets the trigger source to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:SOURce?                            /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.27.14.2       :TRIGger:TIMeout:SLOPe
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:SLOPe <slope>
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:SLOPe?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      331
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the edge type of Timeout trigger.
               Parameter
              Name                Type            Range                                   Default
              <slope>             Discrete        {POSitive|NEGative|RFALl}               POSitive
               Remarks
               •     POSitive: starts timing when the rising edge of the input signal passes through
                     the trigger level.
               •     NEGative: starts timing when the falling edge of the input signal passes
                     through the trigger level.
               •     RFALl: starts timing when any edge of the input signal passes through the
                     trigger level.
               Return Format
               The query returns POS, NEG, or RFAL.
               Example
               :TRIGger:TIMeout:SLOPe NEGative               /*Sets the edge type to
               NEGative.*/
               :TRIGger:TIMeout:SLOPe?                       /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.27.14.3     :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME <time>
               :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME?
               Description
               Sets or queries the timeout value of Timeout trigger. The default unit is s.
               Parameter
              Name                Type            Range                                   Default
              <time>              Real            1 ns to 10 s                            1 μs
               Remarks
               N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
332
                                                                                              Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the timeout value in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME 0.002                  /*Sets the timeout value to 2 ms.*/
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME?                          /*The query returns
                  2.000000E-3.*/
 3.27.14.4       :TRIGger:TIMeout:LEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:LEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:LEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger level of Timeout trigger. The unit is the same as that of
                  the current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
                  <level>             Real                VerticalScale - Offset)              0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:LEVel 0.16                  /*Sets the trigger level to 160
                  mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:TIMeout:LEVel?                      /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.15         :TRIGger:RUNT
                 The runt trigger sets the oscilloscope to trigger pulses that cross one trigger level but
                 not another, as shown in the figure below.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           333
Command System
                                             Positive Runt Pulse
            Upper Limit of the
            Trigger Level
             Lower Limit of the
             Trigger Level
                                                                    Negative Runt Pulse
3.27.15.1     :TRIGger:RUNT:SOURce
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RUNT:SOURce <source>
               :TRIGger:RUNT:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of Runt trigger.
               Parameter
               Name               Type               Range                                  Default
                                                     {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
               <source>           Discrete                                                  CHANnel1
                                                     CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RUNT:SOURce CHANnel2                 /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:RUNT:SOURce?                           /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.15.2     :TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity <polarity>
               :TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the polarity of Runt trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
334
                                                                                        Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <polarity>          Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}            POSitive
                  Remarks
                  •     POSitive: indicates the positive polarity. The oscilloscope triggers on the
                        positive polarity of Runt trigger.
                  •     NEGative: indicates the negative polarity. The oscilloscope triggers on the
                        negative polarity of Runt trigger.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns POS or NEG.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity NEGative                  /*Sets the polarity of Runt
                  trigger to NEGative.*/
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity?                          /*The query returns NEG.*/
 3.27.15.3       :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN <when>
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger conditions of Runt trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <when>              Discrete            {NONE|GREater|LESS|GLESs}      NONE
                  Remarks
                  •     NONE: indicates not setting the trigger condition of Runt trigger.
                  •     GREater: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit of
                        pulse width.
                  •     LESS: triggers when the runt pulse width is smaller than the upper limit of pulse
                        width.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      335
Command System
               •    GLESs: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit and
                    smaller than the upper limit of pulse width.
               The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.
               Return Format
               The query returns NONE, GRE, LESS, or GLES.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN LESS                /*Sets the trigger condition of Runt
               trigger to LESS.*/
               :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN?                    /*The query returns LESS.*/
3.27.15.4     :TRIGger:RUNT:WUPPer
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RUNT:WUPPer <width>
               :TRIGger:RUNT:WUPPer?
               Description
               Sets or queries the upper limit of the pulse width of Runt trigger. The default unit is
               s.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <width>           Real              1.01 ns to 10 s                         2 μs
               Remarks
               This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to LESS or GLESs. To
               set or query the trigger condition of the Runt trigger, send the :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN
               command.
               When the trigger condition is set to GLESs, if the set upper limit of the pulse width is
               smaller than the lower limit, the lower limit will be automatically changed. You can
               send the :TRIGger:RUNT:WLOWer command to set or query the lower limit of the
               pulse width of Runt trigger.
               Return Format
               The query returns the pulse upper limit in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RUNT:WUPPer 0.02           /*Sets the upper limit of the pulse
               width to 20 ms.*/
               :TRIGger:RUNT:WUPPer?                     /*The query returns 2.000000E-2.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
336
                                                                                         Command System
 3.27.15.5       :TRIGger:RUNT:WLOWer
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:WLOWer <width>
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:WLOWer?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the lower limit of the pulse width of Runt trigger. The default unit is s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <width>             Real                1 ns to 9.9 s                    1 μs
                  Remarks
                  This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to GREater or
                  GLESs. To set or query the trigger condition of the Runt trigger, send
                  the :TRIGger:RUNT:WHEN command.
                  When the trigger condition is set to GLESs, if the set lower limit of the pulse width is
                  greater than the lower limit, the upper limit will be automatically changed. You can
                  send the :TRIGger:RUNT:WUPPer command to set or query the upper limit of the
                  pulse width of Runt trigger.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the pulse lower limit in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:WLOWer 0.01                /*Sets the lower limit of the pulse
                  width to 10 ms.*/
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:WLOWer?                         /*The query returns 1.000000E-2.*/
 3.27.15.6       :TRIGger:RUNT:ALEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:ALEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:RUNT:ALEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the upper limit of the trigger level of Runt trigger. The unit is the
                  same as that of the current amplitude.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                          337
Command System
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
                                                   Lower limit to (4.5 x VerticalScale
              <level>            Real                                                      0V
                                                   - OFFSet)
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the upper limit of the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RUNT:ALEVel 0.16            /*Sets the upper limit of the trigger
               level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:RUNT:ALEVel?               /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.15.7     :TRIGger:RUNT:BLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RUNT:BLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:RUNT:BLEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the lower limit of the trigger level of Runt trigger. The unit is the
               same as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
                                                   (-4.5 x VerticalScale - OFFSet) to
              <level>            Real                                                      0V
                                                   upper limit
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the lower limit of the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RUNT:BLEVel 0.16            /*Sets the lower limit of the trigger
               level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:RUNT:BLEVel?               /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
338
                                                                                         Command System
3.27.16         :TRIGger:WINDows
                 Window trigger provides a high trigger level and a low trigger level. The instrument
                 triggers when the input signal passes through the high trigger level or the low trigger
                 level.
 3.27.16.1       :TRIGger:WINDows:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:SOURce <source>
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger source of Window trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                                                          {CHANnel1|CHANnel2|
                  <source>            Discrete                                             CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel3|CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:SOURce CHANnel2                  /*Sets the trigger source to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:SOURce?                           /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.27.16.2       :TRIGger:WINDows:SLOPe
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:SLOPe <type>
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:SLOPe?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the edge type of Windows trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <type>              Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative|RFALI}        POSitive
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                        339
Command System
               Remarks
               •    POSitive: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
                    is greater than the preset high trigger level.
               •    NEGative: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage
                    level is smaller than the preset low trigger level.
               •    RFALl: triggers on either the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the
                    voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
               Return Format
               The query returns POS, NEG, or RFAL.
               Example
               :TRIGger:WINDows:SLOPe NEGative               /*Sets the edge type of Windows
               trigger to NEGative.*/
               :TRIGger:WINDows:SLOPe?                       /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.27.16.3     :TRIGger:WINDows:POSition
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:WINDows:POSition <pos>
               :TRIGger:WINDows:POSition?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger position of Window trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <pos>             Discrete           {EXIT|ENTer|TIME}                      ENTer
               Remarks
               •    EXIT: triggers when the input signal exits the specified trigger level range.
               •    ENTer: triggers when the input signal enters the specified trigger level range.
               •    TIME: triggers when the accumulated hold time after the trigger signal enters
                    the specified trigger level range is equal to the window time.
               Return Format
               The query returns EXIT, ENT, or TIME.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
340
                                                                                            Command System
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:POSition ENTer                     /*Sets the trigger position to
                  ENT.*/
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:POSition?                           /*The query returns ENT.*/
 3.27.16.4       :TRIGger:WINDows:TIME
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:TIME <time>
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:TIME?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the window time of Window trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                 Default
                  <time>              Real                1 ns to 10 s                          1μs
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the window time in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:TIME 0.002                  /*Sets the window time to 2 ms.*/
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:TIME?                          /*The query returns
                  2.000000E-3.*/
 3.27.16.5       :TRIGger:WINDows:ALEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:ALEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:WINDows:ALEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the upper limit of the trigger level of Window trigger. The unit is the
                  same as that of the current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                 Default
                                                          Lower limit to (4.5 x VerticalScale
                  <level>             Real                                                      0V
                                                          - OFFSet)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                          341
Command System
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the upper limit of the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:WINDows:ALEVel 0.16             /*Sets the upper limit of the
               trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:WINDows:ALEVel?                /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.16.6     :TRIGger:WINDows:BLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:WINDows:BLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:WINDows:BLEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the lower limit of the trigger level of Window trigger. The unit is the
               same as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                  Default
                                                   (-4.5 x VerticalScale - OFFSet) to
              <level>            Real                                                     0V
                                                   upper limit
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the lower limit of the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:WINDows:BLEVel 0.05             /*Sets the lower limit of the
               trigger level to 50 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:WINDows:BLEVel?                /*The query returns 5.000000E-2.*/
3.27.17      :TRIGger:DELay
              In Delay trigger, you need to set Source A and Source B. The oscilloscope triggers
              when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges (Edge A and Edge B) of
              Source A and Source B meets the preset time limit, as shown in the figure below.
              Edge A and Edge B must be two neighboring edges. See the figure below.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
342
                                                                                         Command System
                                                 Edge A
                                 Source A
                                                               Edge B
                                 Source B
                                                           T
 3.27.17.1       :TRIGger:DELay:SA
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:DELay:SA <source>
                  :TRIGger:DELay:SA?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger source of Source A in Delay trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DELay:SA CHANnel2 /*Sets the trigger source A to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :TRIGger:DELay:SA?       /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.27.17.2       :TRIGger:DELay:ASLop
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:DELay:ASLop <slope>
                  :TRIGger:DELay:ASLop?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      343
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the edge type of Edge A in Delay trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <slope>           Discrete          {POSitive|NEGative}                     POSitive
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns POS or NEG.
               Example
               :TRIGger:DELay:ASLop NEGative              /*Sets the edge type of Edge A to
               NEGative.*/
               :TRIGger:DELay:ASLop?                      /*The query returns NEG.*/
3.27.17.3     :TRIGger:DELay:SB
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DELay:SB <source>
               :TRIGger:DELay:SB?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of Source B in Delay trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>          Discrete                                                  CHANnel2
                                                  CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                  CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
344
                                                                                       Command System
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DELay:SB CHANnel4 /*Sets the trigger source B to
                  CHANnel4.*/
                  :TRIGger:DELay:SB? /*The query returns CHAN4.*/
 3.27.17.4       :TRIGger:DELay:BSLop
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:DELay:BSLop <slope>
                  :TRIGger:DELay:BSLop?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the edge type of Edge B in Delay trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <slope>             Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}            POSitive
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns POS or NEG.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DELay:BSLop NEGative                   /*Sets the edge type of Edge B to
                  NEGative.*/
                  :TRIGger:DELay:BSLop?                           /*The query returns NEG.*/
 3.27.17.5       :TRIGger:DELay:TYPE
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TYPE <type>
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TYPE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger condition of the Delay trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <type>              Discrete            {GREater|LESS|GLESs|GOUT}      GREater
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      345
Command System
               Remarks
               •    GREater: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of
                    Source A and Source B is greater than the preset time limit.
               •    LESS: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of
                    Source A and Source B is smaller than the preset time limit.
               •    GLESs: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of
                    Source A and Source B is greater than the lower limit of the preset time and
                    smaller than the upper limit of the preset time.
               •    GOUT: triggers when the time difference (ΔT) between the specified edges of
                    Source A and Source B is smaller than the lower limit of the preset time or
                    greater than the upper limit of the preset time.
               Return Format
               The query returns GRE, LESS, GLES, or GOUT.
               Example
               :TRIGger:DELay:TYPe GOUT            /*Sets the trigger condition to GOUT.*/
               :TRIGger:DELay:TYPe?                 /*The query returns GOUT.*/
3.27.17.6     :TRIGger:DELay:TUPPer
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DELay:TUPPer <time>
               :TRIGger:DELay:TUPPer?
               Description
               Sets or queries the upper limit of delay time of the Delay trigger. The default unit is
               s.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <time>            Real              1.01 ns to 10 s                         2 μs
               Remarks
               This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to LESS, GLESs, or
               GOUT. To set or query the trigger condition of the Delay trigger, send
               the :TRIGger:DELay:TYPE command.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
346
                                                                                         Command System
                  When the trigger condition is set to GLESs or GOUT, if the set upper limit of the
                  delay time is smaller than the lower limit, the lower limit will be automatically
                  changed. You can send the :TRIGger:DELay:TLOWer command to set or query the
                  lower limit of the delay time of the Delay trigger.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the upper limit of delay time in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TUPPer 0.002                  /*Sets the upper limit of delay time
                  to 2 ms.*/
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TUPPer?                       /*The query returns 2.000000E-3.*/
 3.27.17.7       :TRIGger:DELay:TLOWer
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TLOWer <time>
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TLOWer?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the lower limit of delay time of the Delay trigger. The default unit is s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                             Default
                  <time>              Real                1 ns to 9.9 s                     1μs
                  Remarks
                  This command is only available when the trigger condition is set to GREater, GLESs,
                  or GOUT. To set or query the trigger condition of the Delay trigger, send
                  the :TRIGger:DELay:TYPE command.
                  When the trigger condition is set to GLESs or GOUT, if the set lower limit of the delay
                  time is greater than the upper limit, the upper limit will be automatically changed.
                  You can send the :TRIGger:DELay:TUPPer command to set or query the upper limit of
                  the delay time of the Delay trigger.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the lower limit of delay time in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TLOWer 0.002                  /*Sets the lower limit of delay time
                  to 2 ms.*/
                  :TRIGger:DELay:TLOWer?                       /*The query returns 2.000000E-3.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         347
Command System
3.27.17.8     :TRIGger:DELay:ALEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DELay:ALEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:DELay:ALEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the threshold level of Source A of Delay trigger. The unit is the same
               as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                   Default
                                                   (-4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset) to
              <level>           Real                                                       0V
                                                   (4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset)
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the threshold level of Source A in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:DELay:ALEVel 0.16            /*Sets the threshold level of Source
               A to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:DELay:ALEVel?               /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.17.9     :TRIGger:DELay:BLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:DELay:BLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:DELay:BLEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the threshold level of Source B of Delay trigger. The unit is the same
               as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                   Default
                                                   (-4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset) to
              <level>           Real                                                       0V
                                                   (4.5 x VerticalScale - Offset)
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
348
                                                                                        Command System
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the threshold level of Source B in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:DELay BLEVel 0.05                   /*Sets the threshold level of Source
                  B to 50 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:DELay:BLEVel?                   /*The query returns 5.000000E-2.*/
3.27.18         :TRIGger:SHOLd
                 In setup&hold trigger, you need to set the clock source and data source. The setup
                 time starts when the data signal passes the trigger level and ends at the coming of
                 the specified clock edge; the hold time starts at the coming of the specified clock
                 edge and ends when the data signal crosses the trigger level again, as shown in the
                 figure below. The oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is smaller
                 than the preset time.
                                                                                       T1 is the setup time
                                                      T2
                                            T1                                         T2 is the hold time
                    Data Source
                                       Edge
                     Clock Source
                                                                                       The data type is H
 3.27.18.1       :TRIGger:SHOLd:DSRC
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:DSRC <source>
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:DSRC?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data source of Setup&Hold trigger.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                             349
Command System
               Parameter
              Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>         Discrete                                                 CHANnel2
                                                 CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                 CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:DSRC CHANnel1            /*Sets the data source to
               CHANnel1.*/
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:DSRC?                      /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
3.27.18.2     :TRIGger:SHOLd:CSRC
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:CSRC <source>
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:CSRC?
               Description
               Sets or queries the clock source of Setup&Hold trigger.
               Parameter
              Name             Type              Range                                  Default
                                                 {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                 D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>         Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                 CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                 CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
350
                                                                                        Command System
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:CSRC CHANnel2                    /*Sets the clock source to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:CSRC?                             /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.27.18.3       :TRIGger:SHOLd:SLOPe
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:SLOPe <slope>
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:SLOPe?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the edge type of Setup&Hold trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <slope>             Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}             POSitive
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns POS or NEG.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:SLOPe NEGative                    /*Sets the edge type to
                  NEGative.*/
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:SLOPe?                            /*The query returns NEG.*/
 3.27.18.4       :TRIGger:SHOLd:PATTern
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:PATTern <pattern>
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:PATTern?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data type of Setup&Hold trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <pattern>           Discrete            {H|L}                           H
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       351
Command System
               Remarks
               •    H: indicates high level.
               •    L: indicates low level.
               Return Format
               The query returns H or L.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:PATTern L           /*Sets data type to L.*/
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:PATTern?           /*The query returns L.*/
3.27.18.5     :TRIGger:SHOLd:TYPE
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:TYPE <type>
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:TYPE?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger condition of Setup/Hold trigger.
               Parameter
              Name               Type            Range                                   Default
              <type>             Discrete        {SETup|HOLD|SETHold}                    SETup
               Remarks
               •    SETup: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time is smaller than the
                    specified setup time.
               •    HOLD: the oscilloscope triggers when the hold time is smaller than the
                    specified hold time.
               •    SETHold: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is smaller
                    than the specified time value.
               Return Format
               The query returns SET, HOLD, or SETH.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:TYPE SETHold             /*Sets the trigger condition to
               SETHold.*/
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:TYPE?                    /*The query returns SETH.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
352
                                                                                       Command System
 3.27.18.6       :TRIGger:SHOLd:STIMe
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:STIMe <time>
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:STIMe?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the setup time of Setup&Hold trigger. The default unit is s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <time>              Real                1 ns to 10 s                   2 μs
                  Remarks
                  •     Setup time indicates the time that the data remain stable and unchanged
                        before the specified clock edge arrives.
                  •     This command is only available when the hold type is SETup or SETHOLd.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the setup time value in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:STIMe 0.002                   /*Sets the setup time to 2 ms.*/
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:STIMe?                           /*The query returns 2.000000E-3.*/
 3.27.18.7       :TRIGger:SHOLd:HTIMe
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:HTIMe <time>
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:HTIMe?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the hold time of Setup&Hold trigger. The default unit is s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <time>              Real                1 ns to 10 s                   1 μs
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      353
Command System
               Remarks
               •    Hold time indicates the time that the data remain stable and unchanged after
                    the specified clock edge arrives.
               •    This command is only available when the hold type is HOLD or SETHOLd.
               Return Format
               The query returns the hold time value in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:HTIMe 0.002               /*Sets the hold time to 2 ms.*/
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:HTIMe?                       /*The query returns 2.000000E-3.*/
3.27.18.8     :TRIGger:SHOLd:DLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:DLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:DLEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of the data source. The unit is the same as that of
               the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                  VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
              <level>           Real              VerticalScale - Offset)                 0V
                                                  Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level of the data source in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:DLEVel 0.16               /*Sets the trigger level of the data
               source to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:SHOLd:DLEVel?                   /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
354
                                                                                              Command System
 3.27.18.9       :TRIGger:SHOLd:CLEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:CLEVel<level>
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:CLEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger level of the clock source. The unit is the same as that of
                  the current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
                  <level>             Real                VerticalScale - Offset)              0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level of the clock source in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:CLEVel 0.05                   /*Sets the trigger level of the
                  clock source to 50 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:SHOLd:CLEVel?                       /*The query returns 5.000000E-2.*/
3.27.19         :TRIGger:NEDGe
                 The Nth edge trigger lets you to trigger on the Nth edge that occurs after a specified
                 idle time. For example, in the waveform as shown in the figure below, the instrument
                 should trigger on the second rising edge after the specified idle time (the time
                 between two neighboring rising edges), and the idle time should be within the range
                 between P and M (P < Idle Time < M). Wherein, M is the time between the first rising
                 edge and its previous rising edge; P is the maximum time between the rising edges
                 that participate in counting.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           355
Command System
                                                                          Edge Type=
                                                                          Edge Num=2
                                                          M                    P
                                  P<Idle Time<M
3.27.19.1     :TRIGger:NEDGe:SOURce
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:SOURce <source>
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of Edge trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>          Discrete                                                  CHANnel1
                                                  CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                  CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:SOURce CHANnel2 /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:SOURce? /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
356
                                                                                        Command System
 3.27.19.2       :TRIGger:NEDGe:SLOPe
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:SLOPe <slope>
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:SLOPe?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the edge type of the Nth Edge trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <slope>             Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}             POSitive
                  Remarks
                  •     POSitive: indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on the rising edge of the input
                        signal when the voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
                  •     NEGative: indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on the falling edge of the
                        input signal when the voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns POS or NEG.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:SLOPe NEGative                   /*Sets the edge type to
                  NEGative .*/
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:SLOPe?                           /*The query returns NEG.*/
 3.27.19.3       :TRIGger:NEDGe:IDLE
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:IDLE <time>
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:IDLE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the idle time of the Nth Edge trigger. The default unit is s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <time>              Real                16 ns to 10 s                   1μs
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        357
Command System
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns the idle time in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:IDLE 0.002           /*Sets the idle time to 2 ms.*/
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:IDLE?                /*The query returns 2.000000E-3.*/
3.27.19.4     :TRIGger:NEDGe:EDGE
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:EDGE <edge>
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:EDGE?
               Description
               Sets or queries the number of edges of the Nth Edge trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <edge>            Integer           1 to 65535                              1
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 65535.
               Example
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:EDGE 20            /*Sets the number of edges to 20.*/
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:EDGE?              /*The query returns 20.*/
3.27.19.5     :TRIGger:NEDGe:LEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:LEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:NEDGe:LEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of the Nth Edge trigger. The unit is the same as that
               of current amplitude.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
358
                                                                                               Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                  Type              Range                                  Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
                  <level>               Real              VerticalScale - Offset)                0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:LEVel 0.16                    /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:NEDGe:LEVel?                        /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.20         :TRIGger:RS232
                 RS232 bus is a serial communication mode used in data transmission between PCs or
                 between a PC and a terminal. In RS232 serial protocol, a character is transmitted as a
                 frame of data. The frame consists of 1 start bit, 5-8 data bits, 1 check bit, and 1-2 stop
                 bits. Its format is as shown in the figure below. This series oscilloscope triggers when
                 the start frame, error frame, check error, or the specified data of the RS232 signal is
                 detected.
                                1 bit                   5~8 bits                1 bit          1~2 bits
                                Start Bit               Data Bit               Check Bit       Stop Bit
                                  Figure 3.7 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Frame Format
 3.27.20.1       :TRIGger:RS232:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RS232:SOURce <source>
                  :TRIGger:RS232:SOURce?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                            DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                             Guide
                                                                                                              359
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of RS232 trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>          Discrete                                                  CHANnel1
                                                  CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                  CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RS232:SOURce CHANnel2               /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:RS232:SOURce?                        /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.20.2     :TRIGger:RS232:LEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RS232:LEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:RS232:LEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of RS232 trigger. The unit is the same as that of the
               current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                  VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
              <level>           Real              VerticalScale - Offset)                 0V
                                                  Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
360
                                                                                        Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:RS232:LEVel 0.16                    /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:RS232:LEVel?                        /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
 3.27.20.3       :TRIGger:RS232:POLarity
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RS232:POLarity <polarity>
                  :TRIGger:RS232:POLarity?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the pulse polarity of RS232 trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <polarity>          Discrete            {POSitive|NEGative}             POSitive
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns POS or NEG.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:RS232:POLarity POSitive                    /*Sets the pulse polarity of
                  RS232 trigger to POSitive.*/
                  :TRIGger:RS232:POLarity?                           /*The query returns POS.*/
 3.27.20.4       :TRIGger:RS232:WHEN
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RS232:WHEN <when>
                  :TRIGger:RS232:WHEN?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger condition of RS232 trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <when>              Discrete            {STARt|ERRor|CERRor|DATA}       STARt
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       361
Command System
               Remarks
               •    STARt: triggers at the start of a frame.
               •    ERRor: triggers when an error frame is found.
               •    CERRor: triggers when a check error is found.
               •    DATA: triggers on the last bit of the preset data bits.
               Return Format
               The query returns STAR, ERR, CERR, or DATA.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RS232:WHEN ERRor            /*Sets the trigger condition to
               ERRor.*/
               :TRIGger:RS232:WHEN?                 /*The query returns ERR.*/
3.27.20.5     :TRIGger:RS232:DATA
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RS232:DATA <data>
               :TRIGger:RS232:DATA?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data value of RS232 trigger when the trigger condition is "Data".
               Parameter
              Name               Type             Range                                   Default
              <data>             Integer          0 to 2n-1                               0
               Remarks
               In the expression 2n-1, n indicates the current data width, and its available value can
               be 5, 6, 7, and 8. You can send the :TRIGger:RS232:WIDTh command to set or query
               the data width.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RS232:DATA 10           /*Sets the data value to 10.*/
               :TRIGger:RS232:DATA?             /*The query returns 10.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
362
                                                                                       Command System
 3.27.20.6       :TRIGger:RS232:BAUD
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RS232:BAUD <baud>
                  :TRIGger:RS232:BAUD?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the baud rate of RS232 trigger. The default unit is bps.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <baud>              Integer             1 bps to 20 Mbps              9600 bps
                  Remarks
                  If the baud rate is set to a value with "M", then "A" should be added at the end of
                  the value. For example, if you send 5M, you need to send 5MA.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 1 bps to 20 Mbps.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:RS232:BAUD 4800                 /*Sets the baud rate to 4800 bps.*/
                  :TRIGger:RS232:BAUD?                     /*The query returns 4800.*/
 3.27.20.7       :TRIGger:RS232:WIDTh
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:RS232:WIDTh <width>
                  :TRIGger:RS232:WIDTh?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data width of RS232 trigger when the trigger condition is "Data".
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                         Default
                  <width>             Discrete            {5|6|7|8}                     8
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 5, 6, 7, or 8.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                        363
Command System
               Example
               :TRIGger:RS232:WIDTh 6             /*Sets the data width to 6.*/
               :TRIGger:RS232:WIDTh?               /*The query returns 6.*/
3.27.20.8     :TRIGger:RS232:STOP
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RS232:STOP <bit>
               :TRIGger:RS232:STOP?
               Description
               Sets or queries the stop bits of RS232 trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type                Range                                  Default
              <bit>             Discrete            {1|1.5|2}                              1
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns 1, 1.5, or 2.
               Example
               :TRIGger:RS232:STOP 2              /*Sets the stop bits to 2.*/
               :TRIGger:RS232:STOP?              /*The query returns 2.*/
3.27.20.9     :TRIGger:RS232:PARity
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:RS232:PARity <parity>
               :TRIGger:RS232:PARity?
               Description
               Sets or queries the check mode of RS232 trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type                Range                                  Default
              <parity>          Discrete            {EVEN|ODD|NONE}                        NONE
               Remarks
               N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
364
                                                                                         Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns EVEN, ODD, or NONE.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:RS232:PARity EVEN                   /*Sets the check mode to EVEN.*/
                  :TRIGger:RS232:PARity?                        /*The query returns EVEN.*/
3.27.21         :TRIGger:IIC
                 I2C is a 2-wire serial bus used to connect the microcontroller and its peripheral
                 device. It is a bus standard widely used in the microelectronic communication control
                 field.
                 The I2C serial bus consists of SCL and SDA. Its transmission rate is determined by SCL,
                 and its transmission data is determined by SDA, as shown in the figure below. The
                 instrument series triggers on the start condition, restart, stop, missing
                 acknowledgment, specific device address, or data value. Besides, it can also trigger on
                 the specific device address and data values at the same time.
                                    Figure 3.8 Schematic Diagram of I2C Frame Format
 3.27.21.1       :TRIGger:IIC:SCL
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:IIC:SCL <source>
                  :TRIGger:IIC:SCL?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the source channel of the clock line of I2C trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      365
Command System
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
                                                   CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                   CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:IIC:SCL CHANnel2             /*Sets the clock source to CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:IIC:SCL?                      /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.21.2     :TRIGger:IIC:CLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:IIC:CLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:IIC:CLEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of the clock line in I2C trigger. The unit is the same
               as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
                                                   Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                   VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
              <level>            Real              VerticalScale - Offset)                 0V
                                                   Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:IIC:CLEVel 0.16             /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:IIC:CLEVel?                 /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
366
                                                                                              Command System
 3.27.21.3       :TRIGger:IIC:SDA
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:IIC:SDA <source>
                  :TRIGger:IIC:SDA?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the source channel of the data line of I2C trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                                 CHANnel2
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:IIC:SDA CHANnel2                    /*Sets the data source to CHANnel2.*/
                  :TRIGger:IIC:SDA?                             /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.27.21.4       :TRIGger:IIC:DLEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DLEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DLEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger level of the data line in I2C trigger. The unit is the same as
                  that of the current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                  <level>             Real                VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x    0V
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset)
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           367
Command System
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
                                                   Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:IIC:DLEVel 0.16             /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:IIC:DLEVel?                 /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.21.5     :TRIGger:IIC:WHEN
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:IIC:WHEN <when>
               :TRIGger:IIC:WHEN?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger condition of I2C trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
                                                   {STARt|RESTart|STOP|
              <when>            Discrete           NACKnowledge|ADDRess|DATA|             STARt
                                                   ADATa}
               Remarks
               •    STARt: indicates that the oscilloscope triggers when SCL is high level and SDA
                    transitions from high level to low level.
               •    RESTart: indicates that the oscilloscope triggers when another start condition
                    occurs before a stop condition.
               •    STOP: indicates that the oscilloscope triggers when SCL is high level and SDA
                    transitions from low level to high level.
               •    NACKnowledge: indicates missing acknowledgment. The oscilloscope triggers
                    when SDA is high level during the acknowledgment of the SCL bit.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
368
                                                                                        Command System
                  •     ADDRess: indicates that the oscilloscope searches for the specified address and
                        triggers on the read/write bit.
                  •     DATA: indicates that the oscilloscope searches for the specified data on the
                        data line (SDA) and triggers on the clock line (SCL) of the jumping edge of the
                        last bit of the data.
                  •     ADATa: indicates that the oscilloscope searches for the specified address and
                        data, and then triggers when both the address and data meet the conditions.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns STAR, REST, STOP, NACK, ADDR, DATA, or ADAT.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:IIC:WHEN RESTart                    /*Sets the trigger condition to
                  RESTart.*/
                  :TRIGger:IIC:WHEN?                       /*The query returns REST.*/
 3.27.21.6       :TRIGger:IIC:AWIDth
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:IIC:AWIDth <bits>
                  :TRIGger:IIC:AWIDth?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the address width of I2C trigger when the trigger condition is
                  "ADDRess" or "ADATa".
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <bits>              Discrete            {7|8|10}                        7
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 7, 8, or 10.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:IIC:AWIDth 10                /*Sets the address width to 10.*/
                  :TRIGger:IIC:AWIDth?                  /*The query returns 10.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       369
Command System
3.27.21.7     :TRIGger:IIC:ADDRess
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:IIC:ADDRess <address>
               :TRIGger:IIC:ADDRess?
               Description
               Sets or queries the address of I2C trigger when the trigger condition is "ADDRess" or
               "ADATa".
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <address>         Integer           0 to 2n-1                               0
               Remarks
               In the expression 2n-1, n indicates the current address width. Its range is from 0 to
               127, 0 to 255, or 0 to 1,023.
               Return Format
               The query returns the address in integer.
               Example
               :TRIGger:IIC:ADDRess 100            /*Sets the address to 100.*/
               :TRIGger:IIC:ADDRess?               /*The query returns 100.*/
3.27.21.8     :TRIGger:IIC:DIRection
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:IIC:DIRection <direction>
               :TRIGger:IIC:DIRection?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data direction of I2C trigger when the trigger condition is
               "ADDRess" or "ADATa".
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <dir>             Discrete          {READ|WRITe|RWRite}                     WRITe
               Remarks
               This command is unavailable when the address width is set to 8.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
370
                                                                                        Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns READ, WRIT, or RWR.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DIRection RWRite                    /*Sets the data direction to
                  RWRite.*/
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DIRection?                          /*The query returns RWR.*/
 3.27.21.9       :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes <bytes>
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries of the data bytes of I2C trigger when the trigger condition is "DATA"
                  or "ADATa".
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <bytes>             Real                1 to 5                          1
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the data bytes in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes 3    /*Sets the data bytes to 3 when the
                  trigger condition is "DATA" or "ADATa".*/
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes?        /*The query returns 3.*/
 3.27.21.10      :TRIGger:IIC:DATA
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DATA <data>
                  :TRIGger:IIC:DATA?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data value of I2C trigger when the trigger condition is "DATA" or
                  "ADATa".
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       371
Command System
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <data>            Integer            0 to 240-1                             0
               Remarks
               The settable range of <data> is affected by the data bytes. You can send
               the :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes command to set the data bytes. The maximum byte length
               can be set to 5, that is, 40-bit binary data. Therefore, the range of <data> is from 0
               to 240-1.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer.
               Example
               :TRIGger:IIC:DATA 64            /*Sets the data value to 64.*/
               :TRIGger:IIC:DATA?              /*The query returns 64.*/
3.27.21.11    :TRIGger:IIC:CURRbit
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:IIC:CURRbit <currbit>
               :TRIGger:IIC:CURRbit?
               Description
               Sets or queries the current bit of the I2C trigger data.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <currbit>         Integer            0 to 39                                0
               Remarks
               After configuring the settings for this command, you can send the :TRIGger:IIC:CODE
               command to set or modify the set bit data.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 39.
               Example
               :TRIGger:IIC:CURRbit 8    /*Sets the current bit of I2C trigger
               data to 8. That is, the oscilloscope triggers on the 9th bit of
               I2C trigger data.*/
               :TRIGger:IIC:CURRbit?      /*The query returns 8.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
372
                                                                                            Command System
 3.27.21.12      :TRIGger:IIC:CODE
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:IIC:CODE <code>
                  :TRIGger:IIC:CODE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data value of a certain bit of I2C trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                              Default
                  <code>              Discrete            {0|1|255}                          255
                  Remarks
                  When <code> is set to 255, it indicates the data value can be any value.
                  After sending the :TRIGger:IIC:CURRbit command to set the specified bit, you can
                  send this command to query or modify the value of the specified data bit.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 0, 1, or 255.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:IIC:CODE 0               /*Sets the data value to 0.*/
                  :TRIGger:IIC:CODE?                 /*The query returns 0.*/
3.27.22         :TRIGger:SPI
                 In SPI trigger, after the CS or timeout condition is satisfied, the oscilloscope triggers
                 when the specified data is found. When using SPI trigger, you need to specify the CLK
                 clock sources and MISO data sources.
                            CS
                           SCL
                           SDA
                                             D7     D6         D5   D4   D3   D2       D1     D0
                                             Figure 3.9 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                          373
Command System
3.27.22.1     :TRIGger:SPI:CLK
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:CLK <source>
               :TRIGger:SPI:CLK?
               Description
               Sets or queries the channel source of the clock line of SPI trigger.
               Parameter
              Name               Type             Range                                   Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>           Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                  CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                  CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:CLK CHANnel3   /*Sets the channel source of the data
               line of SPI trigger to CHANnel3.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:CLK?           /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
3.27.22.2     :TRIGger:SPI:SCL
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:SCL <source>
               :TRIGger:SPI:SCL?
               Description
               Sets or queries the channel source of the clock line of SPI trigger.
               Parameter
              Name               Type             Range                                   Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
              <source>           Discrete                                                 CHANnel1
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
374
                                                                                              Command System
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  This command exists for backwards compatibility. Use the
                  command :TRIGger:SPI:CLK.
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SPI:SCL CHANnel1                /*Sets the channel source of the clock
                  line to CHANnel1.*/
                  :TRIGger:SPI:SCL?                        /*The query returns CHAN1.*/
 3.27.22.3       :TRIGger:SPI:CLEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CLEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CLEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger level of the clock channel of SPI trigger. The unit is the
                  same as that of the current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - OFFSet) to (4.5 x
                  <level>             Real                VerticalScale - OFFSet)              0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                           375
Command System
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:CLEVel 0.16            /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:CLEVel?                /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.22.4     :TRIGger:SPI:SLOPe
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLOPe <slope>
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLOPe?
               Description
               Sets or queries the type of the clock edge of SPI trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <slope>           Discrete          {POSitive|NEGative}                     POSitive
               Remarks
               •    POSitive: samples the data on the rising edge of the clock.
               •    NEGative: samples the data on the falling edge of the clock.
               Return Format
               The query returns POS or NEG.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLOPe POSitive             /*Sets the clock edge to POSitive.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLOPe?                    /*The query returns POS.*/
3.27.22.5     :TRIGger:SPI:MISO
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:MISO <source>
               :TRIGger:SPI:MISO?
               Description
               Sets or queries the channel source of the data line of SPI trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
                                                  {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
              <source>          Discrete                                                  CHANnel2
                                                  D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
376
                                                                                         Command System
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SPI:MISO CHANnel3 /*Sets the channel source of the data
                  line of SPI trigger to CHANnel3.*/
                  :TRIGger:SPI:MISO? /*The query returns CHAN3.*/
 3.27.22.6       :TRIGger:SPI:SDA
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SPI:SDA <source>
                  :TRIGger:SPI:SDA?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the channel source of the data line of SPI trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel2
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SPI:SDA CHANnel2 /*Sets the channel source of the data
                  line of SPI trigger to CHANnel2.*/
                  :TRIGger:SPI:SDA? /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      377
Command System
3.27.22.7     :TRIGger:SPI:DLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:DLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:SPI:DLEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of the data channel of SPI trigger. The unit is the
               same as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
                                                   Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                   VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
              <level>           Real               VerticalScale - Offset)                0V
                                                   Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
               Remarks
               For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
               the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:DLEVel 0.16             /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:DLEVel?                 /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.22.8     :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN <when>
               :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger condition of SPI trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                  Default
              <when>            Discrete           {CS|TIMeout}                           CS
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
378
                                                                                          Command System
                  Remarks
                  •     CS: if the CS signal is valid, the oscilloscope will trigger when the data (SDA)
                        satisfying the trigger conditions is found.
                  •     TIMeout: the oscilloscope starts to search for the data (MISO) on which to
                        trigger after the clock signal (CLK) stays in the idle state for a specified period
                        of time.
                  For DHO800 series, only 4-channel models support the CS setting for SPI trigger
                  condition.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns CS or TIM.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN TIMeout /*Sets the trigger condition to
                  TIMeout.*/
                  :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN? /*The query returns TIM.*/
 3.27.22.9       :TRIGger:SPI:CS
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CS <source>
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CS?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the source channel of the CS line when the trigger condition of SPI is
                  set to CS.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                             CHANnel3
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  This command is valid only when the trigger condition of SPI is set to CS. You can
                  send :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN to set or query the trigger condition of SPI trigger.
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
                  For DHO800 series, only 4-channel models support this command.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                           379
Command System
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:CS CHANnel2 /*Sets the source channel of the CS line
               to CHANnel2 when the trigger condition of SPI is set to CS.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:CS? /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.22.10    :TRIGger:SPI:SLEVel
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLEVel <level>
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLEVel?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger level of the CS channel of SPI trigger. The unit is the same
               as that of the current amplitude.
               Parameter
              Name              Type               Range                                   Default
                                                   Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                   VerticalScale - OFFSet) to (4.5 x
              <level>           Real               VerticalScale - OFFSet)                 0V
                                                   Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
               Remarks
               •    This setting command is valid only when the trigger condition of SPI trigger is
                    CS. You can run the :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN command to set or query the trigger
                    condition of SPI trigger.
               •    For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer
                    to the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
               •    For the DHO800 series, only the 4-channel model supports CS in SPI trigger.
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLEVel 0.16             /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:SLEVel?                 /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
380
                                                                                      Command System
 3.27.22.11      :TRIGger:SPI:MODE
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SPI:MODE <mode>
                  :TRIGger:SPI:MODE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the CS mode of SPI trigger when the trigger condition is "CS".
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                        Default
                  <mode>              Discrete            {HIGH|LOW}                   LOW
                  Remarks
                  This setting command is only valid in CS mode. You can send :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN to
                  set or query the trigger condition of SPI trigger.
                  For DHO800 series, only 4-channel models support this command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns HIGH or LOW.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SPI:MODE LOW /*Sets the CS mode to LOW.*/
                  :TRIGger:SPI:MODE? /*The query returns LOW.*/
 3.27.22.12      :TRIGger:SPI:TIMeout
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SPI:TIMeout <time>
                  :TRIGger:SPI:TIMeout?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the timeout value when the trigger condition of SPI trigger is
                  "Timeout". The default unit is s.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                        Default
                  <time>              Real                16 ns to 1 s                 1 μs
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                    381
Command System
               Remarks
               This setting command is valid only when the trigger condition of SPI trigger is
               Timeout. You can run the :TRIGger:SPI:WHEN command to set or query the trigger
               condition of SPI trigger.
               Return Format
               The query returns the timeout value in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:TIMeout 0.001             /*Sets the timeout value to 1 ms.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:TIMeout?                     /*The query returns 1.000000E-3.*/
3.27.22.13    :TRIGger:SPI:WIDTh
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:WIDTh <width>
               :TRIGger:SPI:WIDTh?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data width of data channel in SPI trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <width>           Integer           4 to 32                                 8
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 4 to 32.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:WIDTh 10            /*Sets the data width to 10.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:WIDTh?              /*The query returns 10.*/
3.27.22.14    :TRIGger:SPI:DATA
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:DATA <data>
               :TRIGger:SPI:DATA?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data value of SPI trigger.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
382
                                                                                     Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                       Default
                  <data>              Integer             0 to 232-1                  0
                  Remarks
                  The range of the parameter <data> is related to the current data width. You can
                  send the :TRIGger:SPI:WIDTh command to set or query the data width. The available
                  maximum data width is 32. Therefore, the range of <data> is from 0 to 232-1.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SPI:DATA 5               /*Sets the data value to 5.*/
                  :TRIGger:SPI:DATA?                 /*The query returns 5.*/
 3.27.22.15      :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit <currbit>
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the current bit of the SPI trigger data.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                       Default
                  <currbit>           Integer             0 to 39                     0
                  Remarks
                  After configuring the settings for this command, you can send
                  the :TRIGger:SPI:CODE command to set or modify the set bit data.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 39.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit 8    /*Sets the current bit of SPI trigger
                  data to 8. That is, the oscilloscope triggers on the 9th bit of
                  SPI trigger data.*/
                  :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit?      /*The query returns 8.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                    383
Command System
3.27.22.16    :TRIGger:SPI:CODE
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:SPI:CODE <code>
               :TRIGger:SPI:CODE?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data value of a certain bit of SPI trigger.
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
              <code>             Discrete          {0|1|255}                               255
               Remarks
               When <code> is set to 255, it indicates the data value can be any value.
               After sending the :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit command to set the specified bit, you can
               send this command to query or modify the value of the specified data bit.
               Return Format
               The query returns 0, 1, or 255.
               Example
               :TRIGger:SPI:CODE 0           /*Sets the data value to 0.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:CODE?             /*The query returns 0.*/
3.27.23      :TRIGger:CAN
              The :TRIGger:CAN commands are used to set relevant parameters for the CAN trigger.
              This oscilloscope can trigger on the start of a frame, end of a frame, frame of the
              specified type (e.g. Remote, Overload, Data, etc.), or error frame of the specified type
              (e.g. Answer Error, Check Error, Format Error, etc.) of the CAN signal.
              The data frame format of the CAN bus is as shown in the figure below.
                                 Figure 3.10 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
384
                                                                                         Command System
 3.27.23.1       :TRIGger:CAN:BAUD
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:CAN:BAUD <baud>
                  :TRIGger:CAN:BAUD?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the signal rate of CAN trigger. The unit is bps.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <baud>              Integer             10 kbps to 5 Mbps               1 Mbps
                  Remarks
                  If the baud rate is set to a value with "M", then "A" should be added at the end of
                  the value. For example, if you send 5M, you need to send 5MA.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 10 kbps to 5 Mbps.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:CAN:BAUD 125000                /*Sets the signal rate to 125000 bps.*/
                  :TRIGger:CAN:BAUD?                    /*The query returns 125000.*/
 3.27.23.2       :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce <source>
                  :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger source of CAN trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                          D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
                  <source>            Discrete                                            CHANnel1
                                                          CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                          CHANnel4}
                  Remarks
                  Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                        385
Command System
               Return Format
               The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
               D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
               Example
               :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce CHANnel2 /*Sets the trigger source to
               CHANnel2.*/
               :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce? /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.27.23.3     :TRIGger:CAN:STYPe
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:CAN:STYPe <stype>
               :TRIGger:CAN:STYPe?
               Description
               Sets or queries the signal type of CAN trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <stype>           Discrete          {H|L|RXTX|DIFFerential}                 H
               Remarks
               •    H: indicates the actual CAN_H differential bus signal.
               •    L: indicates the actual CAN_L differential bus signal.
               •    RXTX: indicates the Receive or Transmit signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
               •    DIFFerential: indicates the CAN differential bus signal connected to an analog
                    channel by using a differential probe. Connect the differential probe's positive
                    lead to the CAN_H bus signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus
                    signal.
               Return Format
               The query returns H, L, RXTX, or DIFF.
               Example
               :TRIGger:CAN:STYPe L       /*Sets the signal type to CAN_L
               differential bus signal.*/
               :TRIGger:CAN:STYPe?         /*The query returns L.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
386
                                                                                         Command System
 3.27.23.4       :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN <cond>
                  :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger condition of CAN trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                                                          {SOF|EOF|IDRemote|OVERload|
                                                          IDFRame|DATaframe|IDData|
                  <cond>              Discrete                                             SOF
                                                          ERFRame|ERANswer|ERCHeck|
                                                          ERFormat|ERRandom|ERBit}
                  Remarks
                  •     SOF: indicates start of frame. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers at the
                        start of a data frame.
                  •     EOF: indicates end of frame. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers at the
                        end of a data frame.
                  Frame Type
                  •     IDRemote: indicates remote ID. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on the
                        remote frame with the specified ID.
                  •     OVERload: indicates overload frame. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers
                        on the CAN overload frames.
                  •     IDFRame: indicates frame ID. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on the
                        data frames with the specified ID.
                  •     DATAframe: indicates frame data. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on
                        the data frames with specified data.
                  •     IDData: indicates Data & ID. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on the
                        data frames with the specified ID and data.
                  Frame Error
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                            387
Command System
               •    ERFRame: indicates frame error. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on
                    the error frame.
               •    ERANswer: indicates answer error. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on
                    the answer error frame.
               •    ERCHeck: indicates check error. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on the
                    check error frame.
               •    ERFormat: indicates format error. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on
                    the format error frame.
               •    ERRandom: indicates random error. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers
                    on the random error frame, such as the format error frame, answer error frame,
                    etc.
               •    ERBit: indicates bit fill. It indicates that the oscilloscope triggers on the error
                    frame with the bit fill.
               Return Format
               The query returns SOF, EOF, IDR, OVER, IDFR, DAT, IDD, ERFR, ERAN, ERCH, ERF, ERR,
               or ERB.
               Example
               :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN EOF            /*Sets the trigger condition to EOF.*/
               :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN?                 /*The query returns EOF.*/
3.27.23.5     :TRIGger:CAN:SPOint
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:CAN:SPOint <spoint>
               :TRIGger:CAN:SPOint?
               Description
               Sets or queries the sample point position of CAN trigger (expressed in %).
               Parameter
              Name               Type              Range                                   Default
              <spoint>           Integer           10 to 90                                50
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
388
                                                                                       Command System
                  Remarks
                  The sample point is within the range of the bit time. The oscilloscope samples the bit
                  level at the sample point. The sample point position is expressed as the ratio of
                  "time from the bit start to the sample point" to "bit time", in %.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 10 to 90.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:CAN:SPoint 60                       /*Sets the sample point position of
                  CAN trigger to 60%.*/
                  :TRIGger:CAN:SPoint?                         /*The query returns 60.*/
 3.27.23.6       :TRIGger:CAN:EXTended
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:CAN:EXTended <bool>
                  :TRIGger:CAN:EXTended?
                  Description
                  Enables or disables the extended ID when the trigger condition of CAN trigger is
                  "Remote ID" or "Frame ID"; queries whether the extended ID is enabled when the
                  trigger condition of CAN trigger is "Remote ID" or "Frame ID".
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <bool>              Bool                {{1|ON}|{0|OFF}}               0|OFF
                  Remarks
                  •     0|OFF: disables the extended ID.
                  •     1|ON: enables the extended ID.
                  To set or query the trigger condition of CAN trigger, send the :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN
                  command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 0 or 1.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:CAN:EXTended ON /*Enables the extended ID.*/
                  :TRIGger:CAN:EXTended    /*The query returns 1.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      389
Command System
3.27.23.7     :TRIGger:CAN:DEFine
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:CAN:DEFine <type>
               :TRIGger:CAN:DEFine?
               Description
               Sets Define to ID or Data when the trigger condition of CAN trigger is set to Data or
               ID; queries Define to ID or Data when the trigger condition of CAN trigger is set to
               Data or ID.
               Parameter
              Name              Type             Range                                   Default
              <type>            Discrete         {DATA|ID}                               DATA
               Remarks
               •    DATA: sets Define to Data.
               •    ID: sets Define to ID.
               To set or query the trigger condition of CAN trigger, send the :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN
               command.
               Return Format
               The query returns DATA or ID.
               Example
               :TRIGger:CAN:DEFine ID /*Sets Define to ID.*/
               :TRIGger:CAN:DEFine? /*The query returns ID.*/
3.27.23.8     :TRIGger:CAN:DWIDth
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:CAN:DWIDth <data>
               :TRIGger:CAN:DWIDth?
               Description
               Sets or queries the data width of CAN trigger when the trigger condition is
               "DATaframe" or "IDData".
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
390
                                                                                       Command System
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <data>              Integer             1 to 8                         1
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 8.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:CAN:DWIDth 5    /*Sets the data width of CAN trigger to 5
                  when the trigger condition is "DATaframe" or "IDData".*/
                  :TRIGger:CAN:DWIDth?      /*The query returns 5.*/
 3.27.23.9       :TRIGger:CAN:DATA
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:CAN:DATA <data>
                  :TRIGger:CAN:DATA?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data value of CAN trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <data>              Integer             0 to 240-1                     0
                  Remarks
                  The settable range of <data> is affected by the data bytes. You can send
                  the :TRIGger:IIC:DBYTes command to set the data bytes. The maximum byte length
                  can be set to 5, i.g. 40-bit binary data. Therefore, the range of <data> is from 0 to
                  240-1.
                  This command is valid when the trigger condition is set to "Frame Data" or "Data &
                  ID" (send :TRIGger:CAN:WHEN command to set or query).
                  •     When the trigger condition is "Frame Data", the setting command is used to set
                        the data value.
                  •     When the trigger condition is "Data & ID", the value to be set by sending the
                        setting command is based on the :TRIGger:CAN:DEFine command.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                          391
Command System
                    -     When Define is set to "ID", the setting command is used to set the ID
                          value.
                    -     When Define is set to "Data", the setting command is used to set the data
                          value.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer.
               Example
               :TRIGger:CAN:DATA 100           /*Sets the data value of CAN trigger to
               100.*/
               :TRIGger:CAN:DATA?              /*The query returns 100.*/
3.27.23.10    :TRIGger:CAN:CURRbit
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:CAN:CURRbit <currbit>
               :TRIGger:CAN:CURRbit?
               Description
               Sets or queries the current bit of the CAN trigger data.
               Parameter
              Name                 Type           Range                                  Default
              <currbit>            Integer        0 to 39                                0
               Remarks
               After configuring the settings for this command, you can send
               the :TRIGger:CAN:CODE command to set or modify the set bit data.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 39.
               Example
               :TRIGger:CAN:CURRbit 8    /*Sets the current bit of CAN trigger
               data to 8. That is, the oscilloscope triggers on the 9th bit of
               CAN trigger data.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit?      /*The query returns 8.*/
3.27.23.11    :TRIGger:CAN:CODE
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:CAN:CODE <code>
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
392
                                                                                              Command System
                  :TRIGger:CAN:CODE?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data value of a certain bit of CAN trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                  <code>              Discrete            {0|1|255}                            255
                  Remarks
                  When <code> is set to 255, it indicates the data value can be any value.
                  After sending the :TRIGger:CAN:CURRbit command to set the specified bit, you can
                  send this command to query or modify the value of the specified data bit.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 0, 1, or 255.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:CAN:CODE 0               /*Sets the data value to 0.*/
                  :TRIGger:CAN:CODE?                 /*The query returns 0.*/
 3.27.23.12      :TRIGger:CAN:LEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:CAN:LEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:CAN:LEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger level of CAN trigger. Its unit is the same as that of the
                  current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
                  <level>             Real                VerticalScale - Offset)              0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           393
Command System
               Return Format
               The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
               Example
               :TRIGger:CAN:LEVel 0.16             /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
               :TRIGger:CAN:LEVel?                 /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
3.27.24      :TRIGger:LIN
              The :TRIGger:LIN commands are used to set relevant parameters for the LIN trigger.
              NOTE
              Only the DHO900 series supports :TRIGger:LIN commands.
              The oscilloscope can trigger on the sync field of LIN signal, and can also trigger on
              the specified identifier, data, or frame.
              The data frame format of the LIN bus is as shown in the figure below.
                                  Figure 3.11 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus
3.27.24.1     :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce <source>
               :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce?
               Description
               Sets or queries the trigger source of LIN trigger.
               Parameter
              Name               Type               Range                                  Default
                                                    {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                    D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
              <source>           Discrete                                                  CHANnel1
                                                    CHANnel1|CHANnel2|CHANnel3|
                                                    CHANnel4}
               Remarks
               Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
394
                                                                                              Command System
                  Return Format
                  The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                  D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, or CHAN4.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce CHANnel2                  /*Sets the trigger source to
                  CHANnel2.*/
                  :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce?                            /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
 3.27.24.2       :TRIGger:LIN:LEVel
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:LIN:LEVel <level>
                  :TRIGger:LIN:LEVel?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger level of LIN trigger. Its unit is the same as that of the
                  current amplitude.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                                Default
                                                          Analog channel: (-4.5 x
                                                          VerticalScale - Offset) to (4.5 x
                  <level>             Real                VerticalScale - Offset)              0V
                                                          Digital channel: -20 V to 20 V
                  Remarks
                  For VerticalScale, refer to the :CHANnel<n>:SCALe command. For OFFSet, refer to
                  the :CHANnel<n>:OFFSet command.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns the trigger level in scientific notation.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:LIN:LEVel 0.16                /*Sets the trigger level to 160 mV.*/
                  :TRIGger:LIN:LEVel?                    /*The query returns 1.600000E-1.*/
 3.27.24.3       :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard <std>
                  :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                         DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                          Guide
                                                                                                           395
Command System
               Description
               Sets or queries the protocol version of LIN trigger.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <std>             Discrete          {1X|2X|BOTH}                            BOTH
               Remarks
               N/A
               Return Format
               The query returns 1X, 2X, or BOTH.
               Example
               :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard 2X                      /*Sets the protocol version of
               LIN trigger to 2X.*/
               :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard?                        /*The query returns 2X.*/
3.27.24.4     :TRIGger:LIN:BAUD
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:LIN:BAUD <baud>
               :TRIGger:LIN:BAUD?
               Description
               Sets or queries the baud rate of LIN trigger. The default unit is bps.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <baud>            Integer           1 kbps to 20 Mbps                       9600 bps
               Remarks
               If the baud rate is set to a value with "M", then "A" should be added at the end of
               the value. For example, if you send 5M, you need to send 5MA.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 1 kbps to 20 Mbps.
               Example
               :TRIGger:LIN:BAUD 19200                 /*Sets the baud rate of LIN trigger
               to 19.2 kbps.*/
               :TRIGger:LIN:BAUD?                        /*The query returns 19200.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
396
                                                                                        Command System
 3.27.24.5       :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint <value>
                  :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the sample position of LIN trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                  <value>             Integer             10 to 90                        50
                  Remarks
                  The sample position is expressed as the ratio of "time from the bit start to the
                  sample point" to "bit time", in %.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 10 to 90.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint 40                        /*Sets the sample point
                  position of LIN trigger to 40%.*/
                  :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint?                          /*The query returns 40.*/
 3.27.24.6       :TRIGger:LIN:WHEN
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:LIN:WHEN <when>
                  :TRIGger:LIN:WHEN?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the trigger condition of LIN trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                           Default
                                                          {SYNCbreak|ID|DATA|IDData|
                  <when>              Discrete                                            SYNCbreak
                                                          SLEep|WAKeup|ERRor}
                  Remarks
                  •     SYNCbreak: triggers on the last bit of the sync field.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                       397
Command System
               •    ID: triggers when the frames with the specified ID are found.
               •    DATA: triggers when the data that meet the preset conditions are found.
               •    IDData: triggers when the frames with the specified ID and data that meet the
                    preset conditions are both found.
               •    SLEep: triggers when the sleep frame is found.
               •    WAKeup: triggers when the wakeup frame is found.
               •    ERRor: triggers on the specified type of error frame.
               Return Format
               The query returns SYNC, ID, DATA, IDD, SLE, WAK, or ERR.
               Example
               :TRIGger:LIN:WHEN SYNCbreak                     /*Sets the trigger condition to
               SYNCbreak.*/
               :TRIGger:LIN:WHEN?                              /*The query returns SYNC.*/
3.27.24.7     :TRIGger:LIN:ERRor
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:LIN:ERRor <value>
               :TRIGger:LIN:ERRor?
               Description
               Sets or queries the error type of LIN trigger when the trigger condition is "Data".
               Parameter
              Name              Type                Range                                   Default
              <value>           Discrete            {SYNC|ID|CHECk}                         SYNC
               Remarks
               •    SYNC: indicates Sync error.
               •    ID: indicates Even Odd error.
               •    CHECk: check sum error.
               Return Format
               The query returns SYNC, ID, or CHEC.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                           Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
398
                                                                                          Command System
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:LIN:ERRor ID                        /*Sets the LIN trigger error type to
                  ID.*/
                  :TRIGger:LIN:ERRor?                               /*The query returns ID.*/
 3.27.24.8       :TRIGger:LIN:ID
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:LIN:ID <id>
                  :TRIGger:LIN:ID?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the ID value of LIN trigger when the trigger condition is "Data & ID".
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <id>                Integer             0 to 63                          0
                  Remarks
                  N/A
                  Return Format
                  The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 63.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:LIN:ID 4                             /*Sets the ID value of LIN trigger
                  to 4.*/
                  :TRIGger:LIN:ID?                             /*The query returns 4.*/
 3.27.24.9       :TRIGger:LIN:DATA
                  Syntax
                  :TRIGger:LIN:DATA <data>
                  :TRIGger:LIN:DATA?
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data value of LIN trigger when the trigger condition is "Data".
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                            Default
                  <data>              Integer             Refer to Remarks                 0
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                      DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                       Guide
                                                                                                        399
Command System
               Remarks
               The range of the data value of LIN trigger is related to the value of data bytes. The
               maximum number of bytes can be set to 8, i.g. 64-bit binary data. Therefore, the
               range of <data> is from 0 to 264-1.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 264-1.
               Example
               :TRIGger:LIN:DATA 100    /*Sets the data value of LIN trigger to
               100 when the trigger condition is "Data".*/
               :TRIGger:LIN:DATA?      /*The query returns 100.*/
3.27.24.10    :TRIGger:LIN:CURRbit
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:LIN:CURRbit <currbit>
               :TRIGger:LIN:CURRbit?
               Description
               Sets or queries the current bit of the LIN trigger data.
               Parameter
              Name              Type              Range                                   Default
              <currbit>         Integer           0 to 39                                 0
               Remarks
               After configuring the settings for this command, you can send
               the :TRIGger:LIN:CODE command to set or modify the set bit data.
               Return Format
               The query returns an integer ranging from 0 to 39.
               Example
               :TRIGger:LIN:CURRbit 8    /*Sets the current bit of LIN trigger
               data to 8. That is, the oscilloscope triggers on the 9th bit of
               LIN trigger data.*/
               :TRIGger:SPI:CURRbit?      /*The query returns 8.*/
3.27.24.11    :TRIGger:LIN:CODE
               Syntax
               :TRIGger:LIN:CODE <code>
               :TRIGger:LIN:CODE?
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
400
                                                                                       Command System
                  Description
                  Sets or queries the data value of a certain bit of LIN trigger.
                  Parameter
                  Name                Type                Range                          Default
                  <code>              Discrete            {0|1|255}                      255
                  Remarks
                  When <code> is set to 255, it indicates the data value can be any value.
                  After sending the :TRIGger:LIN:CURRbit command to set the specified bit, you can
                  send this command to query or modify the value of the specified data bit.
                  Return Format
                  The query returns 0, 1, or 255.
                  Example
                  :TRIGger:LIN:CODE 0               /*Sets the data value to 0.*/
                  :TRIGger:LIN:CODE?                 /*The query returns 0.*/
3.28            :WAVeform Commands
                 The :WAVeform commands are used to read waveform data and relevant settings.
                 The :WAVeform:MODE command is used to set the reading mode of waveform data.
                 In different modes, the definitions for the parameters are different, as shown in Figure
                 3.12 and Figure 3.13 .
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      401
Command System
                XORigin              XINCrement=TimeScale/100               XREFerence
                           YORigin
                      YREFerence
                  YINCrement=Verticalscale/7500
                                 Figure 3.12 Parameter Definitions in NORMAL Mode
                 XORigin      XINCrement=TimeScale/100     XREFerence
                     YORigin
                   YREFerence
                     YINCrement[1]
                                     Figure 3.13 Parameter Definitions in RAW Mode
              NOTE
              [1]: In RAW mode, YINCrement and Verticalscale of the memory waveforms are related to the
              currently selected Verticalscale.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                                Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
402
                                                                                       Command System
                 Waveform data reading
                 •     WORD or BYTE format: The read data format is TMC header + waveform data
                       points + end identifier. The TMC header is in #NXXXXXX format; wherein, # is
                       the TMC header identifier; N following # represents the length of the waveform
                       data; the length of the waveform data points is expressed in ASCII strings,and
                       the terminator represents the ending of communication. For example, the data
                       read for one time is #9000001000XXXX. It indicates that 9 bytes are used to
                       describe the data length. 000001000 indicates the length of waveform data, that
                       is, 1,000 bytes.
                 •     ASCii format: The read data format is waveform data points + end identifier. The
                       waveform data point query returns the actual voltage value of each waveform
                       point in scientific notation; and the voltage values are separated by commas.
                 •     When the waveform data in the internal memory are read in batches, the
                       waveform data returned each time might be the data in one area of the internal
                       memory. In "WORD" or "BYTE" return format, each returned data in blocks
                       contain the TMC data block header. Waveform data in two adjacent data blocks
                       are consecutive.
                 •     The figure below shows the waveform data that have been read (in BYTE format).
                       First, select "View as hexadecimal only" from the drop-down list at the right side.
                       Then, the waveform data that have been read are displayed in hexadecimal
                       format. The first 11 bytes denote the "TMC data block header", and beginning
                       from the 12th byte (8E) are the waveform data. You can convert the waveform
                       data read to the voltage value of each point of the waveform by using the
                       formula "(0x8E - YORigin - YREFerence) × YINCrement". For the definitions of the
                       parameters in this formula, refer to Related Commands.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                        403
Command System
              Related Commands
              :WAVeform:MODE
              :WAVeform:YINCrement?
              :WAVeform:YORigin?
3.28.1       :WAVeform:SOURce
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:SOURce <source>
              :WAVeform:SOURce?
              Description
              Sets or queries the source channel of waveform data reading.
              Parameter
               Name             Type            Range                                   Default
                                                {D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|
                                                D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|
               <source>         Discrete        CHANnel1|CHANnel2|                      CHANnel1
                                                CHANnel3|CHANnel4|MATH1|
                                                MATH2|MATH3|MATH4}
              Remarks
              When the channel source is set to MATH1~MATH4, :WAVeform:MODE can only select
              the NORMal mode.
              Digital channels (D0 to D15) are only supported by the DHO900 series.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
404
                                                                                       Command System
                 Return Format
                 The query returns D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10, D11, D12, D13, D14,
                 D15, CHAN1, CHAN2, CHAN3, CHAN4, MATH1, MATH2, MATH3, or MATH4.
                 Example
                 :WAVeform:SOURce CHANnel2                 /*Sets the channel source to
                 CHANnel2.*/
                 :WAVeform:SOURce?                             /*The query returns CHAN2.*/
3.28.2          :WAVeform:MODE
                 Syntax
                 :WAVeform:MODE <mode>
                 :WAVeform:MODE?
                 Description
                 Sets or queries the mode of the :WAVeform:DATA? command in reading data.
                 Parameter
                     Name             Type                Range                          Default
                     <mode>           Discrete            {NORMal|MAXimum|RAW}           NORMal
                 Remarks
                 •     NORMal: reads the waveform data currently displayed on the screen.
                 •     MAXimum: reads the waveform data displayed on the screen when the
                       oscilloscope is in the Run state; reads the waveform data from the internal
                       memory when the oscilloscope is in the Stop state.
                 •     RAW: reads the waveform data from the internal memory. Note: The data in the
                       internal memory can only be read when the oscilloscope is in the Stop state. You
                       are not allowed to operate the instrument when it is reading data.
                 •     When the channel source is set to MATH, only the NORMal mode is valid.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns NORM, MAX, or RAW.
                 Example
                 :WAVeform:MODE RAW           /*Sets the reading mode of waveform data to
                 RAW.*/
                 :WAVeform:MODE?               /*The query returns RAW.*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                      405
Command System
3.28.3       :WAVeform:FORMat
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:FORMat <format>
              :WAVeform:FORMat?
              Description
              Sets or queries the return format of the waveform data.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <format>       Discrete         {WORD|BYTE|ASCii}                      BYTE
              Remarks
              •     WORD: Each waveform point occupies two bytes (16 bits).
              •     BYTE: Each waveform point occupies one byte (8 bits).
              •     ASCii: The query returns the actual voltage value of each waveform point in
                    scientific notation; and the voltage values are separated by commas.
              Return Format
              The query returns WORD, BYTE, or ASC.
              Example
              :WAVeform:FORMat WORD         /*Sets the returned format of waveform data
              to WORD.*/
              :WAVeform:FORMat?               /*The query returns WORD.*/
3.28.4       :WAVeform:POINts
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:POINts <point>
              :WAVeform:POINts?
              Description
              Sets or queries the number of the waveform points to be read in the current mode.
              Parameter
                  Name           Type             Range                                  Default
                  <point>        Integer          Refer to Remarks                       -
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
406
                                                                                     Command System
                 Remarks
                 The range of <point> is related to the current reading mode of the waveform data.
                 You can send the :WAVeform:MODE command to set or query the reading mode of
                 the waveform data.
                 •     NORMal: 1 to 1,000
                 •     RAW: 1 to the current maximum memory depth
                 •     MAXimum: In RUN state: 1 to the number of effective points on the current
                       screen; In STOP state: 1 to the number of effective points in the current memory
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the number of waveform points in integer.
                 Example
                 :WAVeform:POINts 100    /*Sets the number of waveform points to be
                 read to 100.*/
                 :WAVeform:POINts?    /*The query returns 100.*/
3.28.5          :WAVeform:DATA?
                 Syntax
                 :WAVeform:DATA?
                 Description
                 Reads the waveform data.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 Procedures of reading the waveform data from the screen:
                 :WAV:SOUR CHAN1     /*Sets the channel source to CHANnel1.*/
                 :WAV:MODE NORMal    /*Sets the waveform reading mode to NORMal.*/
                 :WAV:FORM BYTE    /*Sets the return format of the waveform data to
                 BYTE.*/
                 :WAV:DATA?     /*Reads the waveform data on the screen.*/
                 Procedures of reading the waveform data from the internal memory:
                 :STOP    /*Sets the instrument to STOP state (you can only read the
                 waveform data from the internal memory when the oscilloscope is in
                 STOP state).*/
                 :WAV:SOUR CHAN1   /*Sets the channel source to CHANnel1.*/
                 :WAV:MODE RAW   /*Sets the waveform reading mode to RAW.*/
                 :WAV:FORM BYTE   /*Sets the return format of the waveform data to
                 BYTE.*/
                 :WAV:STAR 1     /*Sets the start point of waveform data reading to
                 the first waveform point.*/
                 :WAVeform:STOP 120000   /*Sets the stop point of waveform data
                 reading to the 120,000th waveform point (last point).*/
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                     407
Command System
              Return Format
              The return format is related to the return format of the currently selected waveform
              data (:WAVeform:FORMat). For detailed operations, refer to descriptions in Waveform
              data reading.
3.28.6       :WAVeform:XINCrement?
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:XINCrement?
              Description
              Queries the time interval between two neighboring points of the currently selected
              channel source in the X direction.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              The returned value is related to the current data reading mode:
              •     In NORMal mode, XINCrement = TimeScale/100.
              •     In RAW mode, XINCrement = 1/SampleRate.
              •     In MAX mode, XINCrement = TimeScale/100 when the oscilloscope is in the Run
                    state; XINCrement = 1/SampleRate when the oscilloscope is in the Stop state.
              The unit is related to the current channel source:
              Return Format
              The query returns the time difference in scientific notation.
              Example
              N/A
3.28.7       :WAVeform:XORigin?
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:XORigin?
              Description
              Queries the start time of the waveform data of the currently selected channel source
              in the X direction.
              Parameter
              N/A
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
408
                                                                                     Command System
                 Remarks
                 The returned value is related to the current data reading mode:
                 •     In NORMal mode, the query returns the start time of the waveform data
                       displayed on the screen.
                 •     In RAW mode, the query returns the start time of the waveform data in the
                       internal memory.
                 •     In MAX mode, the query returns the start time of the waveform data displayed
                       on the screen when the instrument is in the RUN state; the query returns the
                       start time of the waveform data in the internal memory when the instrument is
                       in the Stop state.
                 The unit is related to the current channel source.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns the time value in scientific notation.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.28.8          :WAVeform:XREFerence?
                 Syntax
                 :WAVeform:XREFerence?
                 Description
                 Queries the reference time of the waveform points of the currently selected channel
                 source in the X direction.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 0 (namely the first waveform point on the screen or in the internal
                 memory).
                 Example
                 N/A
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                      409
Command System
3.28.9       :WAVeform:YINCrement?
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:YINCrement?
              Description
              Queries the unit voltage value of the current source channel Y in the Y direction.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              The returned value is related to the current data reading mode:
              •     In NORMal mode, YINCrement = VerticalScale/7500.
              •     In RAW mode, YINCrement and Verticalscale of the memory waveforms are
                    related to the currently selected Verticalscale.
              •     In MAX mode, YINCrement = VerticalScale/7500 when the instrument is in the
                    RUN state; YINCrement is related to the VerticalScale of the internal waveform
                    and the currently selected VerticalScale when the instrument is in the Stop state.
              Return Format
              The query returns the unit voltage value in scientific notation.
              Example
              N/A
3.28.10      :WAVeform:YORigin?
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:YORigin?
              Description
              Queries the vertical offset relative to the vertical reference position of the currently
              selected channel source in the Y direction.
              Parameter
              N/A
              Remarks
              The returned value is related to the current data reading mode:
              •     In NORMal mode, YORigin = VerticalOffset/YINCrement.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                          Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
410
                                                                                         Command System
                 •       In RAW mode, YORigin is related to the VerticalScale of the memory waveforms
                         and the currently selected VerticalScale.
                 •       In MAX mode, YORigin = VerticalOffset/YINCrement when the instrument is in
                         the RUN state; YORigin is related to the VerticalScale of the internal waveform
                         and the currently selected VerticalScale when the instrument is in the Stop state.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.28.11         :WAVeform:YREFerence?
                 Syntax
                 :WAVeform:YREFerence?
                 Description
                 Queries the vertical reference position of the currently selected channel source in the
                 Y direction.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 The value of YREFerence is related to the configuration of the :WAVeform:FORMat
                 command. The reference position is different for different return formats of waveform
                 data.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
                 Example
                 N/A
3.28.12         :WAVeform:STARt
                 Syntax
                 :WAVeform:STARt <sta>
                 :WAVeform:STARt?
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                     DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                      Guide
                                                                                                           411
Command System
              Description
              Sets or queries the start position of waveform data reading.
              Parameter
                  Name              Type          Range                                   Default
                  <sta>             Integer       Refer to Remarks                        1
              Remarks
              When reading the waveform data from the internal memory, the actual settable
              ranges of the start point and stop point of a reading operation are related to the
              memory depth of the oscilloscope and the return format of the waveform data
              currently selected.
              •     In Normal mode, the range is from 1 to 1,000.
              •     In Max mode, when the oscilloscope is in RUN state, its range is from 1 to 1,000;
                    when the oscilloscope is in STOP state, its range is from 1 to current maximum
                    memory depth.
              •     In Raw mode, the range is from 1 to the current maximum memory depth.
              Return Format
              The query returns an integer.
              Example
              :WAVeform:STARt 100    /*Sets the start point to 100.*/
              :WAVeform:STARt?    /*The query returns 100.*/
3.28.13      :WAVeform:STOP
              Syntax
              :WAVeform:STOP <stop>
              :WAVeform:STOP?
              Description
              Sets or queries the stop position of waveform data reading.
              Parameter
                  Name              Type          Range                                   Default
                  <stop>            Integer       Refer to Remarks                        1,000
              Remarks
              When reading the waveform data in the internal memory, the actual settable ranges
              of the start point and stop point of a reading operation are related to the memory
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
412
                                                                                      Command System
                 depth of the oscilloscope and the return format of the waveform data currently
                 selected.
                 •     In Normal mode, the range is from 1 to 1,000.
                 •     In Max mode, when the oscilloscope is in RUN state, its range is from 1 to 1,000;
                       when the oscilloscope is in STOP state, its range is from 1 to current maximum
                       memory depth.
                 •     In Raw mode, the range is from 1 to the current maximum memory depth.
                 Return Format
                 The query returns an integer.
                 Example
                 :WAVeform:STOP 500   /*Sets the stop point to 500.*/
                 :WAVeform:STOP?   /*The query returns 500.*/
3.28.14         :WAVeform:PREamble?
                 Syntax
                 :WAVeform:PREamble?
                 Description
                 Queries all the waveform parameters.
                 Parameter
                 N/A
                 Remarks
                 N/A
                 Return Format
                 The query returns 10 waveform parameters, separated by commas.
                 <format>,<type>,<points>,<count>,<xincrement>,<xorigin>,<xreference>,<yincre
                 ment>,<yorigin>,<yreference>
                 Wherein,
                 <format>: indicates 0 (BYTE), 1 (WORD), or 2 (ASC).
                 <type>: indicates 0 (NORMal), 1 (MAXimum), or 2 (RAW).
                 <points>: an integer ranging from 1 to 50,000,000.
                 <count>: indicates the number of averages in the average sample mode. The value of
                 <count> parameter is 1 in other modes.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                     413
Command System
              <xincrement>: indicates the time difference between two neighboring points in the
              X direction.
              <xorigin>: indicates the start time of the waveform data in the X direction.
              <xreference>: indicates the reference time of the waveform data in the X direction.
              <yincrement>: indicates the step value of the waveforms in the Y direction.
              <yorigin>: indicates the vertical offset relative to the "Vertical Reference Position" in
              the Y direction.
              <yreference>: indicates the vertical reference position in the Y direction.
              Example
              :WAVeform:PREamble?/*The query returns
              0,0,1000,1,1.000000E-8,-5.000000E-6,0.000000E-12,4.000000E-03,0,128.
              */
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                         Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
414
                                                                                         Application Examples
4               Application Examples
                 This chapter provides some application examples of the SCPI commands. The main
                 functions of the instrument can be realized through a series of SCPI commands.
                 NOTE
                 •     The range of certain parameters for different models may be different. Therefore, you
                       need to adjust the parameter range for the model that you use if necessary.
                 •     Before using the examples in this chapter, please select the desired communication
                       interface (USB or LAN) and make correct connections. In addition, you have to install
                       Ultra Sigma or other PC software that can be used to send commands.
                 •     In each example, every command is followed by contents enclosed by two slashes ("/*"
                       and "*/"). They are the descriptions of the command and not part of the command, which
                       help you understand the command better.
4.1             To Configure Basic Parameters
                 Set the Channel Parameters
                 Example description: enable CH1, set the vertical scale to 0.1 V/div, and set the
                 coupling mode to AC.
                 Method
                 :CHANnel1:DISPlay ON                   /*Enables CHANnel1.*/
                 :CHANnel1:SCALe 0.1                    /*Sets the vertical scale to 0.1 V/div
                 for CH1.*/
                 :CHANnel1:COUPling AC              /*Sets the coupling mode to AC for CH1.*/
                 Set the Horizontal Parameters
                 Example description: set the memory depth to 1M and the horizontal time base to
                 200 μs/div.
                 Method
                 :ACQuire:MDEPth 1M                            /*Sets the memory depth to 1M.*/
                 :TIMebase:MODE MAIN                           /*Sets the horizontal time base mode
                 to MAIN.*/
                 :TIMebase:MAIN:SCALe 0.0002                   /*Sets the main time base to 200 μs/
                 div.*/
                 Set the Trigger Parameters
                 Example description: set the triggers on the rising edge with the specified voltage
                 threshold (160 mV).
                 Method
                 :TRIGger:MODE EDGE                              /*Selects the edge trigger.*/
                 :TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce CHANnel2                   /*Sets the trigger source to
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                        DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                         Guide
                                                                                                               415
Application Examples
              CHANnel2.*/
              :TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe POSitive             /*Sets the edge type to rising
              edge.*/
              :TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel 0.16                 /*Sets the trigger level to 160
              mV.*/
              :TRIGger:STATus?                         /*Queries the current trigger
              status.*/
4.2          To Set Measurements
              Read the Statistical Peak-to Peak Value
              Example description: reads the statistical peak-to-peak value for CH2.
              Method
              :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE PERCent             /*Sets the threshold type to
              PERCent.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MAX 95                       /*Sets the upper limit to 95%.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MID 89                       /*Sets the middle value to 89%.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MIN 53                       /*Sets the lower limit to 53%.*/
              :MEASure:ITEM VPP,CHANnel2     /*Adds the CH2 waveform peak-to-peak
              value measurement item./
              :MEASure:ITEM? VPP,CHANnel2    /*Queries the current measurement
              results of the CH2 waveform peak-to-peak value.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:RESet              /*Clears the history
              statistics data and makes statistics again.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM VPP,CHANnel2
                        /*Adds the CH2 waveform peak-to-peak value measurement
              item.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? CNT,VPP,CHANnel2
                        /*Queries the count value of the measurement item. */
              :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? MAXimum,VPP,CHANnel2
                        /*Queries the maximum value of the CH2 peak-to-peak
              value.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? MINimum,VPP,CHANnel2
                        /*Queries the minimum value of the CH2 peak-to-peak
              value.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? AVERages,VPP,CHANnel2
                        /*Queries the average value of the CH2 peak-to-peak
              value.*/
              :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? DEViation,VPP,CHANnel2
                        /*Queries the deviation of the CH2 peak-to-peak value.*/
              Read the Duty Cycle
              Example description: read the duty cycle of the periodic pulse at a set percentage.
              Method
              :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE PERCent             /*Sets the threshold type to
              PERCent.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MAX 95                       /*Sets the upper limit to 95%.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MID 89                       /*Sets the middle value to 89%.*/
              :MEASure:SETup:MIN 53                       /*Sets the lower limit to 53%.*/
              :MEASure:ITEM PDUTy,CHANnel2           /*Adds the CH2 periodic pulse duty
              cycle measurement item.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                        Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
416
                                                                                   Application Examples
                 :MEASure:ITEM? PDUTy,CHANnel2                 /*Queries the current duty cycle
                 value for CH2.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:RESet   /*Clears the history statistics data and
                 makes statistics again.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM PDUTy,CHANnel2
                                                      /*Adds the CH2 waveform duty
                 cycle measurement item.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? CNT,PDUTy,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the count value of the measurement item. */
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? MAXimum,PDUTy,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the maximum value of the CH2 duty cycle.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? MINimum,PDUTy,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the minimum value of the CH2 duty cycle.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? AVERages,PDUTy,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the average value of the CH2 duty cycle.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? DEViation,PDUTy,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the deviation of the CH2 duty cycle value.*/
                 Read the Rise Time
                 Example description: read the rise time using the set voltage threshold.
                 Method
                 :MEASure:THReshold:TYPE ABSolute                 /*Sets the threshold type to
                 ABSolute.*/
                 :MEASure:SETup:MAX 0.15                          /*Sets the threshold level upper
                 limit to 0.15 V.*/
                 :MEASure:SETup:MID 0                             /*Sets the threshold level middle
                 value to 0 V.*/
                 :MEASure:SETup:MIN -0.15                         /*Sets the threshold level lower
                 limit to -0.15 V.*/
                 :MEASure:ITEM RTIMe,CHANnel2           /*Adds the CH2 rise time
                 measurement item.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? CURRent,RTIMe /*Queries the current
                 measurement value of the CH2 rise time.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:RESet               /*Clears the history
                 statistics data and makes statistics again.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM RTIMe,CHANnel2 /*Enables the CH2 rise time
                 statistic function.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? CURRent,RTIMe /*Queries the current value
                 of the CH2 rise time.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? CNT,RTIMe,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the count value of the measurement item. */
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? MAXimum,RTIMe,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the maximum value of the CH2 rise time.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? MINimum,RTIMe,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the minimum value of the CH2 rise time.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? AVERages,RTIMe,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the average value of the CH2 rise time.*/
                 :MEASure:STATistic:ITEM? DEViation,RTIMe,CHANnel2
                           /*Queries the deviation of the CH2 rise time.*/
4.3             To Read the Waveform
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                   DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                    Guide
                                                                                                     417
Application Examples
              Read ASCII Data
              Example description: read ASCII data and transform the data to actual waveform data.
              Method
              :ACQuire:MDEPth 100k      /*Sets the memory depth to 100k.*/
              :RUN       /*Sets the oscilloscope to "RUN" state and wait for 5
              s.*/
              :STOP      /*Sets the oscilloscope to "STOP" state (the
              oscilloscope can only read the waveform data in internal memory
              when in "STOP" state).*/
              :WAV:SOUR CHAN1         /*Sets the channel source to CHANnel1.*/
              :WAV:MODE RAW           /*Sets the waveform reading mode to RAW.*/
              :WAV:FORM ASCii         /*Sets the return format of the waveform data
              to ASCii.*/
              :WAV:STAR 1              /*Sets the start point to read from to the 1st
              point.*/
              :WAV:STOP 100000         /*Sets the stop point to the 100,000th point
              (the last point).*/
              :WAV:DATA?               /*Reads the waveform data.*/
              :WAVeform:PREamble?      /*The query returns all waveform parameters.*/
              Read the Waveform Data in Internal Memory
              Example description: reads the waveform data from the internal memory.
              Method
              :ACQuire:MDEPth 100k   /*Sets the memory depth to 100k.*/
              :RUN    /*Sets the oscilloscope to "RUN" state and wait for 5 s.*/
              :STOP   /*Set the oscilloscope to "STOP" state (the oscilloscope
              can only read the waveform data in internal memory when in "STOP"
              state).*/
              :WAV:SOUR CHAN1       /*Sets the channel source to CHANnel1.*/
              :WAV:MODE RAW          /*Sets the waveform reading mode to RAW.*/
              :WAV:FORM BYTE         /*Sets the return format of the waveform
              data to BYTE.*/
              :WAV:STAR 1            /*Sets the start point to read from to the
              1st waveform.*/
              :WAVeform:STOP 100000 /*Sets the stop point to the 100,000th point
              (the last point).*/
              :WAV:DATA?             /*Reads the waveform data.*/
              Read the Waveform Data on the Screen
              Example description: reads the waveform data on the display.
              Method
              :WAV:SOUR CHAN1            /*Sets the channel source to CHANnel1.*/
              :WAV:MODE NORMal           /*Sets the waveform reading mode to NORMal.*/
              :WAV:FORM BYTE             /*Sets the return format of the waveform data
              to BYTE.*/
              :WAV:DATA?                 /*Reads the waveform data on the screen.*/
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
418
                                                                                  Programming Examples
5               Programming Examples
                 This chapter illustrates how to control the instrument by programming in LabVIEW,
                 Visual Basic, and Visual C++. These examples are programmed based on Virtual
                 Instrument Software Architecture (VISA) library.
                 RIGOL official website (http://www.rigol.com) provides the programming examples
                 based on LabVIEWk, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Matlab, and Python. You can go to the
                 official website and click SUPPORT > Programming Demo to obtain the
                 programming examples.
5.1             Programming Preparations
                 Before programming, you need to prepare the following tasks:
                 You can log in to the RIGOL official website (http://www.rigol.com) to download the
                 software. Then install the software according to the installation wizard. After Ultra
                 Sigma is installed successfully, NI-VISA library will be completely installed
                 automatically. In this manual, the default installation path is C:\Program Files\IVI
                 Foundation\VISA.
                 In the manual, the instrument communicates with the PC via the USB interface.
                 Connect the USB Device interface on the rear panel of the instrument to the PC by
                 using the USB cable. After the instrument is properly connected to the PC, power on
                 the instrument to start it.
                 The following parts will make a detailed introduction about the programming
                 examples in LabVIEW, Visual Basic, and Visual C++.
5.2             LabVIEW Programming Example
                 Program used in this example: LabVIEW2010
                 Function realized in this example: reading the waveform data of CH1 on the screen.
                 1. Run LabVIEW, and then create a VI file named LabVIEW_Demo.
                 2. Add controls and create the front panel as shown in the figure below.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                         419
Programming Examples
              3. Open the Block Diagram panel. Click Instrument I/O > VISA. Add the following
                functions: VISA Open, VISA Read, VISA Write, and VISA Close.
              4. Connect the VISA resource name with the VISA Open. Then, connect the VISA
                resource name outputs of all the functions with the VISA resource name and
                connect the error output with the error input, as shown in the figure below.
              5. Add string constant in the write buffer areas of the VISA Write function and input
                the following instructions in the figure below. Waveform data is read through the
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
420
                                                                                Programming Examples
                    VISA Read function which requires users to input the total number of bytes to be
                    read. In this example, the total number of bytes of waveform data to be read is less
                    than 2048. Use the VISA Close function to close the VISA resource after the VISA
                    operation is finished.
                 6. The data format is TMC data block header + waveform data + terminator. The TMC
                    header is in #NXXXXXX format; wherein, # is the TMC header identifier; N
                    following # represents the length of the waveform data; the length of the
                    waveform data points is expressed in ASCII strings,and the terminator represents
                    the ending of communication. For example, the data read for one time is
                    #9000001000XXXX. It indicates that 9 bytes are used to describe the data length.
                    000001000 indicates the length of waveform data, that is, 1,000 bytes. Use the
                    following block diagram to obtain the number of bytes that the TMC header
                    occupies. Ignore the TMC header and delete the terminator at the end of the
                    waveform data, and transfer the waveform data to the byte data and display it on
                    the waveform diagram controls.
                    The available functions used in the above block diagram as as follows:
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                     421
Programming Examples
                Used to obtain the TMC header"#N". After obtaining the number of bytes that the
                TMC header occupies, ignore the data header to obtain the waveform data strings
                Used to obtain the waveform data length bytes
                Used to delete the terminator at the end of the waveform data
                Used to transfer waveform data strings to the byte group
              7. The complete program block diagram is as shown in the figure below:
              8. Select the device resource from the VISA Resource Name drop-down list and run
                the program.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                      Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
422
                                                                                   Programming Examples
5.3             Visual Basic Programming Example
                 Program used in this example: Visual Basic 6.0
                 Function realized in this example: control the on/off state of any channel.
                 Enter the Visual Basic 6.0 programming environment, and perform the following
                 procedures.
                 1. Build a standard application program project (Standard EXE), and name it "Demo".
                 2. Click Project > Add Module to open the Add Module dialog box. In the dialog
                    box, click the Existing tab to search for the visa32.bas file in the include folder
                    under the NI-VISA installation path and add the file.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                    DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                     Guide
                                                                                                          423
Programming Examples
              3. In the Demo dialog box, add four buttons to represent CH1 to CH4 respectively.
                Add four Labels (Label1(0), Label1(1),Label1(2),Label1(3)) to represent the statuses
                of CH1 to CH4 respectively (when the channel is enabled, it displays the color of
                the channel; when the channel is disabled, it displays gray), as shown in the figure
                below.
              4. Click Project > Project1 Properties to open the Project1 – Project Properties
                dialog box. In the dialog box, click on the General tab and select Form1 from the
                drop-down list under Startup Object.
              5. Double-click CH1 to enter the programming environment. Add the following
                codes to control CH1-CH4. The codes of CH1 are as shown below; the codes of the
                other channels are similar.
                Dim defrm As Long
                Dim vi As Long
                Dim strRes As String * 200
                Dim list As Long
                Dim nmatches As Long
                Dim matches As String * 200 'Reserve the obtained device number
                Dim s32Disp As Integer
                ' Obtain the usb resource of visa
                Call viOpenDefaultRM(defrm)
                Call viFindRsrc(defrm, "USB?*", list, nmatches, matches)
                ' Turn on the instrument
                Call viOpen(defrm, matches, 0, 0, vi)
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
424
                                                                                Programming Examples
                    ' Send a command to query the status of CH1
                    Call viVPrintf(vi, ":CHAN1:DISP?" + Chr$(10), 0)
                    ' Obtain the status of CH1
                    Call viVScanf(vi, "%t", strRes)
                    s32Disp = CInt(strRes)
                    If (s32Disp = 1) Then
                    ' Send the setting command
                    Call viVPrintf(vi, ":CHAN1:DISP 0" + Chr$(10), 0)
                    Label1(0).ForeColor = &H808080 ''Gray
                    Else
                    Call viVPrintf(vi, ":CHAN1:DISP 1" + Chr$(10), 0)
                    Label1(0).ForeColor = &HFFFF& 'Yellow
                    End If
                    ' Close the resource
                    Call viClose(vi)
                    Call viClose(defrm)
                 6. Save and run the project to obtain a single exe program for demo. When the
                    instrument is correctly connected to the PC, you can control the on/off status of
                    any channel.
5.4             Visual C++ Programming Example
                 Program used in this example:Visual C++6.0
                 Function realized in this example:search for the instrument address, connect to the
                 instrument, send commands, and read return values.
                 Enter the Visual C++6.0 programming environment, and perform the following
                 procedures.
                 1. Create a MFC project based on a dialog box.
                 2. Click Project > Settings to open the Project Setting dialog box. In the dialog box,
                    click the C/C++ tab, select Code Generation from the drop-down list under
                    Category. Choose Debug Multithreaded DLL from the drop-down list under Use
                    run-time library. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                  DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                   Guide
                                                                                                        425
Programming Examples
              3. Click Project > Settings to open the Project Setting dialog box. In the dialog box,
                click the Link tab, add "visa32.lib" under Object/library modules, then click OK to
                close the dialog box.
              4. Click Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box. Then click the Directories
                tab.
                Select Include files from the drop-down list under Show directories for. Double
                click the empty space under Directories to enter the specified path of Include files:
                C:\Program Files\IVI Foundation\VISA\WinNT\include. Click OK to close the dialog
                box.
                Select Library files from the drop-down list under Show directories for. Double
                click the empty space under Directories to enter the specified path of Library files:
                C:\Program Files\IVI Foundation\VISA\WinNT\lib\msc. Click OK to close the dialog
                box.
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
426
                                                                               Programming Examples
                    Note: By now, VISA library has been added.
                 5. Add the Text, Combo Box, Button, and Edit Box controls. The layout interface for
                    adding controls is as follows:
                 6. Modify the control attributes.
                     a. Name Text as "Command".
                     b. Open the Data item in the Combo Box attribute and input the following
                        command *IDN? manually.
                     c. Open the General item in the Edit Box attribute and select Disabled.
                     d. Name Button as Send and Read.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                   427
Programming Examples
              7. Add the variables m_combox and m_receive to the Combo Box and Edit Box
                controls respectively.
              8. Add codes.
                Double-click Send and Read to enter the programming environment. Declare the
                #include <visa.h> of the VISA library in the header file and then add the following
                codes:
                ViSession defaultRM, vi;
                char buf [256] = {0};
                CString s,strTemp;
                char* stringTemp;
                ViChar buffer [VI_FIND_BUFLEN];
DHO800/DHO900 Programming                       Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
Guide
428
                                                                               Programming Examples
                    ViRsrc matches=buffer;
                    ViUInt32 nmatches;
                    ViFindList list;
                    viOpenDefaultRM (&defaultRM);
                    //Acquire the USB resource of VISA
                    viFindRsrc(defaultRM, "USB?*", &list,&nmatches, matches);
                    viOpen (defaultRM,matches,VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&vi);
                    //Send the command received
                    m_combox.GetLBText(m_combox.GetCurSel(),strTemp);
                    strTemp = strTemp + "\n";
                    stringTemp = (char *)(LPCTSTR)strTemp;
                    viPrintf (vi,stringTemp);
                    //Read the results
                    viScanf (vi, "%t\n", &buf);
                    //Display the results
                    UpdateData (TRUE);
                    m_receive = buf;
                    UpdateData (FALSE);
                    viClose (vi);
                    viClose (defaultRM);
                 9. Save, compile, and run the project to obtain a single exe file. When the instrument
                    is correctly connected to the PC, enter a command (for example, *IDN?) and click
                    Send and Read to execute the command. Then, the reading results will be
                    returned.
Copyright ©RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved.                 DHO800/DHO900 Programming
                                                                                                  Guide
                                                                                                    429
